63330en PDF

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 15i / 150iModel A

Parameter Manual
GFZ-63330EN/03
October 2000
GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may
be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which
are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no
obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
Copyright 2000 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B-63320EN/03
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.
Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly
before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved
procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and
Caution.
- Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
PREFACE
B-63320EN/03
PREFACE
Applicable product name
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are:
Product name
FANUC Series 15i -MA
FANUC Series 150i -MA
Abbreviations
15i -MA
Series 15i
150i -MA
Series 150i
NOTE
Some functions described in this manual may not be
applied to some products. For detail, refer to the
DESCRIPTIONS manual (B-63322EN).
Related manuals
The table below lists manuals related to MODEL A of Series 15i, and
Series 150i. In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk (*).
Table 1 (a) Related Manuals
Manual name
DESCRIPTIONS
DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Remote Buffer)
CONNECTION MANUAL (Hardware)
CONNECTION MANUAL (Function)
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(Macro Compiler/Macro Executor)
OPERATORS MANUAL (PROGRAMMING)
OPERATORS MANUAL (OPERATION)
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
PARAMETER MANUAL
p-1
Specification
number
B-63322EN
B-63322EN-1
B-63323EN
B-63323EN-1
B-63323EN-2
B-63324EN
B-63324EN-1
B-63325EN
B-63330EN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B-63330EN/03
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ................................ s-1
PREFACE.................................................................................................. p-1
1
DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR

COMPENSATION DATA........................................................................1
1.1
1.2
SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR

COMPENSATION DATA........................................................................7
2.1
2.2
SETTING PARAMETERS..............................................................................8
SETTING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA ...................................10
INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS USING

EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES...............................................12
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
DISPLAYING PARAMETERS........................................................................2
DISPLAYING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA ...............................5
INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS ON THE

PARAMETER SCREEN...............................................................................13
INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS ON THE FLOPPY
DIRECTORY SCREEN................................................................................16
INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS ON THE MEMORY
CARD SCREEN...........................................................................................18
INPUT/OUTPUT FORMATS........................................................................20
3.4.1
Input/Output Formats for Parameters .................................................................... 20
3.4.2
Input/Output Format for Pitch Error Compensation Data ..................................... 26
DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS......................................................27
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
DATA TYPES ..............................................................................................27

REPRESENTATION OF PARAMETERS ....................................................28
STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES ..........................................29
SETTING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 0000 AND LATER) .........................31
TIMER PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 0100 AND LATER)..............................40
AXIS CONTROL PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1000 AND LATER) ..............43
CHOPPING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1181 AND LATER)......................66
COORDINATE SYSTEM PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1200 AND LATER) .69
FEEDRATE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1400 AND LATER)......................74
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
4.22
4.23
4.24
4.25
4.26
4.27
4.28
4.29
4.30
4.31
4.32
B-63330EN/03
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL PARAMETERS

(DATA NO. 1600 AND LATER) ...................................................................99
SERVO PARAMETER
(DATA NO. 1700 TO 1999 AND 2600 AND LATER).................................111
DI/DO PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2000 AND LATER).............................137
DISPLAY/MDI AND EDIT PARAMETERS
(DATA NO. 2200 AND LATER) .................................................................151
PROGRAM PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2400 AND LATER) ....................169
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT AND CS CONTOUR CONTROL
FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 3000 AND LATER) ....................180
FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 3000 AND LATER) ....................181
DRAWING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 4820 AND LATER) .....................192
DATA I/O PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5000 AND LATER) .......................195
STROKE LIMIT PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5200 AND LATER)..............203
PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION PARAMETERS
(DATA NO. 5420 AND LATER) .................................................................211
SPINDLE CONTROL PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5602 AND LATER) .....226
TOOL COMPENSATION PARAMETERS
(DATA NO. 6000 AND LATER) .................................................................267
CANNED CYCLE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 6200 AND LATER)...........293
SCALING AND COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION PARAMETERS
(DATA NO. 6400 AND LATER) .................................................................298
CUSTOM MACRO PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7000 AND LATER) .........303
PROGRAM RESTART, BLOCK RESTART, AND TOOL RETRACTION
AND RETURN PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7110 AND LATER) ...............317
SKIP FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7200 AND LATER) ...........318
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PARAMETERS
(DATA NO. 7400 AND LATER) .................................................................327
FIVE-AXIS CONTROL FUNCTION PARAMETERS
(DATA NO. 7514 AND LATER) .................................................................332
OTHER PARAMETERS.............................................................................341
SERVICE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 8000 AND LATER) .......................370
MACRO EXECUTOR PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 8500 AND LATER).....371
c-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B-63330EN/03

A
CHARACTER CODE LIST .................................................................375
LIST OF COMPATIBLE PARAMETERS FOR SERIES 15-MB..........376
c-3
B-63330EN/03
1.DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA
DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH

ERROR COMPENSATION DATA
This chapter explains how to display parameters and pitch error
compensation data.
-1-
1.1
B-63330EN/03
DISPLAYING PARAMETERS
The Parameter screen displays the values specified for CNC
parameters.
Parameter screen
Displaying the Parameter screen

Follow either of the procedures described below to display the
Parameter screen.
Method 1
Press the <SYSTEM> function key several times, until the
Parameter screen appears.
Method 2
(1) Press the <SYSTEM> function key.
(2) Click the [PARAMETER] soft key.
Fig. 1.1 (a) Parameter Screen
-2-
B-63330EN/03
Displaying specified parameters

The Parameter screen consists of multiple pages.
Follow one of the procedures described below to display the specified
parameter.
Method 1
Using the <PAGE > <PAGE > page keys, and the <> <>
<> <> cursor keys, move the cursor to display the desired
parameter.
Method 2
(1) Click the [NO. SEARCH] soft key.
(2) Key in the number of the parameter to be displayed.
(3) Click the [EXEC] soft key.
Method 3
(1) Key in the number of the parameter to be displayed.
Select Group screen

The Select Group screen can be used to display a selected group of
parameters.
Displaying the Select Group screen

On the Parameter screen, select the [SELECTGROUP] soft key.
Fig. 1.1 (b) Select Group Screen
-3-
B-63330EN/03
Selecting a group
Move the cursor to the group to be displayed.
Method 1
Use the <> <> <> <> cursor keys, move the cursor.
Method 2
(2) Key in the number of the group to be displayed.
Method 3
(1) Key in the number of the group to be displayed.
Ending group selection

Click the [SELECTEND] soft key to exit from the Select Group
screen and return to the Parameter screen. The selected group of
parameters is displayed, starting with the first parameter.
-4-
B-63330EN/03
1.2
DISPLAYING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

The Pitch Error Compensation screen displays the values specified for
pitch error compensation data.
Pitch Error Compensation screen
Displaying the Pitch Error Compensation screen

Follow either of the procedures described below to display the Pitch
Error Compensation screen.
Method 1
Press the <SYSTEM> function key several times, until the Pitch
Error Compensation screen appears.
Method 2
(2) Click the [PITCH ERROR] soft key.
Fig. 1.2 (a) Pitch Error Compensation Screen
-5-
B-63330EN/03
Displaying specified pitch error compensation data

The Pitch Error Compensation screen consists of multiple pages.
Follow one of the procedures described below to display specified
Method 1
<> <> cursor keys, move the cursor to display the desired
Method 2
(2) Key in the number of the pitch error compensation data to be
displayed.
Method 3
(1) Key in the number of the pitch error compensation data to
be displayed.
-6-
B-63330EN/03
2.SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA
SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH

ERROR COMPENSATION DATA
This chapter explains how to set parameters and pitch error
compensation data from the MDI.
-7-
2.1
B-63330EN/03
SETTING PARAMETERS
The Parameter screen is used to set parameters from the MDI.
For an explanation of how to display the Parameter screen, see
Section 1.1, "Displaying Parameters."
Procedure for setting parameters

- Entering the mode
Enter MDI mode. Alternatively, press the emergency stop button to
enter the emergency stop status.
- Setting parameter PWE

On the Setting Parameter screen, set bit 0 of the setting/input-enabled
parameter PWE (No. 8000) to 1.
For the setting procedure, refer to Section II-9.3, "Displaying and
Setting Setting Parameters" in the "FANUC Series 15i/150i-MA
OPERATORS MANUAL (Operation)."
- Moving the cursor

Move the cursor to the parameter to be set.
Method 1
<> <> cursor keys, to move the cursor.
Method 2
(2) Key in the parameter number.
Method 3
(1) Key in the parameter number.
- Entering a setting (absolute input)

Method 1
(1) Click the [INPUT] soft key.
(2) Key in the desired setting.
Method 2
Method 3
-8-
B-63330EN/03
- Entering a setting (incremental input)

Method 1
(1) Click the [+INPUT] soft key.
(2) Key in the value to be added to the current setting.
Method 2
NOTE
For bit/bit axis/bit spindle type parameters,
incremental input is not possible. Even if the
[+INPUT] soft key is clicked, absolute input is
assumed.
- Bit ON:1
By clicking the [ON:1] soft key, the bit of a bit/bit axis/bit spindle
type parameter on which the cursor is displayed is set to 1.
If the cursor is displayed on all bits, all the bits are set to 1.
- Bit OFF:0
By clicking the [OFF:0] soft key, the bit of a bit/bit axis/bit spindle
type parameter on which the cursor is displayed is set to 0.
If the cursor is displayed on all bits, all the bits are set to 0.
- Ending the setting

When parameters have been set, set bit 0 of the setting/input-enabled
NOTE
The blank bits in the parameter list (Chapter 4,
"DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS") and the
parameters displayed on the Parameter screen but
not shown on the list are either reserved for future
expansion or used internally in the CNC. Do not
change the values of these parameter bits.
-9-
2.2
B-63330EN/03
SETTING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

For an explanation of how to display the Pitch Error Compensation
screen, see Section 1.2, "Displaying Pitch Error Compensation Data."
The Pitch Error Compensation screen is used to set pitch error
compensation data.
Procedure for setting pitch error compensation data

- Entering the mode
Enter MDI mode. Alternatively, press the emergency stop button to
enter the emergency stop status.
- Setting parameter PWE

On the Setting Parameter screen, set bit 0 of the setting/input-enabled
For the setting procedure, refer to Section II-9.3, "Displaying and
Setting Setting Parameters" in the "FANUC Series 15i/150i-MA
OPERATORS MANUAL (Operation)."
- Moving the cursor

Move the cursor to the pitch error compensation data to be set.
Method 1
<> <> cursor keys, to move the cursor.
Method 2
(2) Key in the pitch error compensation data number.
Method 3
(1) Key in the pitch error compensation data number.
- Entering a setting (absolute input)

Method 1
Method 2
(2) Click the [INPUT] soft key. B
Method 3
(2) Click the [INPUT] soft key. B
- 10 -
B-63330EN/03
- Entering a setting (incremental input)

Method 1
Method 2
- 11 -
3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS USING EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES
B-63330EN/03
INPUTTING
AND
OUTPUTTING
PARAMETERS
USING
EXTERNAL
INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES
This chapter explains the procedures for inputting and outputting
parameters using the input/output device connected to the
reader/punch interface or using a memory card, as well as
input/output formats.
- 12 -
B-63330EN/03
3.1

PARAMETER SCREEN
This section explains the procedures for inputting and outputting
parameters on the Parameter screen.
Before parameters can be input and output, the parameters related to
the input/output device must be set.
Displaying the Parameter screen

Parameter screen.
Method 1
Press the <SYSTEM> function key several times, until the
Parameter screen appears.
Method 2
Outputting parameters
Method 1 (neither the output file name nor number need be specified)
(1) Enter MDI mode.
(2) Click the [PUNCH] soft key.
Method 2 (the output file name is specified)
(1) Enter MDI mode.
(3) Click the ["FILE NAME] soft key.
(4) Key in the file name.
(5) Click the [FILE NAME"] soft key.
Method 3 (the file number is specified, one of three methods)
(1) Enter MDI mode.
(3) Click the [(FILE#)] soft key.
(4) Key in the file number.
(1) Enter MDI mode.
(3) Click the <N> address key.
(1) Enter MDI mode.
(4) Click the [PUNCH] soft key. B
- 13 -
B-63330EN/03
Inputting parameters
Method 1 (neither the input file name nor number need be specified)
(1) Enter MDI mode.
(2) Enter the emergency stop status.
(3) Click the [READ] soft key.
Method 2 (the input file is specified with its file name)
(1) Enter MDI mode.
(5) Key in the file name.
Method 3 (the input file is specified with its file number, one of three
methods)
(1) Enter MDI mode.
(4) Click the [(FILE#)] soft key.
methods)
(1) Enter MDI mode.
methods)
(1) Enter MDI mode.
- 14 -
B-63330EN/03
NOTE
1 When outputting and inputting parameters to and
from a FANUC Floppy Cassette, FANUC FA Card,
and FANUC Handy File, you can specify the
input/output file with its file name or number.
2 When outputting and inputting parameters to and
from a memory card, you can specify the
input/output file with its file name.
3 When method 1 (in which neither the output file
name nor number need be specified), described in
"Outputting parameters," is used to output
parameters to a FANUC Floppy Cassette, FANUC
FA Card, FANUC Handy File, and memory card,
the file name will be CNC-PARA.TXT.
- 15 -
3.2
B-63330EN/03

FLOPPY DIRECTORY SCREEN
parameters on the Floppy Directory screen, using the FANUC Floppy
Cassette, FANUC FA Card, FANUC Handy File, or FANUC
PROGRAM FILE Mate connected to the serial interface (RS-232-C
or RS-422).
Displaying the Floppy Directory screen

Follow either of the procedures described below to display the Floppy
Directory screen.
Method 1
Press the <OFFSET/SETTING> function key several times, until
the Floppy Directory screen appears.
Method 2
(1) Press the <OFFSET/SETTING> function key.
(2) Click the [RS232C] soft key.
(1) Click the [DATA SELECT] soft key.
"PARAMETER" appears in IN/OUT DATA.
(3) Follow either of the procedures described below to set the output
file name
Method 1 (the file name is entered using MDI keys)
(1) Click the [NAME INPUT] soft key.
(3) Enter the file name with MDI keys.
Method 2 (the file name is selected from a file list)
(1) Click the [DIR. VIEW] soft key.
A list of files contained in the input/output device is
displayed. If the list cannot be displayed on a single page,
"Prev Page" and "Next Page" are displayed in PAGE
SELECT to indicate that there are multiple pages.
Press the <PAGE > <PAGE > key to display the
specified page.
(2) Move the cursor to the desired output file name.
(3) Click the [NAME GET] soft key.
(4) Enter MDI mode.
(5) Click the [DATA PUNCH] soft key.
- 16 -
B-63330EN/03
A list of files contained in the input/output device is displayed. If
the list cannot be displayed on a single page, "Prev Page" and
"Next Page" are displayed in PAGE SELECT to indicate that
there are multiple pages.
Press the <PAGE > <PAGE > key to display the specified
page.
(4) Move the cursor to the desired input file name.
(5) Enter MDI mode.
(7) Click the [DATA READ] soft key.
- 17 -
3.3
B-63330EN/03

MEMORY CARD SCREEN
parameters on the Memory Card screen.
Displaying the Memory Card screen

Memory Card screen.
Method 1
Press the <OFFSET/SETTING> function key several times, until
the Memory Card screen appears.
Method 2
(1) Press the <OFFSET/SETTING> function key.
(2) Click the [MEMCARD] soft key.
(3) Follow either of the procedures described below to set the output
file name.
Method 1 (the file name is entered using MDI keys)
(1) Click the [NAME INPUT] soft key.
(3) Enter the file name with MDI keys.
Method 2 (the file name is selected from a file list)
A list of files contained in the input/output device is
displayed. If the list cannot be displayed on a single
page, "Prev Page" and "Next Page" are displayed in
PAGE SELECT to indicate that there are multiple
pages.
Press the <PAGE > <PAGE > key to display the
specified page.
(2) Move the cursor to the desired output file name.
(3) Click the [NAME GET] soft key.
(4) Enter MDI mode.
(5) Click the [DATA PUNCH] soft key.
- 18 -
B-63330EN/03
A list of files contained in the input/output device is displayed. If
the list cannot be displayed on a single page, "Prev Page" and
"Next Page" are displayed in PAGE SELECT to indicate that
there are multiple pages.
Press the <PAGE > <PAGE > key to display the specified
page.
(4) Move the cursor to the desired input file name.
(5) Enter MDI mode.
(7) Click the [DATA READ] soft key.
- 19 -
3.4
B-63330EN/03
INPUT/OUTPUT FORMATS
This section explains the input/output formats for parameters and
3.4.1
Input/Output Formats for Parameters

Parameters are classified according to data types, as follows.
- Bit type
- Bit axis type
- Bit spindle type
- Integer type
- Integer axis type
- Integer spindle type
- Real type
- Real axis type
- Real spindle type
Bit/bit axis/bit spindle type parameters are represented by 8-digit
binary numbers, with each digit occupying a single bit.
The valid value ranges of the individual integer/integer axis/integer
spindle/real/real axis/real spindle type parameters differ. For details,
see the description of each parameter.
- Keywords
The following alphabetic characters are used as keywords.
The numeric values following the keywords have the meanings
described below.
Keyword
Description of the numeric value following the keyword
N
A
Parameter number
Controlled axis number of an axis type parameter (1 or
above)
Spindle number of a spindle type parameter (1 or above)
Value of a parameter that does not depend on
inch/metric switching
Metric-input-time value of a parameter dependent on
Inch-input-time value of a parameter dependent on
S
P
M
I
- 20 -
B-63330EN/03
- Inch/metric switching
The data specified for parameters dependent on inch/metric switching,
such as length and feedrate parameters, is determined to be in either
inch or metric mode depending on the mode assumed at input time for
input from the MDI and depending on whether the keyword preceding
the data is I or M for input from an external input/output device.
These I and M keywords are added to data as appropriate when that
data is output from an external input/output device.
If the mode assumed at input time or the keyword does not match the
mode assumed when the data is to be used, for example, the data input
in inch mode is to be used in metric mode, the CNC automatically
converts the data before use, eliminating the need to change the data
according to the mode change. In addition, in the display of parameter
data, data is converted according to the mode assumed at display time,
before the data is displayed. When the data is to be output from the
external input/output device, it is converted back to the original data
according to the keyword or mode.
- Bit type format

N
*****
********
The 8-digit binary number following P represents the values (0 or 1)

of the bits of the parameter, with the first digit corresponding to bit 0
and the eighth digit to bit 7. Leading zeros cannot be omitted.
; is an end of block character (LF for ISO code and CR for EIA code).
Example
N00010P00000001;
Parameter number 10
Parameter value
Bit 0 is 1 and the others are 0.
- Bit axis type format
N
*****
**
********
**
********
..
..
The numeric value following N represents the parameter number.

The numeric value following A represents the controlled axis number
(1 or above).
of the bits of the parameter for that controlled axis, with the first digit
corresponding to bit 0 and the eighth digit to bit 7. Leading zeros
cannot be omitted.
Example
N0005A1P10000001A2P10000001A3P10000001A4P00001001....;
Parameter number
1005
Parameter values
First axis: Bits 0 and 7 are 1 and the others are 0.
Second axis: Bits 0 and 7 are 1 and the others are 0.
Third axis: Bits 0 and 7 are 1 and the others are 0.
Fourth axis: Bits 0 and 3 are 1 and the others are 0.
- 21 -
B-63330EN/03
- Bit spindle type format

N
*****
********
********
..
..

The numeric value following S represents the spindle number (1 or
above).
of the bits of the parameter for that spindle, with the first digit
corresponding to bit 0 and the eighth digit to bit 7. Leading zeros
cannot be omitted.
Example
N05603S1P00001000S2P00001000S3P00000000S4P000000000;
Parameter number
Parameter values
First spindle:
Second spindle:
Third spindle:
Fourth spindle:
5603
All bits are 0.
All bits are 0.
- Integer type format

N
*****
******

The numeric value following P represents the value (integer) of the
parameter.
Example
N00100P31515;
Parameter number
Parameter value
- 22 -
100
31515
B-63330EN/03
- Integer axis type format

N
*****
**
******
**
******
..
..

(1 or above).
parameter.
Example
N01020A1P88A2P89A3P90A4P66......;
Parameter number 1020
Parameter values
First axis:
88
Second axis:
89
Third axis:
90
Fourth axis:
66
- Integer spindle type format
N
*****
******
******
..
..

The numeric value following S represents the controlled axis number
(1 or above).
parameter.
Example
N05680S1P19S2P19S3P0S4P0;
Parameter values
First spindle:
19
Second spindle: 19
Third spindle:
0
Fourth spindle: 0
- 23 -
B-63330EN/03
- Real type format

N
*****
******
*****
******
*****
******

The numeric value following P, M, or I represents the value (real) of
the parameter.
Example
N01451P5000.0;
Parameter number
Parameter number
1451
000.0
- Real axis type format

N
*****
**
******
**
******
..
..
*****
**
******
**
******
..
..
*****
**
******
**
******
..
..

(1 or above).
the parameter.
Example
N01220A1M50.0A2M60.0A3M70.0A4M0.0A5M0.0 ........;
Parameter number
Parameter values
First axis:
Second axis:
Third axis:
Fourth axis:
Fifth axis:
- 24 -
1220
50.0
60.0
70.0
0.0
0.0
B-63330EN/03
- Real spindle type format

N
*****
******
******
..
..
*****
******
******
..
..
*****
******
******
..
..

The numeric value following S represents the controlled axis number
(1 or above).
the parameter.
Example
N05898S1P30.0S2P30.0S3P0.0S4P0.0;
Parameter values
First spindle:
30.0
Second spindle: 30.0
Third spindle:
0.0
Fourth spindle: 0.0
- Beginning and end of a record
A record of parameters begins with "%" and ends with "%."
Example
%;
................................ Beginning of a record
N00000P00001100;
N00002P00000000;
:
N09162P00000000;
N09163P00000000;
%
................................ End of the record
When parameters and pitch error compensation data are collected into
a single file, the file begins and ends with "%."
- 25 -
3.4.2
B-63330EN/03
Input/Output Format for Pitch Error Compensation Data
- Keywords
The following alphabetic characters are used as keywords.
The numeric values following the keywords have the meanings
described below.
Keyword
Description of the numeric value following the keyword
Pitch error compensation data number

Pitch error compensation data value
N
P
- Format
Pitch error compensation data is output in the following format.
N
*****
****
The 5-digit numeric value following N represents the pitch error

compensation data number. Note that this number is equal to the
actual pitch error compensation data number plus 10000.
pitch error compensation data, which is in the range of -128 to 127.
Example
N10001P100;
Pitch error compensation data number
Pitch error compensation data value
- Beginning and end of a record

A record of pitch error compensation data begins with "%" and ends
with "%."
Example
%;
.................................... Beginning of a record
N10000P10;
N10001P100;
:
N11279P0;
%
.................................... End of the record
When parameters and pitch error compensation data are collected into
a single file, the file begins and ends with "%."
- 26 -
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
B-63330EN/03
4
4.1
DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
DATA TYPES
Parameters are classified according to data types, as follows:
Data type
Bit type
Bit axis type
Valid data range
Remarks
0 or 1
Bit spindle type

Integer type
Integer axis type
Integer spindle type
Real type
Real axis type
Real spindle type
0 to 999999999
Some parameters are handled as

unsigned data.
See the Standard

Parameter Setting
Tables.
NOTE
1 Each of bit, bit axis, and bit spindle type parameters
contains eight bits (eight different meanings) for a
single data number.
2 The axis type means that independent data can be
set for each controlled axis.
3 The spindle type means that independent data can
be set for each spindle.
4 The valid data ranges are general ones. The valid
data range differs from one parameter to another.
For details, see the explanation of each parameter.
- 27 -
4.2
B-63330EN/03
REPRESENTATION OF PARAMETERS
Bit, bit axis, and bit spindle types
#7
#6
#5
0000
Data
number
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
EIA
NCR
ISP
CTV
TVC
Data (#0 to #7 indicate bit positions.)
Types other than bit, bit axis, and bit spindle types
1023
Servo axis number of each axis
Data
number
Data
NOTE
The blank bits in the parameter list (Chapter 4,
"DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS") and the
parameters displayed on the Parameter screen but
not shown on the list are reserved for future
expansion. Be sure to set these parameter bits to 0.
- 28 -
B-63330EN/03
4.3
STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES
Overview
This section specifies the standard minimum data units and standard
valid data ranges of real, real axis, and real spindle type CNC
parameters. The data type of each parameter and its unit of data
conform to the specifications of each function.
Explanations
(A)
(B)
Length and angle parameters (type 1)

Unit of data
Increment
system
mm
deg.
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
IS-D
IS-E
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
-999999.99 to +999999.99
-999999.999 to +999999.999
-99999.9999 to +99999.9999
-9999.99999 to +9999.99999
-999.999999 to +999.999999
inch
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
IS-D
IS-E
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
0.0000001
-99999.999 to +99999.999
-99999.9999 to +99999.9999
-9999.99999 to +9999.99999
-999.999999 to +999.999999
-99.9999999 to +99.9999999
Minimum data unit
Valid data range
Length and angle parameters (type 2)

Unit of data
Increment
system
mm
deg.
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
IS-D
IS-E
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
0.00 to +999999.99
0.000 to +999999.999
0.0000 to +99999.9999
0.00000 to +9999.99999
0.000000 to +999.999999
inch
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
IS-D
IS-E
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
0.0000001
0.000 to +99999.999
0.0000 to +99999.9999
0.00000 to +9999.99999
0.000000 to +999.999999
0.0000000 to +99.9999999
Minimum data unit
- 29 -
Valid data range
B-63330EN/03
(C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters

Unit of data
Increment
system
mm/min
deg./min
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
IS-D
IS-E
0.0001
0.0001
0.0001
0.0001
0.0001
0.0 to +2400000.0
0.0 to +240000.0
0.0 to +100000.0
0.0 to +10000.0
0.0 to +1000.0
inch/min
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
IS-D
IS-E
0.00001
0.00001
0.00001
0.00001
0.00001
0.0 to +2400000.0
0.0 to +240000.0
0.0 to +100000.0
0.0 to +10000.0
0.0 to +1000.0
Minimum data unit
Valid data range
(D) Acceleration and angular acceleration parameters

Unit of data
mm/sec
2
deg./sec
inch/sec
Increment
system
Minimum data unit
Valid data range
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
IS-D
IS-E
0.01
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
0.0 to +100000.0
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
IS-D
IS-E
0.001
0.0001
0.00001
0.000001
0.0000001
0.0 to +10000.0
Notes
(1) Values are rounded up or down to the nearest multiples of the
minimum data unit.
(2) A valid data range means the limits on data entry. It may differ
from the numeric values representing actual performance.
(3) For information on the ranges of commands to the CNC, refer to
Appendix, "List of Command Ranges," in the "FANUC Series
15i/150i-MA OPERATORS MANUAL (Programming)" (B63324EN).
- 30 -
B-63330EN/03
4.4
SETTING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 0000 AND LATER)

#7
0000
#6
#5
RDN
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
TVC
#1
CTV
#2
ISP
#3
NCR
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
EIA
NCR
ISP
CTV
TVC
Setting input
Bit
Specifies whether TV check is performed.
0: Do not perform.
1: Perform.
Specifies whether characters are counted for TV check during control
out.
0: Count.
1: Do not count.
Specifies whether ISO codes contain a parity bit.
0: Contain parity bit.
1: Do not contain parity bit.
A parity bit is located at channel 8 in a punched tape in the ISO code.
Specifies how to punch an EOB (end-of-block) code when using ISO
codes.
0: Punch LF CR CR.
1: Punch LF.
NOTE
This bit is disabled, when bit 2 (CRF) of parameter
No.0002 is set to 1.
#4
EIA
#6
RDN
Specifies the code system to use for punch codes.

0: ISO code
1: EIA code
Specifies whether the Remote Diagnostic Function is used
0: Disable
1: Enable
The device setting for Remote Diagnostic Function is used current
setting when this bit is set to 1. After all device parameters are set,
this bit should be set to 1. When the device parameters are changed,
this bit must be set to 0.
NOTE
During this bit is set to 1, the communication device is
occupied by Remote Diagnostic Function. So, while
this bit is 1, dont read data and dont punch data from
CNC side.
- 31 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
#4
0002
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
#3
#2
PZS
CRF
#1
#0
Setting input
Bit
PZS
0:
#2
CRF
0010
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
INI
#1
SQN
#3
SB7
#4
SB8
#5
SBM
Do not suppress the zeros of O numbers during the punching of a

part program.
1: Suppress the zeros of O numbers during the punching of a part
program.
Specifies how to punch an EOB (end-of-block) code when using ISO
codes.
0: Use parameter NCR iNo.0#3).
1: Punch CR LF.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
SBO
SBC
SBM
SB8
SB7
#2
#1
#0
SQN
INI
Setting input
Bit
Specifies whether the increment system is metric or in inches.
0: Metric input
1: Inch input
Specifies whether sequence numbers are automatically inserted.
0: Do not insert.
1: Insert.
Specifies whether to stop after each block of custom macro statements
in programs O7000 to O7999.
0: Do not stop after each block.
1: Stop after each block.
This bit is used to check programs O7000 to O7999 containing
custom macro statements.
in programs O8000 to O8999.
This bit is used to check programs O8000 to O8999 containing
custom macro statements.
in any program.
0: Do not stop after each block. However, when stopping is
specified in SB7 or SB8, stopping will occur in programs
affected by these parameters.
This bit is used to check programs containing custom macro
statements.
- 32 -
B-63330EN/03
#6
SBC
#7
SBO
Specifies whether to stop after each block in hole-machining canned

cycles.
This bit is used to check programs containing canned cycles.
Specifies whether to stop after each block automatically generated in
the NC for cutter or tool tip radius compensation.
This bit is used to check programs containing cutter or tool tip radius
compensation.
#7
#6
0011
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
NE8
#1
ND8
#4
TIM
#5
NOT
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
MIR
#1
SCL
#4
NOT
TIM
#3
#2
#1
#0
ND8
NE8
Setting input
Bit
Specifies whether to permit editing of O8000 to O8999 programs.
0: Permit editing.
1: Do not permit editing.
Specifies whether to display the program being executed on the
screen for programs O8000 to O8999.
0: Display program being executed.
1: Do not display program being executed.
When there is no need to display custom macros or other programs
being executed, set this parameter to 1.
Specifies the information displayed on the screen for the program No.
and name directory.
0: Display program No., name, and memory used.
1: Display program No., name, and processing time.
Specifies whether to use Tool Nos. to specify output of tool pot Nos.
and tool offsets.
0: Use tool Nos. (H/D codes cannot be used to specify tool length
compensation and cutter compensation.)
1: Do not use tool Nos. (H/D codes can be used to specify tool
length compensation and cutter compensation.)
#7
0012
#5
#6
#5
RMV
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
SCL
MIR
Setting input
Bitaxis
For each axis, specifies whether to use its mirror image.
0: Do not use mirror image (normal).
1: Use mirror image (mirror).
For this axis, specifies whether scaling is used.
0: Do not use scaling.
1: Use scaling.
- 33 -
#7
RMV
For each axis, specifies whether to detach the shaft corresponding to

the control axis.
0: Do not detach.
1: Detach.
(Equivalent to the control axis detach signals DTCH1, DTCH2, and
so on.)
Effective when RMB (bit 7 of parameter No. 1005) is set to 1.
#7
0013
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
HKE
#5
HDE
#6
DSL
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
FAN
#4
ASG
#5
NIC
#7
HD2
#6
#5
#4
DSL
HDE
HKE
#3
#2
#1
#0
Setting input
Bit
Specifies whether to store the history of key operations.
0: Do not store the history.
1: Store the history.
Specifies whether to store the history of DI/DO.
0: Do not store the history.
1: Store the history.
Specifies whether to display the system log screen.
0: Do not display the screen.
1: Display the screen.
#7
0014
B-63330EN/03
#6
HD2
#5
#4
NIC
ASG
#3
#2
#1
#0
FAN
Setting input
Bit
Specifies whether to ignore alarm FAN MOTOR STOP (OH002).
0: Do not ignore the alarm.
1: Ignore the alarm.
Specifies what compensation is to be changed in the Changing Active
Offset Value with Manual Move mode for offset memory B/C, as
follows:
0: Wear compensation
1: Geometry compensation
This parameter is valid for offset memory B/C.
Specifies whether to perform an interference check when
compensation plane switching occurs during three-dimensional cutter
compensation.
0: Perform.
1: Do not perform.
Specifies whether the size of one file can exceed 2000 m when using
a floppy cassette, the PROGRAM FILE Mate, HANDY FILE, or FA
card.
0: Within 2000 m
1: Can exceed 2000 m
- 34 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
0015
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
SVS
#1
SPS
#2
HPC
#3
OHS
#4
EKE
#7
NDM
#6
#5
NDM
0020
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
#3
#2
#1
#0
OHS
HPC
SPS
SVS
Setting input
Bit
Specifies whether to display the servo screen.
0: Display the servo screen.
1: Do not display the servo screen.
Specifies whether to display or hide the servo setting screen, servo
adjustment/monitor screen, servo function setting screen, servo alarm
screen, and backlash screen.
Specifies whether to display the spindle screen.
0: Display the spindle screen.
1: Do not display the spindle screen.
Specifies whether to enable the high-speed and high-precision
machining setting screen.
0: Enable the screen.
1: Disable the screen.
Specifies whether to display the operation history screen and the
signal selection screen.
0: Do not display the screens. (The alarm history screen can be
displayed.)
1: Display the screens.
Specifies whether to enable the [ALL CLEAR] soft key that erases
history data.
0: Disable the soft key.
1: Enable the soft key.
The PROFIBUS-DP screen is

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
The change of this bit takes effect at the next startup.
0016
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
#4
EKE
Screen saver start time
Setting input
Integer
min
0 - 127
When the operator does not operate the keyboard for the period
specified in this parameter, the saver screen is displayed. When 0 is
specified, the screen save function is disabled.
Interface No. of input device for foreground
Setting input
Integer
0 - 21
This parameter specifies an interface number for a foreground input
device.
- 35 -
B-63330EN/03
The device numbers for each device are listed below:

Device
number
1
2
3
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
16
20
21
0021
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Device name
RS-232-C channel 1 (JD5A on the main CPU board)
RS-232-C channel 2 (JD5B on the main CPU board)
RS-232-C channel 3 (JD36A on the display unit)
Memory card
PMC C board
Remote buffer
Remote Diagnose
RS-422 channel 1 (JD6A on the display unit)
Data server
Open CNC DNC operation interface
Open CNC Upload/Download interface
RS-232-C channel 4 (JD5C on the additional-axis board)
RS-422 channel 2 (JD6B on the additional-axis board)
Interface No. of output device for foreground
Setting input
Integer
0 - 21
This parameter specifies an interface number for a foreground output
device.
See the descriptions about parameter No. 0020 for the device
numbers.
If the screen hard copy function is enabled (parameter HDC (bit 7 of
parameter No. 2240) = 1), set this parameter to 8 (memory card).
0022
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
0023
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Interface No. of input device for background
Setting input
Integer
0 - 21
This parameter specifies an interface number for a background input
device.
numbers.
Interface No. of output device for background
Setting input
Integer
0 - 21
This parameter specifies an interface number for a background output
device.
numbers.
- 36 -
B-63330EN/03
0024
Assignment of the communication with the PMC Ladder development tool

(FAPT LADDER-II, Ladder editing package)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Integer
0 - 255
Assigns the communication with the PMC Ladder development tool
(FAPT LADDER-II, Ladder editing package).
The value of this parameter determines the communication to be
started, as follows:
0: At power-on, communication conforms to the settings on the
PMC setting screen (displayed by selecting [PMC], [SETING],
and the [ONLINE] screen in this order).*1
Communication stops if this parameter is changed from another
value to 0.
1: RS-232-C serial port 1 (JD5A)
2: RS-232-C serial port 2 (JD5B)
3: RS-232-C serial port 3 (JD36A)
4: RS-422 serial port (JD6A)
255: Do not allow communication with the PMC Ladder development
tool.
*1 When using HSSB, set the parameter to 0.
After system startup, communication settings can be changed with
this parameter or on the PMC setting screen.
Refer to the PMC Ladder Language Programming Manual (B61863E).
To use the online monitor function of the PMC Ladder development
tool, set the desired communication port number in this parameter.
To transfer sequence programs in offline mode, set this parameter to
"0." In addition, on the PMC [ONLINE] screen, select "NOT USE" in
the "RS-232C" field.
To forcibly stop the communication with the PMC Ladder
development tool, set this parameter to "255."
0031
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
0032
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Initial value used for automatic setting of sequence Nos.
Setting input
Integer
0 - 99999999
Increment used for automatic setting of sequence No.
Setting input
Integer
0 - 99999999
If the increment is set to 0, no sequence Nos. are inserted.
- 37 -
0040
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
0042
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
0043
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
0044
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
0045
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
0046
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
0047
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Serial port channel for Remote Diagnostic Function
Setting input
Integer
1-3
Selection of serial port channel for Remote Diagnostic Function.
1: RS-232-C Serial port1 (JD5A)
2: RS-232-C Serial port2 (JD5B)
3: RS-232-C Serial port3 (JD36A)
4: Modem card (PCMCIA card slot on the LCD unit)
Password 1 for Remote Diagnostic Function
Locked parameter
Integer
0 - 99999999
Keyword 1 for Remote Diagnostic Function
Locked parameter
Integer
0 - 99999999
Locked parameter
Integer
0 - 99999999
Locked parameter
Integer
0 - 99999999
Locked parameter
Integer
0 - 99999999
Locked parameter
Integer
0 - 99999999
Parameters (No.0042, 0044, 0046) set passwords for using the remote
diagnosis function.
With the remote diagnostic function, three types of passwords are
available for protecting data. These passwords help to prevent
- 38 -
B-63330EN/03
unauthorized persons from accessing system parameters and

machining programs.
Password 1:
Sets a password for all services of the remote diagnosis function.
(No remote diagnosis function services are available until this
password is entered on the host computer (personal or other)).
Password 2:
Sets a password for part programs. (Program-related operations
such as program data input/output and check cannot be
performed until this password is entered on the host computer
(personal or other)).
Password 3:
Sets a password for parameters. (Parameter-related operations
such as parameter data input/output and cannot be performed
until this password is entered on the host computer (personal or
other)).
Parameters (No.0043, 0045, 0047) set the keywords for passwords
used with the remote diagnostic function.
Keyword 1:
Keyword for password 1(parameter No.0042)
Keyword 2:
Keyword 3:
When a value other than 0 is specified as a password (parameter
No.0042, 0044, 0046), the password cannot be modified until the
same value is set in the corresponding keyword parameter.
NOTE
Once a value other than 0 is set as a password, the
password cannot be modified until the same value is
set in the corresponding keyword parameter
(parameter No. 221 to 223). When a value other than
0 is set as a password, only blanks are displayed.
Care must be taken in setting a password.
Upon power-up, the keyword parameters are set to 0.
The parameter screen does not display any set
keyword value, only blanks are displayed.
- 39 -
4.5
B-63330EN/03
Timer Parameters (Data No. 0100 and later)

0100
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
0101
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
0102
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
0103
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Time accumulated since power-on
Parameter input
Integer
min
0 - 999999999
Stores the time accumulated since power-on.
Time 1 accumulated during automatic operation
Setting input
Integer
msec
0 - 59999
Stores the time accumulated during automatic operation that is less
than one minute. The actual time accumulated during automatic
operation is the sum of this parameter and parameter No. 102.
Time 2 accumulated during automatic operation
Setting input
Integer
min
0 - 999999999
Stores the time accumulated during automatic operation that is equal
to or greater than one minute. The actual time accumulated during
automatic operation is the sum of this parameter and parameter No.
101.
Time 1 accumulated during cutting
Setting input
Integer
msec
0 - 59999
Stores the time accumulated during cutting that is less than one
minute. The actual time accumulated during cutting is the sum of this
parameter and parameter No. 104.
- 40 -
B-63330EN/03
0104
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
0105
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
0106
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
0107
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Time 2 accumulated during cutting
Setting input
Integer
min
0 - 999999999
Stores the time accumulated during cutting that is equal to or greater
than one minute. The actual time accumulated during cutting is the
sum of this parameter and parameter No. 103.
Time 1 accumulated by the general-purpose timer
Setting input
Integer
msec
0 - 59999
Stores the time accumulated by the general-purpose timer that is less
than one minute. The actual time accumulated by the general-purpose
time is the sum of this parameter and parameter No. 106.
Time 2 accumulated by the general-purpose timer
Setting input
Integer
min
0 - 999999999
Stores the time accumulated by the general-purpose time that is equal
to or greater than one minute. The actual time accumulated by the
general-purpose time is the sum of this parameter and parameter No.
105.
Total number of parts machined
Setting input
Integer
0 - 999999999
Stores the total number of parts machined.
0108
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Total number of parts
Setting input
Integer
0 - 999999999
Stores the total number of parts.
- 41 -
B-63330EN/03
0109
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
0130
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Number of parts required
Setting input
Integer
0 - 999999999
Sets the number of parts required. When the total number of
machined parts exceeds the value of this parameter, a signal
indicating that the number of parts required is exceeded is output.
Time by which to go back to delete alarms from the history
Parameter input
Integer
sec
0 - 255
When the power to the NC is turned ON, the NC goes back from the
time the NC was turned OFF by the specified time and deletes from
the history any alarms that occurred during this period.
If this parameter is set to 0, one second is assumed.
- 42 -
B-63330EN/03
4.6
AXIS CONTROL PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1000 AND

LATER)
#7
1000
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
CIP
#1
CSZ
#2
XIK
#3
FPI
#5
EHM
#6
EMI
#6
#5
EMI
EHM
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
FPI
XIK
CSZ
CIP
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies what to confirm with an in-position check.
0: Merely confirm that the specified feedrate reaches zero during
deceleration (the acceleration/deceleration delay becomes zero).
1: Confirm that the specified feedrate reaches zero during
deceleration (the acceleration/deceleration delay becomes zero)
and that the machine reaches the specified position (the servo
position deviation falls within the valid area set for parameter No.
1827).
Specifies whether to enable the in-position check signal (*CSMZ).
0: Disable
1: Enable
When axis interlock is applied during non-linear interpolation
positioning (when LRP, a bit of parameter No. 1400 is set to 0),
specifies whether to stop only the axis to which interlock was applied
or all axes.
0: Stop axis to which interlock was applied. Other axes continue
operation.
1: Stop all axes.
Specifies whether to perform an in-position check at the temporary
stop-point in G60 mode.
0: Do not perform in-position check.
1: Perform in-position check.
Specifies conditions when handle interruption is valid.
0: When in G01, G02, or G03 mode, handle interruption is valid
during automatic operation startup, stopping, and resting.
1: Handle interruption is only valid for G01, G02, and G03 blocks
during automatic operation startup.
Specifies validity of manual interrupts and manual setup operations
during simultaneous manual-automatic operation.
0: Manual interrupts are invalid and manual setup operations are
valid.
1: Manual interrupts and manual setup operations are valid.
- 43 -
1001
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
RPC
#5
PDC
#6
PED
#7
CAF
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
#5
CAF
PED
PDC
#3
#2
#1
#0
RPC
Setting input
Bit
Specifies whether axes are switched when a reference position return
(G29) is performed.
0: Axes are not switched.
1: Axes are switched.
Specifies whether the G10.9 code (for selecting diameter or radius
programming) and PDA (bit 3 of parameter No. 1009) are valid.
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
This parameter is related to DIA (bit 3 of parameter No. 1006). Also
see the item on that parameter.
Specifies whether to enable the external deceleration function in PMC
axis control.
0: Disables the external deceleration function.
1: Enables the external deceleration function.
Specifies whether to enable chopping axis and rate data to be set on
the setting screen, as follows:
0: Enables.
1: Disables.
#7
#6
#5
1002
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#4
#3
DC4
#2
#1
#0
INM
Parameter input
Bit
NOTE
After this parameter has been set, the power must be
off turned off then back on for the setting to become
effective.
#1
INM
#3
DC4
Specifies whether the least command increment for the linear axis is
metric or in inches.
0: Metric. (The machine is a millimeter machine.)
1: Inches. (The machine is an inch machine.)
Specifies how to establish a reference position for a linear scale
having reference marks.
0: An absolute position is established by detecting three reference
marks.
1: An absolute position is established by detecting four reference
marks.
- 44 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
1004
[Input type]
[Data type]
#6
DSP
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
DSP
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies whether to display axis positions in the position screen and
the program check screen.
0: Display axis positions.
1: Do not display axis positions.
NOTE
When using the electronic gear box function (EGB),
specify 1 for the dummy axis of the EGB to disable
position display.
1005
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
ZRN
#2
ALZ
#3
PLZ
#4
EDP
#5
EDM
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
RMB
MLE
EDM
EDP
PLZ
ALZ
#1
#0
ZRN
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies whether to issue an alarm if reference position return has
not been performed since power-on and an attempt is made to execute
a command involving movement other than that with G28 during
automatic operation.
0: Issue an alarm ("PS181 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED").
1: Do not issue an alarm but execute operation.
Specifies the method to use for automatic reference position return
(G28).
0: Return to reference position using positioning (rapid traverse).
If reference position return has not been performed since power-on, it
is performed using the same operation sequence for manual
reference position return.
1: Use the same operation sequence as for manual reference
position return.
Usually, set this bit to 0.
Specifies the condition for presetting the work coordinate system
when manual reference position return is performed.
0: Preset only when in reset state (e.g. OP signal is off).
1: Always preset.
See ZNP, bit 2 of parameter No. 2402, which is common to all axes.
For each axis, specifies whether the external deceleration signal for
the positive direction is valid during cutting feed.
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
For each axis, specifies whether the external deceleration signal for
the negative direction is valid during cutting feed.
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
- 45 -
#6
MLE
#7
RMB
Specifies whether machine lock is valid for each axis.

0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
For each axis, specifies whether the control axis detach signal and
setting input RMV (bit 7 of parameter No. 0012) is valid.
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
#7
1006
[Input type]
[Data type]
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
NDC
ZMI
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
DIA
ROP
ROS
ROT
Parameter input
Bitaxis
NOTE
After this parameter has been set, the power must be off
turned off then back on for the setting to become effective.
#0
ROT
#1
ROS
#2
ROP
#3
DIA
Specifies whether the axis requires inch/metric conversion.

0: Axis requires inch/metric conversion (linear axis).
1: Axis does not require inch/metric conversion (rotation axis).
Specifies whether the machine coordinate system used for stroke
check and automatic reference position return is linear or rotational.
0: Linear (linear axis)
1: Rotation (rotation axis)
For a rotation axis, the machine coordinate system is normalized
within the angular displacement per rotation specified for parameter
No. 1260. In this case, automatic reference position return (G28, G30)
is performed in the same direction as manual reference position return
and the angular displacement does not exceed 360 degrees. Also see
the item on parameter No. 1260.
Specifies whether the machine coordinate system used to perform the
retained pitch error compensation is linear or rotational.
0: Linear (linear axis)
1: Rotation (rotation axis)
When the coordinate system used is rotational, up to the angle which
corresponds to one cycle of retained pitch error compensation data
can be specified. This allows pitch compensation to be performed for
pitch compensation cycles of other than 360 degrees. Also see the
item on parameter No. 5425.
Move commands for each axis are specified using:
0: Radius specification
1: Diameter specification
If bit 5 (PDC) of parameter No. 1001 is 1, DIA has the following
meaning:
The scale of the parameter, offset, and graphic screens is indicated
using:
0: Radius specification
1: Diameter specification
- 46 -
B-63330EN/03
#5
ZMI
#6
NDC
1007
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
FAX
#2
RSR
#3
G90
#4
REL
#5
INC
#6
GRD
#7
DOG
Specifies the direction of manual reference position return.

0: Positive direction
1: Negative direction
Specifies the normal direction control function.
0: Not normal direction control axis
1: Normal direction control axis
Only one axis can be specified as the normal direction control axis.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
DOG
GRD
INC
REL
G90
RSR
#1
#0
FAX
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies whether the fixture offset is valid for each axis.
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
When an absolute command is executed (when INC, bit 5 of
parameter No. 1007, is set to 0), specifies whether the direction of
rotation is determined by the sign of the value specified by the
command.
0: Not determined.
1: Determined by command value (counterclockwise when value is
positive and clockwise when value is negative)
Specifies the type of commands used for the rotary control axes.
0: Either absolute or incremental commands determined by G90 or
G91 mode
1: Absolute commands
Specifies whether the current position of rotary control axes in the
relative coordinate system is displayed with the value rounded off
within one rotation.
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
In rotary axis control, when the NC converts the command value to
the corresponding value within one rotation and the current position
being regarded as the angular displacement through which the axis is
to be rotated, this bit specifies whether to turn in whichever direction
minimizes the displacement in G90 mode.
0: Do not turn to closest direction.
1: Turn to closest direction.
Dog-less reference position setting is
0: Performed more than once.
1: Not performed more than once.
In the manual reference position return mode
0: Dog-less reference position setting is disabled.
1: Dog-less reference position setting is enabled.
- 47 -
#7
1008
[Input type]
[Data type]
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
DCL
#4
#3
#2
SFD
#1
#0
ROT
Parameter input
Bitaxis
NOTE
effective.
#1
ROT
#4
SFD
#7
DCL
0: Not multiple rotary control axes.

1: Multiple rotary control axes.
Specifies whether to enable the reference position shift function in
reference position return with the grid method.
0: Disable the function.
1: Enable the function.
Specifies whether to use a linear scale having reference marks as a
separate position detector.
0: Do not use a linear scale having reference marks.
1: Use a linear scale having reference marks.
#7
1009
[Input type]
[Data type]
#2
ROL
#6
#5
NFF
#4
#3
#2
ZND
PDA
ROL
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies whether the roll-over function for a rotation axis is
executed.
0: Not executed.
1: Executed.
NOTE
This bit is valid only for a rotation axis.
#3
PDA
#4
ZND
Specifies whether move commands are specified by means of

diameter or radius programming in the program for each axis.
0: Radius programming
1: Diameter programming
This bit is valid only when the PDC (bit 5 of parameter No. 1001) is
set to "1." It can be changed by specifying G10.9 (for selecting
diameter or radius programming). The DIA bit (bit 3 of parameter
1006) is automatically set to PDA at power-on and reset.
Specifies whether to display the value set on the workpiece reference
position offset setting menu.
0: Display the value.
1: Do not display the value.
- 48 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
NFF
Specifies whether data is input from the high-speed and highprecision machining setting screen.
0: Input
1: Not input
The data entered for the axis parameters on the high-speed and highprecision machining setting screen is effective to all axes. When this
bit is set to 1, no data is entered for the parameter for the
corresponding axis, including the settings with the automatic setting
function and the automatic tuning function. This bit can be set to 1 for
any axes used for purposes other than high-speed and high-precision
machining.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
1010
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
SYC
#1
RFD
SYC
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies whether to use the synchronization alignment function
based on machine coordinates in the synchronous control function.
0: Not used
1: Used
This parameter can be set for a slave axis.
When using synchronous error compensation, set this parameter to 0.
For rotation axis feedrate control:
0: The conventional method is used.
1: The method of feedrate specification on a virtual cicle for a
rotation axis is used.
#7
#6
#5
#4
1012
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
#3
#2
#1
#0
ISE
ISD
ISC
ISA
Parameter input
Bitaxis
NOTE
effective.
#0 ISA / #1ISC / #2 ISD / #3 ISE Increment system for each axis
Increment system
#3 ISE
#2 ISD
#1 ISC
#0 ISA
IS-A
IS-B
IS-C
IS-D
IS-E
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
- 49 -
1013
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
IM0
#3
NCG
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
WAM
MCS
#5
#4
#3
NCG
#2
#1
#0
IM0
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies whether to set the least input increment of each axis to ten
times the least command increment when a command is issued
without the decimal point.
0: Do not set to ten times the least command increment.
1: Set to ten times the least command increment.
When IS-A is used as the increment system, the least input increment
cannot be set to ten times the least command increment.
In Cs contour control mode, the position gain:
0: Coincides with the Cs contour control axis.
1: Does not coincide with the Cs contour control axis.
NOTE
Even if the position gain is set so that it coincides
with the Cs contour control axis, the following axes
do not coincide with the Cs contour control axis:
Spindle positioning axis; index table index axis; PMC
axis; and drilling axis in rigid tapping mode
#6
MCS
#7
WAM
If the machine zero point shift of external data input/ output is input
for the master axis under synchronization control:
0: The same machine zero point shift as that for the master axis is
not effective to the slave axis.
1: The same machine zero point shift as that for the master axis is
effective to the slave axis.
For those slave axes under synchronization control to which the same
machine zero point shift is to be effective, set this bit to 1. For other
axes, set the bit to 0.
In synchronous operation, the same machine zero point shift as that
for the master axis is always effective to those slaves for which this
bit is set to 1. In normal operation, however, this shift is not
effective to them.
WAM In the NC window function, the reading of the current
machine position (machine coordinates with the servo delay and the
acceleration/deceleration delay considered) is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
NOTE
Set the bit to "0" to keep the load on the CNC low
unless the reading is required.
- 50 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1014
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
RAM
#1
RAP
#1
#0
RAP
RAM
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies whether to use the axis as the rotation axis for tool axis
direction tool length compensation, three-dimensional handle feed,
and designation direction tool length compensation.
0: Not used as the rotation axis.
1: Used as the rotation axis.
Select two axes from among rotation axes and set them as the rotation
axes for these purposes.
Specifies whether the rotation axis used for tool axis direction tool
length compensation, three-dimensional handle feed, and designation
direction tool length compensation is an ordinary rotation axis.
0: Ordinary rotation axis.
1: Parameter axis. The rotation axis is not controlled in designation
direction tool length compensation.
If this bit is set to 0, absolute coordinates are used as the coordinates
of rotation axes in tool axis direction tool length compensation mode,
and machine coordinates are used in three-dimentional handle feed
mode. If this bit is set to 1, the value set in parameter No. 7516 is used
as the coordinates of the rotation axes.
When there is no rotation axis in the controlled axes, or when there is
only one rotation axis in the controlled axes, set 1 in bit 0 (RAM) and
bit 1 (RAP) of parameter No. 1014 for the linear axes to which nonexistent rotation axes belong, and set an angular displacement in
parameter No. 7516.
(Example 1)
There are linear axes X, Y, and Z, and rotation axes A, B, and C
which rotate about the X-, Y-, and Z-axes, respectively. The tool axis
direction is controlled with the rotation axes A and C.
RAM (No.1014#0)
X
Y
Z
A
B
C
0
0
0
1
0
1
(Example 2)
The controlled axes include only the linear axes X, Y, and Z. By
using the tool attachment, the tool axis is tilted in the same tool axis
direction as when the A- and C-axes are rotated.
RAM (No.1014#0)
RAP(No.1014#1)
Angle iNo.7516)
1
0
1
1
0
1
45.0
0.0
30.0
X
Y
Z
- 51 -
B-63330EN/03
1020
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Program axis name for each axis
Parameter input
Integeraxis
65 - 90
The programmed axis name of each controlled axis is set according to
the following table:
Axis name
Setting
X
88
Y
89
Z
90
A
65
B
66
C
67
U
85
V
86
W
87
NOTE
1 When the option for tool axis direction tool
length compensation is provided, always set the
A, B, or C value.
2 When the axis name extension function (option)
is used, the following addresses can be used as
axis names:
1021
Axis name
Setting
I
J
K
E
73
74
75
69
Subscripts of the axis names of parallel, synchronous control, and tandem

control axes
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
From 0 through 9 or 65 through 90
To distinguish the axes controlled in parallel operation mode,
synchronization control mode, and tandem control mode, specify a
suffix for each axis.
Setting
0
1 to 9
65 to 90
Meaning
Set 0 for those axes not controlled in parallel operation mode,
synchronization control, or tandem control.
A set number is used as a suffix.
A set alphabetic character (ASCII code) is used as a suffix.
Example: For an axis whose axis name is X, the following will be

indicated:
Setting
Axis name indicated on screens such as position display

screen
0
1
77
83
X
X1
XM
XS
- 52 -
B-63330EN/03
1022
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Designation of each axis in relation to the basic coordinate system
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0-7
To determine the planes selected for circular interpolation, cutter
compensation, and so forth
G17: Xp-Yp plane
G18: Zp-Xp plane
G19: Yp-Zp plane
or the three-dimensional tool compensation space XpYpZp, set each
controlled axis to one of the basic three axes X, Y, and Z of the basic
coordinate system or an axis parallel to one of the basic axes.
The basic three axes X, Y, and Z can each be set for just one
controlled axis.
Two or more controlled axes can be set as axes parallel to the same
basic axis.
Setting
Meaning
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
Rotation axis (neither the basic three axes nor their parallel axes)
X-axis of the basic three axes
Y-axis of the basic three axes
Z-axis of the basic three axes
Axis parallel to the X-axis
Axis parallel to the Y-axis
Axis parallel to the Z-axis
NOTE
For cylindrical intepolation, special setting is
needed. Refer to the operators manual.
- 53 -
1023
B-63330EN/03
Servo axis number of each axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - Max axes
Specify the number of the servo axis that corresponds to each control
axis. Normally, set each servo and control axis to the same numbers.
The control axis number and servo axis number of an axis with an
absolute position detector must be the same.
If FSSB setting mode is automatic setting mode (bit 0 of
parameter No. 1090 is set to 0), setting is made automatically by
inputting data to the FSSB setting screen. In manual setting
mode (bit 0 of parameter No. 1090 is set to 1), however, data
must be entered directly.
The servo axes are associated with servo amplifiers by setting
parameter Nos. 1080 to 1089.
For spindle motor axes such as the spindle positioning axis and
Cs contour control axis, 0 must be set.
For axes under tandem control and electronic gear box (EGB)
control, a pair of two axes must be set. Set these axes as follows:
Tandem axis: Set 1, 3, 5, or 7 for the master axis. For the slave
axis to be used with the master axis, set a value
greater than the value set for the master axis by
one.
EGB axis:
Set 1, 3, 5, or 7 for the slave axis. For the dummy
axis to be used with the slave axis, set a value
greater than the value set for the slave axis.
- 54 -
B-63330EN/03
1027
Spindle number of a spindle positioning axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0-4
Set the axis attribute for each control axis, in combination with
parameter No. 1023.
Specify the control axis on which to perform spindle positioning, by
setting the spindle number (not the motor number) for this parameter.
The following restrictions are imposed:
- Set 0 for those control axes on which spindle positioning is not to be
performed.
A single spindle cannot be allocated to multiple control axes.
As many spindle positioning axes as the number of spindles can
be set.
A spindle positioning axis must be placed from the end of a
control axis.
Example 1) Servo axis: X, Y, Z
Spindle positioning axis: C (S1)
Number of spindles: 1
Controlledaxis number
1
2
3
S
Parameter
No. 1020
88 (X)
89 (Y)
90 (Z)
67 (C)
Parameter
No. 1023
1
2
3
0
Parameter
No. 1027
0
0
0
1
Example 2) Servo axis: X, Z

Spindle positioning axis: C (S1) , B (S2)
Number of spindles: 2
Controlledaxis number
1
2
3
4
Parameter
No. 1020
88 (X)
90 (Z)
67 (C)
66 (B)
Parameter
No. 1023
1
2
0
0
Parameter
No. 1027
0
0
1
2
NOTE
Note that this parameter is changed when
automatic setting is performed on the FSSB
setting screen.
- 55 -
B-63330EN/03
1028
Spindle number of a Cs contour control axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
1029
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0-4
Axis number of the linear axis to which a rotation axis belongs
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - Max axes
This parameter is used for tool axis direction tool length
compensation, three-dimensional handle feed, or designation direction
tool length compensation.
When a rotation axis turns about a linear axis, the linear axis is
referred to as an axis to which the rotation axis belongs, and is set
using this parameter. For a rotation axis that belongs to no linear axis,
or for a linear axis, 0 is set.
Example:
Axis configuration: X, Y, Z, C, A
Linear axis: X, Y, Z
Rotation axis: A (turning about the X-axis) , C (turning about the
Z-axis)
In the above case, set the following:
Axis name
Setting
X
Z
Y
C
A
0
0
0
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
1030
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Command address of the second miscellaneous function
Parameter input
Integer
65 - 87
Specify the command address of the second miscellaneous function as
A, B, C, U, V, or W. However, any address already used as an axis
name cannot also be used as the command address of the second
miscellaneous function.
Name
Setting
A
65
- 56 -
B
66
C
67
U
85
V
86
W
87
B-63330EN/03
1031
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
1032
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
1033
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
1038
Reference axis
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
The units of parameters common to all axes, such as the dry run
feedrate and feedrate specified by code F with one digit, vary
according to the increment system. In the Series 15, the effective
increment system for each axis is selected using a parameter. The
units of these parameters must match the increment system of the
reference axis. Select the axis to use as the reference axis.
Designation of axis (linear axis) used for polar coordinate interpolation
Parameter input
Integer
1 - Max axes
Set the number of the linear control axis used for polar coordinate
interpolation.
Destination of axis (rotation axis) used for polar coordinate interpolation
Parameter input
Integer
1 - Max axes
Set the number of the rotation control axis used for polar coordinate
interpolation.
Reserved parameter for customers board
NOTE
After specifying this parameter, turn the power off, and
then on again, for the new setting to take effect.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
1039
Parameter input
Integer axis
0 - Max axes
Reserved parameter for customers board
NOTE
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer axis
0 - Max axes
- 57 -
1043
B-63330EN/03
Series name of the servo program used
NOTE
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Invalid data range]
Parameter input
Integer axis
0 to 8
If using two or more different servo programs, set the last digit of the
series name of the servo program to be used for each axis (n in 90Bn).
For a set of axes whose servo axis numbers (settings of parameter No.
1023) are consecutive such as (1, 2) or (3, 4), set the same value for
this parameter.
Example:
If using servo program 90B0 for controlled axes 1 and 3 (servo axes
1 and 2) and
servo program 90B3 for controlled axes 2 and 4 (servo axes 3 and 4)
Controlled axis
number
P
Q
R
S
Parameter 1023

3
2
4
Servo program
used
90B0
90B3
90B0
90B3
Parameter 1043
0
3
0
3
NOTE
This parameter is required if two or more servo
programs 90B0 or later are to be used. If using only
one servo program, set 0 for this parameter for all
axes.
If the setting for an odd-numbered servo axis differs
from that for the succeeding axis, alarm SV0455 is
issued.
If the servo program specified for this parameter does
not exist in FROM, alarm SV0455 is issued.
- 58 -
B-63330EN/03
1049
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Axis switching number
Setting input
Integer
0-5
Six axis switching combinations are available. To choose from the six,
set a desired axis switching number. The machine axes x, y, and z
correspond to program addresses X, Y, and Z as follows:
Axis switching number
0
1
2
3
4
5
X
x
x
y
y
z
z
Program address
Y
y
z
x
z
x
y
Z
z
y
z
x
y
x
Axis switching number 0 means that axis switching is not performed.

1056
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1070
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Automatic override tolerance ratio for polar coordinate interpolation
Parameter input
Integer
%
0 - 100
Typical setting: 90% (treated as 90% when set to 0)
Set the tolerance ratio of the fastest cutting feedrate to the speed of
the rotation axis during automatic override of polar coordinate
interpolation.
Synchronous control axis of each axis in PMC axis control
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - Max axes
Set the axis number of the axis to which each axis is to be
synchronized.
(Example)
If the first to fifth axes are PMC axes, and the third and fourth axes
are to be synchronized with the first (the second and fifth axes are not
synchronized)
Set the following values for the respective axes:
1st. Axis: 0/ 2nd. Axis: 0 / 3rd. Axis: 1 / 4th. Axis: 1 / 5th. Axis: 0
- 59 -
B-63330EN/03
1080
Address conversion table value (ATR) for slave 1
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
From 0 through 7 or 16 or 40 or 48
This parameter is automatically specified when the FSSB setting
mode is the automatic setting mode (bit 0 of parameter No. 1090 is set
to 0) . When the mode is the manual setting mode (bit 0 of parameter
No. 1090 is set to 1) , be sure to directly enter the desired value.
Set the address conversion table values for slaves 1 to 10.
The term slave is a generic name for a servo amplifier or pulse
module connected to the CNC via an FSSB optical cable. Slaves are
assigned numbers 1 to 10, the slave nearest the CNC being assigned 1.
A 2-axis amplifier consists of two slaves, and a 3-axis amplifier
consists of three slaves. Set the appropriate value for this parameter
depending on whether a slave exists and, if it exists, whether the slave
is an amplifier or pulse module, as follows:
If the slave is an amplifier:
Set the value equal to the setting of parameter No. 1023 for the
axis to which the amplifier is to be assigned, minus 1.
If the slave is a pulse module:
Set 16 for the first pulse module (connected nearer the CNC) and
48 for the second (connected farther from the CNC) .
If a slave does not exist:
Set 40.
- 60 -
B-63330EN/03
NOTE
1 When using the electronic gear box (EGB) function
Although EGB and dummy axes do not require
amplifiers, assume that they are connected to dummy
amplifiers. Thus, as the address conversion table
value for an non-existing slave, set the value equal to
the setting of parameter No. 1023 for the EGB axis
minus 1, instead of "40."
2 For a system with 11 or more controlled axes
Parameters Nos.1100 to 1109 and 1110 to 1119 are
also available in addition to these parameters.
Nos.1080 to 1089 : The parameters of the slaves
linked to the first axis card on main board.
Nos.1100 to 1109 : The parameters of the slaves
linked to the second axis card on additional axis
board.
linked to the third axis card on additional axis board.
#7
#6
#5
1090
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
ASE
FMD
Parameter input
Bit
NOTE
effective.
#0
FMD
#1
ASE
Specify the FSSB setting mode:

0: Automatic setting mode.
When the relationships between axes and amplifiers and other
information are entered from the FSSB setting screen and
automatic setting is performed, parameters Nos. 1023, 1027,
1028, 1080 to 1089, and 1092 to 1097 are automatically
specified.
1: Manual setting mode.
Parameters Nos. 1023,1027,1028, 1080 to 1089, and 1092 to
1097 must be specified manually.
When the FSSB setting mode is the automatic setting mode (bit 0 of
parameter No. 1090 is set to 0) , automatic setting is:
0: Not completed.
1: Completed.
This bit is automatically set to 1 when automatic setting is completed.
- 61 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
1092
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
DSP
Parameter input
Bitaxis
NOTE
effective.
#0
DSP
1093
[Input type]
[Data type]
Usually, do not directly enter any value, because this parameter is

specified on the FSSB setting screen. This parameter need not be
specified in the manual setting mode.
0: Two axes use a single DSP. (Ordinary axes)
1: A single axis uses a single DSP exclusively.
#7
#6
PM2
PM1
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
FSL
Parameter input
Bitaxis
NOTE
effective.
#0
FSL
The interface between the servo amplifier and the servo software is:
0: Fast type.
1: Slow type.
The servo data transfer interface is divided into two types, Fast and
Slow. The following conditions must be satisfied:
When a 1-axis amplifier is used, either Fast or Slow type can be
used.
When a 2-axis amplifier is used, the Fast type cannot be used for
both types.
The Slow type can be used for both axes.
For a 3-axis amplifier, the condition for a 2-axis amplifier
applies to its first and second axes, while the condition for a 1axis amplifier applies to its third axis.
The Fast type must be used for an axis for which an odd number
is set for parameter No. 1023.
The Slow type can, however, be used for EGB workpiece axes,
learning control axes, high-speed current loop axes, and highspeed interface axes.
Only the Slow type can be used for an axis for which an even
number is set for parameter No. 1023.
(Be sure to set this bit to 1.)
- 62 -
B-63330EN/03
#6
PM1
#7
PM2
Specifies whether to use the first pulse module.

0: Do not use.
1: Use.
Specifies whether to use the second pulse module.
0: Do not use.
1: Use.
1094
Connector number of the 1-st pulse module
1095
Connector number of the 2-nd pulse module
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
1096
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0-7
This parameter is automatically specified when the FSSB setting
mode is the automatic setting mode (bit 0 of parameter No. 1090 is set
to 0) .
When the mode is the manual setting mode (bit 0 of parameter No.
1090 is set to 1) , be sure to directly enter the desired value.
When using a pulse module, set the value equal to the connector
number of the pulse module used on the axis, minus 1. Thus, set 0 to
7 for connector numbers 1 to 8. In addition, bits 6 and 7 of parameter
No. 1093 must be set separately. For an axis on which a pulse module
is not used, set 0.
Any connector can be used on an axis. Connector numbers must,
however, be used starting with the smallest one. For example,
connector number 4 cannot be used without using connector number
3.
Slave and dummy axis numbers for the EGB function (on the FSSB setting
screen only)
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0-8
When using the EGB function, set consecutive odd and even numbers
for the slave and dummy axes.
- 63 -
1097
B-63330EN/03
Master and slave numbers for tandem control (on the FSSB setting screen
only)
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0-8
When performing tandem control, set consecutive odd and even
numbers for the master and slave axes.
1120
Address translation table value (ATR) for slave 1 (second FSSB)
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
NOTE
After specifying these parameters, turn the power off and
then on again for the new settings to take effect.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 to 7, 16, 40, 48
If the servo control card supporting HIGH SPEED HRV control is to
be used, these parameters must be specified in addition to
conventional FSSB setup parameters.
- 64 -
B-63330EN/03
If the FSSB setup mode is automatic setting (bit 0 of parameter No.

1090 is 0), these parameters are automatically specified. Be sure to
specify the parameters if the mode is manual setting (bit 0 of
parameter no. 1090 is 1).
Set the address translation table values for slaves 1 to 10 of the
second FSSB.
For details of the settings and restrictions, see the description of
parameters Nos. 1080 to 1089.
NOTE
1 A total of up to ten slave units (eight amplifiers and
two Separate Detector I/F Units) can be connected
to the first and second FSSBs. (For systems having
11 or more controlled axes, a total of up to 30 slave
units, 24 amplifiers and six Separate Detector I/F
Units, can be connected,.)
2 For systems having 11 or more controlled axes, the
parameters for the address translation table values
for the second FSSB, Nos. 1130 to 1139 and 1140 to
1149, are provided, in addition to parameters Nos.
1120 to 1129.
The usage of the parameters is summarized below:
Nos. 1120 to 1129: Slaves connected to the
second FSSB of the first servo control card (on the
main board)
Nos. 1130 to 1139: Slaves connected to the
second FSSB of the second servo control card (first
servo control card on the additional axis board)
Nos.1140 to 1149: Slaves connected to the second
FSSB of the third servo control card (second servo
control card on the additional axis board)
- 65 -
4.7
B-63330EN/03
CHOPPING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1181 AND LATER)

#7
#6
#5
1181
[Input type]
[Data type]
#5
CRO
1192
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Minimum unit of data]
[Valid data range]
#2
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies the type of override used within the range from the
chopping start position to point R, as follows:
0: Chopping override
1: Rapid traverse override
Chopping axis
Parameter input
Integer
1 - Max axes
Set the number of the servo axis that corresponds to the chopping
axis.
Chopping reference position (R position)
Parameter input
Real
mm, inch, degree (input unit)
Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting
table (A) )
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 - +999999.999)
Set data in absolute coordinates.
1193
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
#3
CRO
1191
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
#4
Upper limit for chopping
Parameter input
Real
table (A) )
- 66 -
B-63330EN/03
1194
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Lower limit for chopping
Parameter input
Real
table (A) )
1195
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1196
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1197
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Chopping rate
Parameter input
Real
mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (input unit)
Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 - +240000.0)
Chopping compensation coefficient
Parameter input
Integer
%
0 - 100
The chopping delay compensation amount is equal to the sum of the
servo delay during chopping and the delay during
acceleration/deceleration, times the coefficient set for this parameter.
If this parameter is set to 0, chopping delay compensation is not
performed.
Maximum feedrate during chopping
Parameter input
Realaxis
mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
Set the value that will be used to limit the chopping rate. When this
parameter is set to "0" for the chopping axis, the rapid traverse rate
(parameter No. 1420) will be used to limit the chopping rate.
- 67 -
1198
B-63330EN/03
Chopping rate for enabling bottom dead point overshoot damp control when
the chopping rate is changed
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
Bottom dead point overshoot damp control is enabled when the
chopping rate (command-specified rate overridden with a certain
value, not including a portion increased due to chopping
compensation) exceeds a value specified in this parameter. Bottom
dead point overshoot damp control is disabled if the chopping rate is
lower than the value specified in this parameter.
If bottom dead point overshoot damp control is enabled, changing the
override value, changing the command-specified rate, and
interlocking are enabled only within the range between the top dead
point and the bottom dead point. Any attempt to change them within
the range between the bottom dead point and the top dead point is
ignored.
This parameter can be specified only when chopping is canceled (has
not been started) . Any attempt to change the parameter is ignored
during chopping.
If this parameter is 0, overshoot damp control is disabled for all rates.
- 68 -
B-63330EN/03
4.8
COORDINATE SYSTEM PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1200

AND LATER)
1200
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
FPC
#2
MNS
#5
DSC
#7
#6
#5
ACP
NZA
DSC
#4
#3
#2
#1
MNS
FPC
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to preset the relative position display to zero when
the floating reference position is set using the appropriate soft key.
0: Do not set to 0 (relative position display remains unchanged) .
1: Set to 0.
Specifies whether to shift coordinate systems when data is written
into the system variables which specifies the distance to be caused by
a manual interrupt.
0: Shift all workpiece coordinate systems and local coordinate
systems.
1: Do not shift any workpiece coordinate system or local coordinate
system. (This is the same operation as that specified by the
"cancel" soft key on the manual-interrupt-distance screen.)
Specifies the type of coordinates to be read when the skip signal
position is read using custom macro system variables #5061 to #5080
(ABSKP) in three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode.
0: Coordinates in the coordinate system for which coordinate
conversion is not performed (workpiece coordinate system)
1: Coordinates in the coordinate system for which coordinate
conversion has been performed (program coordinate system)
NOTE
When the skip signal position is read in a mode other
than three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode
(G69 mode), coordinates in the coordinate system for
which coordinate conversion is not performed
(workpiece coordinate system) are read.
For an explanation of system variables #5041 to
#5060 (ABSOT), see the explanation of D3M (bit 5 of
parameter No. 6400).
#6
NZA
#7
ACP
Specifies whether to issue the PS181 alarm if the machine is in the

lock state when the reference position return function is enabled, and
a move command is specified for an axis along which the reference
position return is not completed.
0: Issue the alarm.
1: Do not issue the alarm.
Specifies whether to perform the automatic workpiece coordinate
system preset when the machine lock signal switches from on to off in
the preset state.
0: Do not perform the preset.
1: Perform the preset.
- 69 -
1220
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Common offset from the workpiece reference point for all axes
Setting input
Realaxis
table (A) )
This is one of the parameters that set the position of the origin in a
work coordinate system (G54 to G59) . While the offset of the origin
of a workpiece coordinate system differ for each work coordinate
system, this parameter provides an offset common to all workpiece
coordinate systems. Normally, this parameter is set automatically by
signal input (external data input) from the machine.
1221
Offset of the origin of workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54)
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set the offset of the origin of each of the workpiece coordinate
systems 1 to 6 (G54 to G59) .
- 70 -
B-63330EN/03
1240
Coordinates of the first reference position in the machine coordinate system
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1241
Parameter input
Realaxis
mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
table (A) )
Set the coordinates of the reference position in the machine
coordinate system.
Coordinates of the second reference position in the machine coordinate
system
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1242
Parameter input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set the coordinates of the second reference position in the machine
coordinate system.
Coordinates of the third reference position in the machine coordinate
system
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set the coordinates of the third reference position in the machine
coordinate system.
- 71 -
1243
B-63330EN/03
Coordinates of the fourth reference position in the machine coordinate

system
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1244
Parameter input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set the coordinates of the fourth reference position in the machine
coordinate system.
Floating reference position in G30.1
[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Realaxis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting
table (A) )
Set the coordinates of the floating reference position in the machine
coordinate system.
1260
Movement of one rotation of a rotary axis
NOTE
effective.
[Data type] Realaxis
[Unit of data] degree
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard
parameter setting table (B) )
Set the value of movement of one rotation of a rotary axis.
- 72 -
B-63330EN/03
1280
Coordinates of diagonal vertex 1 of area 1 in automatic feedrate control by area
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real number axis
Machine unit
The increment system of the axis in question is followed.
Nine digits in least input increment (See standard parameter setting
table (A).)
(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
The positions, in the machine coordinate system, of two diagonal
vertexes of each of areas 1 to 4 in automatic feedrate control by area
are set.
- 73 -
4.9
B-63330EN/03
FEEDRATE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1400 AND LATER)

#7
#6
1400
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
RDR
#1
TDR
#2
RPD
#3
SFP
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
AOV
LRP
SFP
RPD
TDR
RDR
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether dry runs can be performed for the rapid traverse
command.
0: Cannot be performed.
1: Can be performed.
Specifies whether dry runs can be performed for the threading and
tapping commands.
Specifies whether manual rapid traverse can be performed during the
period from the power on to reference position return.
Specifies the feedrate of the skip function (G31) .
0: Feedrate specified by the F code in the program
1: Feedrate specified by parameter No. 1428
NOTE
See the item on bit 5 of parameter No. 7200 for
multi-step skip and high-speed skip.
#4
LRP
#5
AOV
Selects the method used for positioning (G00) .

0: Non-linear interpolation (each axis moves independently at the
rapid traverse feedrate)
1: Linear interpolation (tool path is linear)
When using three-dimensional coordinate conversion, set 1.
Specifies whether to enable the secondary feedrate override.
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
- 74 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
#5
#4
1401
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
NED
#2
HTG
#3
RFO
ROV
#2
POD
#5
CAFC
#1
RFO
HTG
NED
#0
Specifies effective range of external deceleration.

0: Affects all feed movement.
1: Affects only rapid traverse.
Specifies the type of feedrate that is used for velocity commands for
helical interpolation, helical involute interpolation, and threedimensional circular interpolation, as follows:
0: The velocity commands are specified using a tangential feedrate
for circular interpolation, involute interpolation, and threedimensional circular interpolation.
1: The velocity commands are specified using a tangential feedrate
also for a linear axis (or, for three-dimensional circular
interpolation, a specified axis other than the circular
interpolation axis) .
Specifies whether to stop during rapid traverse when the cutting
feedrate override is set to 0%.
0: Stop.
1: Do not stop.
#6
#5
1402
#0
#2
Parameter input
Bit
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
CAFC
#4
#3
#2
POD
#1
#0
ROV
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies override of the rapid traverse feedrate.
0: The override is F0, F1, 50%, or 100%, as specified by input
signals ROV1 and ROV2.
1: The override is determined by seven input signals *RV0B to
*RV6B (in 1% units) within a range from 0% to 100%.
Selects how to specify the PMC axis control override.
0: Specify in PMC axis control command block.
1: Specify directly by input signal from PMC.
Specifies whether to perform circular cutting point feedrate change in
cutter compensation mode and tool nose radius compensation mode
for the inner arc only.
0: Performed on the inner arc only.
1: Performed on the inner and outer arcs.
- 75 -
#7
1403
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
APO
#6
OVR
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
D3E
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
OVR
#0
APO
Parameter input
Bit
The least increment for the second feedrate override is
0: 1%
1: 0.01%
This parameter is effective only when AOV (bit 5 of parameter No.
1400) is 1.
In look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation and fine
HPCC:
0:
Override is disabled for deceleration functions such as
deceleration based on feedrate difference and deceleration based
on acceleration rate.
1:
Override is enabled for deceleration functions such as
deceleration based on feedrate difference and deceleration based
on acceleration rate.
This function allows the following feedrates to be overridden:
Feedrate decelerated by deceleration based on feedrate
difference in look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation
Feedrate decelerated by deceleration based on acceleration rate
in fine HPCC.
Feedrate decelerated by deceleration based on acceleration rate
in circular interpolation
Feedrate decelerated by acceleration clamp in involute
interpolation
Minimum feedrate for deceleration based on acceleration rate in
fine HPCC and circular interpolation
Maximum feedrate of fine HPCC
Even when the feedrate is overridden by this function, the resulting
feedrate does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No.
1422).
#7
1404
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
NDI
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
POV
PRO
D3E
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies which external deceleration signal is effective during
cutting feed or linear interpolation positioning in three-dimensional
coordinate conversion mode.
0: The external deceleration signal of the program command axis is
effective.
1: The external deceleration signal of the travel axis is effective.
- 76 -
B-63330EN/03
#1
PRO
#2
POV
#7
NDI
Specifies whether to enable override for rapid traverse, reference

position return, and positioning in the machine coordinate system in
axis control by PMC.
0: Disables override.
1: Enables override.
Specifies the override signals that can be used for rapid traverse,
reference position return, and positioning in the machine coordinate
system in axis control by PMC.
0: ROV1 and ROV2, or RV0B to RV6B (signals for CNC axes)
1: ROV1E and ROV2E (signals for PMC axes only)
Specifies the behavior of PMC-based axis control when diameter
programming is used for the PMC controlled axis, as follows:
0: The actual amount of travel becomes twice the specified value,
but the feedrate remains as specified.
1: The actual amount of travel remains as is, but the feedrate
becomes half the specified value.
The parameter affects the amount of travel specified in the Rapid
traverse (00h) , Cutting feed (feed per minute) (01h) , Cutting feed
(sec/block specification) (02h) , Feed per revolution (12h) , Skip
(13h) , and External pulse synchronization (1Bh) commands.
It also affects the feedrate specified in the Cutting feed (feed per
minute ) (01h) , Feed per revolution (12h) , and Skip (13h)
commands. If parameter RPD (bit 2 of parameter No. 1409) = 1, the
feedrate specified in the Rapid traverse (00h) , Machine coordinate
system selection (06h) , and 1st. to 4th. reference position return (17h
to 1Ah) commands are also affected by this parameter, because the
rapid traverse rate is specified using the PMC signal. If parameter
RPD (bit 2 of parameter No. 1409) = 0, the actual feedrate is not
affected by this parameter, because it is set to the rapid traverse rate
specified in the corresponding parameter.
For the Cutting feed (sec/block specification) (02h) command, the
travel time remains unchanged from the value specified in command;
it is not affected by this parameter.
For the Machine coordinate system selection (06h) command, the
target position is not affected by this parameter. Instead, it is specified
in diameter, if bit 3 of parameter No. 1006 (specification by diameter)
= 1.
(Example) If the specified amount of travel is 100.000 mm and the
specified feedrate is 100 mm/min
Feedrate
Position display
Actual machine
travel
Travel time
- 77 -
PMC signal-based command

NDI = 0
NDI = 1
100mm/min
50mm/min
200.000mm
100.000mm
100.000mm
50.000mm
60 sec
60 sec
Memory operationbased command

100mm/min
100.000mm
50.000mm
30 sec
B-63330EN/03
CAUTION
1 This parameter is valid only when parameter DIA
(bit 3 of parameter No. 1006) = 1.
2 If a programmable diameter/radius switching is
used, that is, parameter PDC (bit 5 of parameter
No. 1001) = 1, parameter PDA (bit 3 of parameter
No. 1009) usually specifies whether diameter or
radius is to be used. For the PMC axis, however,
parameter NDI and parameter DIA (bit 3 of
parameter No. 1006) are used to determine the
amount of travel and the feedrate. On the other
hand, whether the position display is displayed as
a diameter or radius is determined by parameter
PDA (bit 3 of parameter No. 1009) .
NOTE
This bit is effective only when DIA (bit 3 of
parameter No. 1006) is set to 1.
#7
#6
#5
1406
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
F1O
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
F1O
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to enable feedrate override, second feedrate
override, and override cancellation for the feedrates of F codes with a
one-digit number (F1 to F9) .
0: Disable them.
1: Enable them.
NOTE
Rapid traverse override is enabled for the feedrate of
F0, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
- 78 -
B-63330EN/03
1409
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
F10
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
JFM
FR2
FR1
POS
TQF
RPD
F10
#0
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies the unit of feedrate data specified in the Cutting feed (feed
per minute) , Skip--feed per minute, and Continuous feed commands
under PMC-based axis control, as follows:
0:
Linear Metric input

axis
Inch input
Rotary axis
IS-A
10.0
1.0
10.0
IS-B
1.0
0.1
1.0
Unit of data
IS-C
0.1
0.01
0.1
IS-D
0.01
0.001
0.01
IS-E
0.001
0.0001
0.001
IS-B
10.0
1.0
10.0
Unit of data
IS-C
IS-D
1.0
0.1
0.1
0.01
1.0
0.1
IS-E
0.01
0.001
0.01
unit
mm/min
inch/min
deg/min
1:
Linear Metric input

axis
Inch input
Rotary axis
#2
RPD
#3
TQF
#4
POS
#5
#6
FR1
FR2
IS-A
100.0
10.0
100.0
unit
mm/min
inch/min
deg/min
Sets the feedrate of PMC-controlled axis in rapid traverse, machine

coordinate system selection, and 1st to 4th reference position return in
axis control by PMC.
0: Feedrate set in parameter No. 1420
1: Feedrate specified as the feedrate data in the axis control
command
Specifies whether to perform follow-up for torque control.
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
The constant velocity command for PMC axis control is:
0: A velocity command.
1: A position command.
FR1 and FR2 specify the unit of the feedrate data specified in the
cutting feed (feed per revolution) command under PMC axis control.
FR2
FR1
Metric input
Inch input
0
0
1
0
1
0
0.01 mm/rev
0.1 mm/rev
1 mm/rev
0.0001 inch/rev
0.001 inch/rev
0.01 inch/rev
- 79 -
#7
JFM
B-63330EN/03
This sets the command increment of feedrate data in the continuous

feed command (16H) during PMC axis control.
0: The unit of feedrate data depends on the setting of parameter
F10 (bit 1 of parameter No. 1409) .
1:
Linear Metric input

axis
Inch input
Rotary axis
IS-A
2000.0
200.0
2000.0
IS-B
200.0
20.0
200.0
Unit of data
IS-C
IS-D
20.0
2.0
2.0
0.2
20.0
2.0
IS-E
0.2
0.02
0.2
unit
mm/min
inch/min
deg/min
NOTE
If this parameter is set to 1, parameter F10 (bit 1 of
parameter No. 1409) must also be set to 1.
1410
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1411
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1412
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Dry run feedrate
Parameter input
Real
Set the dry run feedrate for when the jog feedrate dial is turned to
100%. The unit of data depends on the increment system of the basic
axes.
Arbitrary manual angle feedrate
Parameter input
Real
mm/min, inch/min (machine unit)
Set the arbitrary manual angle feedrate for when the jogging feedrate
dial is turned to 100%. The unit of data depends on the increment
system of the basic axes.
Percentage value for rapid traverse override F1
Parameter input
Integer
%
0 - 100
Set the percentage value to use for rapid traverse override F1.
- 80 -
B-63330EN/03
1413
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Maximum number of buffered manual handle feed pulses
Parameter input
Integer
0-4
The permissible flow amount is set. If such a handle feed that
momentarily exceeds the rapid traverse rate is specified, the handle
pulses for the excess of the rapid traverse rate are not discarded, but
are accumulated according to the setting.
Permissible flow amount
( rapid traverse rate )
( setting )
Normally, 0 may be set.

1414
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Magnification m of manual handle feed
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 2000
Set the magnification m for when movement selection signals MP1
and MP2 for manual handle feed are 0 and 1, respectively.
Travel amount select signal
MP4
MP2
MP1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Amount of travel
(manual handle feed)
Least input increment 1
1
Least input increment m
2
Least input increment n
*1 To be set in parameter No.1414.

1417
Rapid traverse ratio during the period from the power on to manual
reference position return
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
%
0 - 100
Set the rapid traverse ratio to use in the below expression. This
expression is used to calculate the effective rapid traverse feedrate
during the power on to manual reference position return.
(rapid traverse feedrate) = (feedrate set in parameter No. 1420) x
(value set in this parameter) /100
When 0 is set, the feedrate is assumed to be 100%.
- 81 -
1418
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Magnification n of manual handle feed
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 2000
Set the magnification rate for when movement selection signals MP1
and MP2 for manual handle feed are 1.
Amount of travel
(manual handle feed)
Travel amount select signal

MP4
MP2
MP1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1

1
Least input increment m
2
Least input increment n

1420
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1421
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1422
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Rapid traverse feedrate along each axis
Parameter input
Realaxis
Set the rapid traverse feedrate for each axis for when rapid traverse
override is 100%.
F0 feedrate for each axis for rapid traverse override
Parameter input
Realaxis
Set the F0 feedrate for each axis for rapid traverse override.
Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis
Parameter input
Realaxis
Set the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.
- 82 -
B-63330EN/03
1423
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1425
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1426
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1427
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Jogging feedrate for each axis
Parameter input
Realaxis
Set the jogging feedrate for each axis for when the jog feedrate dial is
turned to 100%.
FL feedrate for each axis for manual reference position return
Parameter input
Realaxis
External deceleration rate during cutting feed
Parameter input
Real
Set the external deceleration rate used during cutting feed and
positioning using linear interpolation (G00) .
External deceleration rate for each axis during rapid traverse
Parameter input
Realaxis
This parameter sets the external deceleration feedrate used in rapid
traverse.
- 83 -
B-63330EN/03
1428
Skip function (G31) feedrate

[Data type] Real
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
Set the feedrate for the skip function (G31) . This parameter is valid
when SKF, a bit of parameter No. 1400, is set to 1, namely the skip
function feedrate is the value set in this parameter.
NOTE
See parameter Nos. 7211 to 7214 for multi-step and
high-speed skip.
1430
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1450
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Upper limit on the feedrate for feed per minute under PMC axis control
Parameter input
Realaxis
This parameter specifies the upper limit on the feedrate for feed per
minute under PMC axis control.
Resolution of the feedrate specified by the F code with a one-digit number
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 127
Set the constant used to determine the change in the feedrate when the
manual pulse generator is rotated one graduation while that F code
with a one-digit number is specified.
Fmaxi
F =
(i = 1, 2)
100X
This parameter is represented in the above expression as the letter X.
Set X to determine how many times the manual pulse generator needs
to be rotated for the feedrate to become Fmax. Fmax in the above
expression represents the upper limit for the feedrate specified by the
F code with a one-digit number. The limit is set in parameter Nos.
1460 and 1461.
Fmax1: Upper feedrate limit for F1 to F4 (1460)
Fmax2: Upper feedrate limit for F5 to F9 (1461)
- 84 -
B-63330EN/03
1451
F1 feedrate
1452
F2 feedrate
1453
F3 feedrate
1454
F4 feedrate
1455
F5 feedrate
1456
F6 feedrate
1457
F7 feedrate
1458
F8 feedrate
1459
F9 feedrate
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1460
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Real
Specify the feedrate assigned to the F code with a one-digit number
Fn (n=1 to 9) . When the feedrate is changed by the manual pulse
generator, this parameter changes along with the change in the
feedrate.
Upper feedrate limit for F1 to F4
Parameter input
Real
Set the upper limits for the feedrates specified by the F codes with a
one-digit number. When the feedrate is increased by turning the
manual pulse generator, these upper limits are used to clamp the
feedrate. The upper limit of feedrates for F1 to F4 is specified in this
parameter.
- 85 -
1461
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1472
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1478
B-63330EN/03
Upper feedrate limit for F5 to F9
Parameter input
Real
Set the upper limits for the feedrates specified by the F codes with a
one-digit number. When the feedrate is increased by turning the
manual pulse generator, these upper limits are used to clamp the
feedrate. The upper limit of feedrates for F5 to F9 is specified in this
parameter.
Feedrate when the normal-direction control axis swivels
Parameter input
Realaxis
degree/min
Set the feedrate used when the normal-direction control axis swivels.
Allowable feedrate difference for corner deceleration based on the feedrate
difference
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Realaxis
When the deceleration based on the corner feedrate difference is used,
if a change in a feedrate component on each axis at a boundary
between blocks is about to exceed the value set in this parameter,
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is applied to reduce the
feedrate to the value obtained for that purpose. This reduces the
impact on the machine around corners and the machining error.
- 86 -
B-63330EN/03
1483
Lower feedrate limit for the deceleration function based on the acceleration
of fine HPCC
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
The deceleration function based on the acceleration of fine HPCC
automatically calculates the optimum feedrate according to the
geometry.
Depending on the geometry, the calculated feedrate may become very
low.
If this occurs, to prevent the feedrate from becoming too low,
deceleration to a feedrate below that specified for this parameter can
be suppressed.
If, however, the override by the deceleration function based on the
cutting load is enabled, the feedrate may become lower than the lower
feedrate limit.
The lower feedrate limit in deceleration based on the acceleration
during circular interpolation in a mode other than fine HPCC mode
can be specified for parameter No. 1491.
NOTE
During involute interpolation, the lower feedrate limit
for the "acceleration clamp in the vicinity of the basic
circle" of involute interpolation automatic feedrate
control is applied.
1491
Lower feedrate limit for the deceleration function based on the acceleration
during circular interpolation (for normal mode)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
The deceleration function based on the acceleration during circular
interpolation automatically calculates the optimum feedrate so that the
acceleration resulting from changes in the travel direction during
circular interpolation does not exceed the allowable acceleration
specified for parameter No. 1665.
If the arc radius is very small, the calculated feedrate may become
very low.
If this occurs, to prevent the feedrate from becoming too low,
deceleration to a feedrate lower than that specified for this parameter
can be suppressed.
- 87 -
B-63330EN/03
The lower feedrate limit for the deceleration function based on the
acceleration in fine HPCC mode can be specified for parameter No.
1483.
NOTE
During involute interpolation, the lower feedrate limit
for the "acceleration clamp in the vicinity of the basic
circle" of involute interpolation automatic feedrate
control is applied.
1493
Cutting feedrate
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1494
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Real
Set the cutting feedrate in this parameter for machines that do not
require changes in the cutting feedrate during machining. By using
this parameter, cutting feedrates (F codes) do not need to be specified
in NC command data.
Feedrate during reverse movement
Parameter input
Real
Set the feedrate to use during reverse movement. When set to 0,
reverse movement is performed at the feedrate specified in the
program.
NOTE
This parameter is not effective to blocks in rapid
traverse during reverse movement.
- 88 -
B-63330EN/03
1496
Critical angle in the automatic exact stop check
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1497
Parameter input
Integer
degree
1 - 179
Distance to travel of minute blocks in the automatic exact stop check
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1517
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
SET
#1
FIN
#2
MED
#3
ROU
#4
LAA
Parameter input
Real
mm, inch (input unit)
0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
FCC
FNW
ATDF
LAA
ROU
MED
FIN
SET
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether the automatic setting function is enabled on the
HPCC (SETTING) screen.
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Specifies whether the automatic tuning function (FINE) is enabled on
the HPCC (SETTING) screen.
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Specifies whether the automatic tuning function (MEDIUM) is
enabled on the HPCC (SETTING) screen.
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Specifies whether automatic tuning function (ROUGH) is enabled on
the HPCC (SETTING) screen.
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Bit
related
to
the
enabling
and
disabling
of
acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation
0: Whether acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead
interpolation is enabled or disabled depends on the
G05.1/G05 command and the state of MBF, bit 6 of
parameter No. 2401.
1: It is assumed that G05.1Q1 is always issued.
When this parameter bit is set to 1, acceleration/deceleration
before look-ahead interpolation is always specified regardless of
the G05.1/G05 command.
- 89 -
B-63330EN/03
NOTE
1 If this parameter bit is set to 1, MBF, bit 6 of
parameter No. 2401 must also be set to 1.
2 Under those conditions where
acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead
interpolation is not performed, such as threading,
tapping mode, and a canned cycle,
acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead
interpolation is automatically disabled.
3 When using an electronic gearbox, set this
parameter bit to 0.
4 When fine HPCC is used, and a multi-buffer off
command (G05P1) is issued, deceleration with
acceleration for linear interpolation is disabled.
#5
ATDF
If processing-specific parameters are selected with the G05.1 Q1

Rx: or G10 L80 Rx: command, execution parameters are
changed so that machining can be performed with the settings
for each mode. When the fine HPCC mode is turned off after
the end of machining,
0: The execution parameters remain changed.
1: The execution parameters are restored to the values prior to
the change (defaults).
Conditions under which the parameters are restored
- G05.1 Q0: is issued.
- G05.1 Q1: is issued.
- The CNC is reset.
If this parameter bit is set to 1, the machining mode cannot be

changed by operating on MDI keys on the high-speed high
precision machining setup screen.
#6
FNW
Specifies whether the method of determining the feedrate based on

the feedrate difference in acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead
interpolation and the method of determining the feedrate based on the
acceleration of fine HPCC are the same as those of the 15B.
0: Same as those of the 15B. Thus, the highest feedrate that does
not exceed the allowable feedrate difference or allowable
acceleration for each axis is assumed.
1: In addition to the condition that the feedrate must not exceed the
allowable feedrate difference and allowable acceleration, the
condition that the deceleration feedrate must be constant if the
geometry is the same must be satisfied in determining the
feedrate.
When this parameter is set to 1, the feedrate determined with the
feedrate difference or acceleration may be lower by up to 30% than
that determined when it is set to 0.
- 90 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
FCC
If, in acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation, there

is an axis for which the acceleration time is one second or longer:
0: The specified feedrate may not be attained because the precision
is important.
1: The specified feedrate will be attained because the feedrate is
important.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, the precision of
curve interpolation such as circular and NURBS
interpolation may reduce.
1518
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Minimum value of the feed-forward factor for automatic calculation
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 10000
Stores the minimum value of the feed-forward factor used for
automatic tuning. When automatic setting is performed on the HPCC
(SETTING) screen, the minimum value is automatically initialized to
94.0% (parameter value 9400) .
1519
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Active parameter set number
Parameter input
Integer
0-2
Stores the current active parameter set. Usually, the active parameter
set is selected by pressing the [SLCT ACTIVE] soft key on the HPCC
(SETTING) screen and, therefore, this parameter need not be directly
specified.
1520
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Finishing level (for finishing)
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 100
Stores the finishing level for the finishing parameter set. Usually, the
finishing level is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen and,
therefore, this parameter need not be directly specified.
- 91 -
1522
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1524
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1529
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
1533
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant (for finishing)
Parameter input
Integeraxis
msec
0 - 4000
Stores the post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant
for the finishing parameter set. Usually, the time constant is entered
from the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If a different value needs to be
set for an axis, this parameter must be directly specified. To make the
setting effective during operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE" key must
be pressed on the HPCC (SETTING) screen.
Corner feedrate difference (for finishing)
Parameter input
Realaxis
Stores the corner feedrate difference for the finishing parameter set.
Usually, the difference is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen.
If a different value needs to be set for an axis, this parameter must be
directly specified. To make the setting effective during operation, the
"SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on the HPCC (SETTING)
screen.
Feed-forward factor (for finishing)
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - 10000
Stores the feed-forward factor for the finishing parameter set. Usually,
the factor is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If a different
value needs to be set for an axis, this parameter must be directly
specified. To make the setting effective during operation, the
screen.
Acceleration level (for finishing)
Parameter input
Integer
%
0 - 200
Stores the acceleration level for the finishing parameter set. Usually,
the level is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen and, therefore,
this parameter need not be directly specified.
- 92 -
B-63330EN/03
1534
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1535
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1536
Tangent direction acceleration (for finishing)
Parameter input
Realaxis
mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degree/sec/sec (machine unit)
Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 - +100000.0. When
the machine system is inch system, machine, 0.0 - +10000.0)
Stores the tangent direction acceleration for the finishing parameter
set. Usually, the acceleration is entered from the HPCC (SETTING)
screen. If a different value needs to be set for an axis, this parameter
must be directly specified. To make the setting effective during
operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on the HPCC
(SETTING) screen.
Normal direction acceleration (for finishing)
Parameter input
Realaxis
Stores the normal direction acceleration for the finishing parameter
set. Usually, the acceleration is entered from the HPCC (SETTING)
screen. If a different value needs to be set for an axis, this parameter
must be directly specified. To make the setting effective during
operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on the HPCC
(SETTING) screen.
Time required to reach the maximum acceleration of pre-interpolation bellshaped acceleration/deceleration (for finishing)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
msec
0 - 200
Stores the pre-interpolation bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time
constant for the finishing parameter set. Usually, the time constant is
entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If a different value needs
to be set for an axis, this parameter must be directly specified. To
make the setting effective during operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE"
key must be pressed on the HPCC (SETTING) screen.
- 93 -
1540
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
1542
B-63330EN/03
Finishing level (for medium finishing)
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 100
Stores the finishing level for the medium machining parameter set.
Usually, the level is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen and,
Post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant (for medium
finishing)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1544
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1549
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
msec
0 - 4000
for the medium machining parameter set. Usually, the acceleration is
Corner feedrate difference (for medium finishing)
Parameter input
Realaxis
Stores the corner feedrate difference for the medium machining
parameter set. Usually, the difference is entered from the HPCC
(SETTING) screen. If a different value needs to be set for an axis, this
parameter must be directly specified. To make the setting effective
during operation, the "SELECT ACTIVE" key must be pressed on the
Feed-forward factor (for medium finishing)
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - 10000
Stores the feed-forward factor for the medium machining parameter
set. Usually, the factor is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen.
If a different value needs to be set for an axis, this parameter must be
screen.
- 94 -
B-63330EN/03
1553
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1554
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1555
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Acceleration level (for medium finishing)
Parameter input
Integer
%
0 - 200
Stores the acceleration level for the medium machining parameter set.
Tangent direction acceleration (for medium finishing)
Parameter input
Realaxis
Stores the tangent direction acceleration for the medium machining
parameter set. Usually, the acceleration is entered from the HPCC
Normal direction acceleration (for medium finishing)
Parameter input
Realaxis
Stores the normal direction acceleration for the medium machining
- 95 -
1556
B-63330EN/03
Time required to reach the maximum acceleration of pre-interpolation bellshaped acceleration/deceleration (for medium finishing)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1560
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
1562
Parameter input
Integer
msec
0 - 200
constant for the medium machining parameter set. Usually, the time
constant is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If a different
screen.
Finishing level (for rough finishing)
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 100
Stores the finishing level for the rough machining parameter set.
Post-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant (for rough
finishing)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1564
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
msec
0 - 4000
for the rough machining parameter set. Usually, the acceleration is
Corner feedrate difference (for rough finishing)
Parameter input
Realaxis
Stores the corner feedrate difference for the rough machining
parameter set. Usually, the difference is entered from the HPCC
- 96 -
B-63330EN/03

1569
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
1573
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1574
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Feed-forward factor (for rough finishing)
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - 10000
Stores the feed-forward factor for the rough machining parameter set.
Usually, the factor is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If a
different value needs to be set for an axis, this parameter must be
screen.
Acceleration level (for rough finishing)
Parameter input
Integer
%
0 - 200
Stores the acceleration level for the rough machining parameter set.
Tangent direction acceleration (for rough finishing)
Parameter input
Realaxis
Stores the tangent direction acceleration for the rough machining
- 97 -
1575
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1576
B-63330EN/03
Normal direction acceleration (for rough finishing)
Parameter input
Realaxis
Stores the normal direction acceleration for the rough machining
Time required to reach the maximum acceleration of pre-interpolation bellshaped acceleration/deceleration (for rough finishing)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
msec
0 - 200
constant for the rough machining parameter set. Usually, the time
constant is entered from the HPCC (SETTING) screen. If a different
screen.
- 98 -
B-63330EN/03
4.10
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL
PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1600 AND LATER)
#7
1600
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
REX
#4
CTE
#5
JGE
#7
NEX
#6
NEX
RTB
JGE
CTE
#3
#2
#1
#0
REX
Specifies acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse as follows:

0: constant-acceleration acceleration/deceleration.
1: constant-time acceleration/deceleration
When setting this parameter to 1, set the acceleration/deceleration
time constant for parameter No. 1628.
Specifies method of acceleration/deceleration used during cutting
feed and dry runs.
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration is used. However, when the
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration option is selected, bellshaped acceleration/deceleration is used.
1: Exponential acceleration/deceleration
Specifies the method of acceleration/deceleration used during
jogging.
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration is used. However, when the
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration option is selected, bellshaped acceleration/deceleration is used.
Specifies the rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration type when the
acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse is constant-acceleration
time (bit 0 of parameter No. 1600 (REX) = 1) .
1: Linear or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration. Which of them
is effective depends on bit 5 of parameter No. 1601 (RTB) .
#6
#5
1601
#5
#4
Parameter input
Bitaxis
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RTB
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse as follows:
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
To apply bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration to the corresponding
axis, specify time constant T1 in parameter No. 1620 and time
constant T2 in parameter No. 1636, in addition to setting this bit to 0.
- 99 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
1603
[Input type]
[Data type]
#5
FRP
MNJ
#2
#1
#0
To linear type rapid traverse:

0: Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is
determined by bit 0 (REX) of parameter No. 1600, bit 7 (NEX)
of parameter No. 1600, and bit 5 (RTB) of parameter No. 1601.
1: Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is applied.
The maximum allowable acceleration for each axis is set in
parameter No. 1671.
When using bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation, set the acceleration change period in parameter No.
1672.
When this parameter is set to 1, acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is also applied to rapid traverse if the conditions listed
below are all satisfied. In this case, acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation is not applied.
Bit 4 (LRP) of parameter No. 1400 = 1: Linear interpolation
type positioning
A non-zero value is set for any axis in parameter No. 1671.
Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (or
fine HPCC) mode is currently set.
The conditions for look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation are satisfied.
If the conditions listed above are not satisfied, acceleration/
deceleration after interpolation is applied.
#7
#0
#3
Parameter input
Bit
#6
#5
1604
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
FRP
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
MNJ
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies whether both cutting feed acceleration/deceleration and jog
feed acceleration/deceleration are applied to manual handle interrupt
or simultaneous manual-automatic operation (interrupt type) .
0: Both cutting feed acceleration/deceleration and jog feed
acceleration/deceleration are applied.
1: Only cutting feed acceleration/deceleration is valid, and jog feed
acceleration/deceleration is invalid.
- 100 -
B-63330EN/03
1620
Time constant (T) for linear acceleration/deceleration or time constant (T1)

for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse along each axis
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
msec
0 - 4000
Example: Linear type

Feedrate
Rapid traverse rate

(parameter No. 1420)
Time
T: Value set in parameter No. 1620

Bell-shaped type
Feedrate
Rapid traverse rate
T2
T2
T2
T2
T1
Time
T1
T1: Value set in parameter No. 1620

T2 : Value set in parameter No. 1636 (Set these parameters so that
T1 T2 .)
Total acceleration (deceleration) time: T1 + T2
Time of the linear portion: T1 - T2
Time of the curved portions: T2 2
- 101 -
1621
B-63330EN/03
FL feedrate for linear or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapid

traverse along each axis
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Realaxis
Specify the FL feedrate for linear or bell-shaped acceleration/
deceleration or rapid traverse along each axis.
Example: Linear type

Rapid traverse rate
Feedrate
(parameter No.1420)
FL feedrate
Time
T: Value set in parameter No. 1620

Bell-shaped type
Feedrate
Rapid traverse rate
FL feedrate
T2
T2
Time
T1

NOTE
When the feedrate is decelerated to the value set in
this parameter at any point regardless of whether
during a linear or nonlinear feedrate increase, the
tool moves at that feedrate for the remaining
distance then stops.
- 102 -
B-63330EN/03
1622
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant for each axis
Parameter input
Integeraxis
msec
0 - 4000
For each axis, set the time constant used for acceleration/deceleration
during cutting feed.
The time constant is fixed irrespective of the feedrate (fixed time
constant method) .
Linear acceleration/deceleration after
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after
cutting feed interpolation
cutting feed interpolation
Feedrate
Feedrate
Time constant
Time
Time constant
Time
NOTE
However, note that the valid range is 0 to 2000 when
the bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration option is
provided.
Except in special cases, this time constant should be
set to the same value for all axes. When different
values are specified, the desired straight and curved
lines will not be obtained.
- 103 -
1623
B-63330EN/03
FL feedrate for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration after interpolation

along each axis
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Realaxis
NOTE
Be sure to always set 0 in this parameter for all axes,
except for a special application. Otherwise, correct
linear or circular figures cannot be obtained.
1624
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1625
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1626
Jog acceleration/deceleration time constant for each axis
Parameter input
Integeraxis
msec
0 - 4000
For each axis, set the time constant used for acceleration/deceleration
during jog feed.
FL feedrate for each axis for acceleration/deceleration during jog feed
Parameter input
Realaxis
For each axis, set the FL feedrate used for acceleration/deceleration
during jog feed.
Time constant for each axis for acceleration/deceleration during threading
cycle
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
msec
0 - 4000
For each axis, set the time constant used for exponential
acceleration/deceleration during the threading cycle (G76 and G78
(G92 in G code system A) ) .
- 104 -
B-63330EN/03
1627
FL feedrate for each axis for acceleration/deceleration during the threading

cycle
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Realaxis
For each axis, set the FL feedrate used for acceleration/deceleration
during the threading cycle. Except in special cases, set this parameter
to 0.
NOTE
The time constant in parameter No. 1622 and the FL
feedrate in parameter No. 1623 are used during
normal threading (G33 (G32 in G code system A)).
1628
Time constant for rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration with constant

time for individual axes
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1629
Parameter input
Integeraxis
msec
0 - 4000
Specifies the time constant for rapid traverse with constant time for
individual axes.
This parameter is effective only when bit 0 of parameter No. 1600
(REX) is set to 1.
FL feedrate for rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration with constant time
for each axis
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Realaxis
Specify the FL feedrate for rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration
with constant time along each axis.
- 105 -
1635
B-63330EN/03
Time constant for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in

the mode of look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1636
Parameter input
Integeraxis
msec
0 - 4000
In the mode of look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation and in fine HPCC mode, this parameter is used instead
of the ordinary time constant (parameter No. 1622) .
Be sure to always set the same time constant in this parameter for all
axes, except for a special application. Otherwise, correct linear or
circular figures cannot be obtained.
Time constant for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse
along each axis (T2)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1644
Parameter input
Integeraxis
msec
0 - 1000
Set time constant T2 of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for
rapid traverse along each axis. Specify this parameter so that it does
not exceed the value of parameter No. 1620 (T1) .
Parameter 1 to set acceleration/deceleration for each axis when a constant
feedrate command for PMC axis control is specified
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
min-1
0 - 32767
Feedrate
Parameter 1
(No.1644)
Time
Parameter 2
(No.1645)
- 106 -
B-63330EN/03
1645
Parameter 2 to set acceleration/deceleration for each axis when a constant

feedrate command for PMC axis control is specified
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
msec
0 - 32767
Specify the time it takes to reach the feedrate set in parameter 1.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, the
acceleration/deceleration function is disabled.
1656
Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before

interpolation
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
msec
0 - 200
This parameter sets the acceleration change period in bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (the time taken for the
change from the constant speed state (A) to the certain
acceleration/deceleration state (C) using an acceleration calculated
based on the acceleration set in parameter No. 1660: the period of (B)
in the following figure) .
Tangential feedrate
Optimum inclination is automatically
calculated based on the value set in
parameter No. 1660.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(B)
(A)
Set the period in parameter No.

1656.
- 107 -
(B)
(C)
(B)
(A)
1660
B-63330EN/03
Maximum allowable acceleration of acceleration/deceleration before

interpolation for each axis
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Realaxis
Specify
the
maximum
allowable
acceleration
of
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for each axis.
If a value greater than 100000.0 is set, it is clamped to 100000.0.
If 0 is set, it is regarded to be 100000.0. If 0 is set for all axes, lookahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation will not be
performed.
If the allowable acceleration for one axis is twice as large as that for
another or more, the feedrate may temporarily reduce around corners
where the direction to travel changes suddenly.
1663
Allowable acceleration in the deceleration function based on the

acceleration for each axis of fine HPCC
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Realaxis
Specify the allowable acceleration that may occur due to changes in
the direction of tool travel.
For an axis for which this parameter is set to 0, the deceleration
function based on the acceleration is disabled. If 0 is set for all axes,
the feedrate is not determined based on the acceleration.
In the 15B, the time for the maximum cutting rate (parameter No.
1422) was set for parameter No. 1643 to set the allowable
acceleration. In the 15i, on the other hand, the acceleration is directly
specified for this parameter.
NOTE
During involute interpolation, the allowable
acceleration for the "acceleration clamp in the
vicinity of the basic circle" of involute
interpolation automatic feedrate control is
applied.
- 108 -
B-63330EN/03
1665
Allowable acceleration in the deceleration function based on the

acceleration during circular interpolation for each axis (for normal mode)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Realaxis
Specify the allowable acceleration in the deceleration function based
on the acceleration during circular interpolation for each axis.
The feedrate is controlled so that the acceleration resulting from
changes in the direction of travel during circular interpolation does
not exceed the value of this parameter.
For an axis for which 0 is set for this parameter, the acceleration
function based on the acceleration is disabled.
If different values are set for this parameter for different axes, the
feedrate is determined based on the lower acceleration of the
specified two circular axes.
This parameter is effective when fine HPCC mode is not used
(ordinary mode) . In fine HPCC mode, parameter No. 1663 is used.
The "deceleration function based on the acceleration during circular
interpolation" is equivalent to the "feedrate clamp with the arc radius"
in the 15B.
In the 15B, the upper feedrate limit, lower feedrate limit, and arc
radius were specified for parameters Nos. 1490 to 1492. In the
feedrate clamp based on the acceleration in the 15i, the allowable
acceleration is set for this parameter.
NOTE
During involute interpolation, the allowable
acceleration for the "acceleration clamp in the vicinity
of the basic circle" of involute interpolation automatic
feedrate control is applied.
1670
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Acceleration for each axis for deceleration stop at power failure
Parameter input
Real number axis
mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degrees/sec/sec (machine unit)
See the standard parameter setting table (D).
(For millimeter machines, 0.0 to +100000.0. For inch machines, 0.0
to +10000.0)
Set an acceleration value to be applied to deceleration stop of the
target axis upon a power failure.
If this parameter is set to 0 for an axis, deceleration is not performed
for that axis upon a power failure.
- 109 -
1671
B-63330EN/03
Maximum allowable acceleration for each axis in acceleration/deceleration

before interpolation to linear-type rapid traverse
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1672
Parameter input
Real number axis
mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degrees/sec/sec (machine unit)
See the standard parameter setting table (D).
(For millimeter machines, 0.0 to +100000.0; for inch machines, 0.0 to
+10000.0)
This parameter sets the maximum allowable acceleration of
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation to linear-type rapid
traverse. If a value in excess of 100000.0 is set, the acceleration is
clamped to 100000.0.
If 0 is set, the following value is assumed:
1000.0 mm/sec/sec
100.0 inch/sec/sec
100.0 degrees/sec/sec
If 0 is set for all axes, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
not performed.
Acceleration change period of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation to linear-type rapid traverse
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
msec
0 to 200
This parameter sets the acceleration change period of bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation to linear type-rapid
traverse (the period during which the acceleration changes from the
constant feedrate state (A) to the constant acceleration/deceleration
state (C) with the acceleration calculated based on the acceleration
value set in parameter No. 1671: portion (B) in the following
figure).
Tangential feedrate
Maximum acceleration is calculated
automatically so that
the maximum
allowable acceleration for each axis set in

parameter No. 1671 is not exceeded.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(B)
(A)
Set period in parameter No. 1672.
- 110 -
(B)
(C)
(B)
(A)
B-63330EN/03
4.11
SERVO PARAMETER (DATA NO. 1700 TO 1999 AND 2600

AND LATER)
The following parameters are not explained in this manual. Refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR series
PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65150E) .
No.
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1713
1714
1715
1718
1719
1724
1727
1729
Data type
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
1730
1732
1733
1737
1735
1736
1740
1741
1742
1743
1749
1752
1753
1754
1755
1761
1765
1766
1767
1768
1788
1806
1807
1808
1809
1852
1853
1854
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Contents
Fine acceleration/deceleration time (BELLTC)
Magnetic saturation compensation (base/coefficient)
Deceleration torque limit (base/coefficient)
AMR conversion coefficient 1
Center frequency of notch filter (Hz)
(Reserve)
(Reserve)
DPFB
SPSY
-1
Limit speed for enabling position gain switching (in units of 0.01 min )
Limit speed for disabling low-speed integration in acceleration
Limit speed for enabling low-speed integration in deceleration
Number of position feedback pulse
Vibration-damping control gain
Stage 2 offset for two-stage backlash acceleration
Abnormal load detection dynamic friction, cancel
Dual position feedback: Level on which the difference in error between the semi-closed
and full-closed modes becomes too large
Non-interference control coefficient
Conversion coefficient for the number of feedback pulses
Detection resistance conversion coefficient
Position feedback switching time constant
Non-interference control coefficient
Magnetic flux decrease compensation (coefficient)
ABGO
IQOB
CPEE
SPVC
CROF
DUAL
OVS1
FAGO
FRC2
FADL
Magnetic flux decrease compensation (base/limit)
Correction of two thrust ripples per magnetic pole pair
Correction of four thrust ripples per magnetic pole pair
Correction of six thrust ripples per magnetic pole pair
AMR conversion coefficient 2
Unexpected disturbance detection threshold in rapid traverse
Fine acceleration/deceleration time constant 2 (in ms)
Position feed-forward coefficient for cutting
Velocity feed-forward coefficient for cutting
Maximum amplifier current
AMR7
AMR6
AMR5
AMR4
AMR3
AMR2
AMR1
AMR0
VFSE
PFSE
V0FS
OVSC
BLEN
NPSP
PIEN
OBEN
TGAL
DLY0
Current loop integral gain (PK1)
Current loop proportional gain (PK2)
Current loop gain (PK3)
- 111 -
No.
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1883
1884
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
Data type
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Bit axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
B-63330EN/03
Contents
Velocity loop integral gain (PK1V)
Velocity loop proportional gain (PK2V)
Velocity loop incomplete integral gain (PK3V)
Velocity loop gain (PK4V)
Observe parameter (POA1)
Backlash acceleration amount
Dual position feedback maximum amplitude
Observe parameter (POK1)
Observe parameter (POK2)
Current dead-zone compensation (PPMAX)
Current dead band compensation (PDDP)
Current dead-zone compensation (PHYST)
Back electromotive force compensation (EMFCMP)
Current phase compensation (PVPA)
Current phase compensation (PALPH)
Back electromotive force compensation (EMFBAS)
Torque limit
Back electromotive force compensation (EMFLMT)
Motor number
Load inertia ratio
Number of velocity pulses
Overload protection coefficient (OVC1)
Overload protection coefficient (OVC2)
SFCM
BRKC
DCBE
ACCF
SPVE
Number of position pulses
Software disconnection alarm level
Overload protection coefficient (OVCLMT) (OVCLMT)
250 ses acceleration feedback
Torque command filter
FRCA
FAD
LAXD
PFBS
VCTM
SPPC
SPPR
BLST
BLCU
POLE
HBBL
HBPE
BLTE
RCCL
STNG
VCM2
VCM1
BLAT
TDOU
NFL8
NFL7
NFL5
K2VC
PK25
OVCR
RISC
HTNG
PFBC
Feed forward coefficient
Velocity feed forward coefficient
Backlash acceleration timing
Time during which backlash acceleration is effective
Static friction compensation
Stop state judgement parameter
Current loop gain variable with velocity
1-ms acceleration feedback gain
Overshoot prevention counter
Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (numerator)
Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (denominator)
Primary delay time constant of dual position feedback
- 112 -
PKVE
VFBA
ADBL
LINE
FEED
SBSM
FCBL
TNOM
IQOB
SERD
FFALWY
MSFE
SSG1
MOVO
SYNMOD
PGTW
ABNT
DBST
B-63330EN/03
No.
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1984
1985
1990
1991
1992
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
Data type
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Word axis
Contents
Dual position feedback zero-point amplitude
Backlash acceleration stop amount
Brake control timer (ms)
Numerator of the flexible feed gear
Denominator of the flexible feed gear
Rated current parameter
Torque offset
Machine feedback gain
Base pulse of backlash acceleration
Nonlinear control parameter
Advanced control feed-forward coefficient
Static friction compensation stop parameter
Current phase compensation coefficient
N-pulse suppression level
Overshoot compensation valid level
Final clamp value for the actual-current limit
Track back amount applied when an unexpected disturbance is detected
Unexpected disturbance detection threshold in cutting
Torque constant
- 113 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1707
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
HR3
1716
#1
#0
HR3
Parameter input
Bit axis
HIGH SPEED HRV mode is
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Refer to the "FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR series PARAMETER
MANUAL (B-65150E)" for details.
Torque command difference threshold for torque difference alarm detection
for synchronous control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
1738
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1764
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - 14564
An alarm is issued if the absolute value of a torque command
difference between two axes subjected to synchronous control
exceeds this value. Specify the same value for master and slave axes
of synchronous control.
If the value is 0, torque difference alarm detection is disabled.
A servo axis number combination for master and slave axes subjected
to synchronous control must be, for example, (1, 2) or (3, 4) , in
which the master axis is assigned an odd number and the slave axis is
assigned the even number that is one greater than the master axis
number.
Abnormal load detection alarm timer
Parameter input
Integer
msec
From 0 through 32767
Specify the period of time from when an abnormal load is detected to
when a servo alarm is issued.
If 0 is set, it is regarded to be 200 msec.
Offset output time of the Inductosyn-type absolute-position detector
Parameter input
Integeraxis
msec
0 - 32767
When the offset output time of the Inductosyn-type absolute-position
detector is 20 ms or longer, use this parameter to specify the output
time.
For an explanation of offset output time, refer to the manual supplied
with the scale used.
- 114 -
B-63330EN/03
1800
#1
[Input type]
[Data type]
CVR
#2
FVF
#3
RFW
#4
CCI
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
IVO
SAK
CIN
CCI
RFW
FVF
CVR
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to issue a servo alarm if velocity control ready
signal VRDY turns on before position control ready signal PRDY
turns on.
0: Does not issue a servo alarm.
1: Issues a servo alarm.
Normally, set CVR to 1.
Specifies whether to perform follow-up in the servo-off mode.
0: Does not perform follow-up (mechanical clamp in the servo off
mode) .
1: Performs follow-up (mechanical handle in the servo off mode) .
Specifies whether to enable forward feed control during rapid
traverse.
0: Disables forward feed control.
1: Enables forward feed control.
Normally, forward feed control is enabled only when cutting feed is
performed. When this parameter is set to 1, forward feed is also
enabled during rapid traverse. This decreases positional deviation in
the servo, reducing the time for entering an effective area during
positioning.
Specifies the value to be used as the effective area during cutting feed
(cutting-feed effective area) .
0: Uses parameter 1826, which is also used for rapid traverse.
1: Uses parameter 1838, which is used only for cutting feed.
When a positioning block is specified or an exact stop is specified in a
cutting feed block, the block decelerates the tool at the end of the
block for a position check. The cutting/rapid traverse position check
function allows the effective area (parameter 1838) to be set
separately for cutting feed in addition to the effective area (parameter
1826) for rapid traverse.
For example, a larger effective area can be set for rapid traverse,
while an ordinary small effective area is set for cutting feed. This can
reduce machining time (positioning time) without reducing machining
precision. The CCI bit (bit 4) of parameter 1800 is used to select
whether this new function or the standard position check function is
used. When this position check function is selected, it is effective for
all axes. For axes that do not require this function, set the same data
in parameters 1826 and 1838. When a rapid traverse block terminates
a position check is performed using the value set in rapid-traversespecific parameter 1826. When a cutting feed block terminates and
the next block specifies cutting feed, a position check is performed
using the value set in cutting-specific parameter 1838; if the next
block specifies rapid traverse, however, a position check is performed
using the value in rapid-traverse-specific parameter 1826.
Furthermore, when a cutting feed block terminates, cutting-specific
parameter 1838 can always be used for a position check regardless of
the next block. This is specified by bit 5 of parameter 1800.
- 115 -
#5
CIN
B-63330EN/03
When CCI is 1, the CIN bit specifies the condition under which the
cutting feed parameter defines the cutting-feed effective area.
0: Used only when the next block specifies cutting feed.
1: Always used regardless of the next block.
The relationship of parameter between a rapid and a cutting is
the following graph.
Parameter CIN (No.1800 #5)
0
Rapid
Rapid
No.1827
No.1827
Rapid
Rapid
Rapid
Rapid
No.1827
No.1827
Cutting
Cutting
0
Cutting
Cutting
No.1827
No.1827
Cutting
Cutting
Cutting
Cutting
No.1827
No.1827
Parameter
Rapid
Rapid
CCI
Rapid
Rapid
(No.1800#4)
No.1827
No.1827
Rapid
Rapid
Rapid
Rapid
No.1827
No.1827
Cutting
Cutting
1
Cutting
Cutting
No.1838
No.1838
Cutting
Cutting
Cutting
Cutting
No.1827
No.1838
Rapid
Rapid
Two parameter of CCI and CIN mentioned above can be applied for Cs axis.
#6
SAK
#7
IVO
Specifies whether to change the state of the servo ready signal SA

when the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal DVAL is 1 or when the
VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal for each axis, DVALn, is 1.
0: The servo ready signal SA changes to 0.
1: The servo ready signal SA retains its state of 1.
Specifies whether to release the emergency stop state when an
emergency stop occurs with the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal
being 1.
0: Does not release the emergency stop state until the VRDY OFF
alarm ignore signal changes to 0.
1: Releases the emergency stop state.
NOTE
Even when the system is reset when the VRDY
OFF alarm ignore signal is at 1 and the motor is
de-energized, the reset state can be released.
- 116 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
1801
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
FFN
Parameter input
Bit
NOTE
effective.
#1
FFN
Specifies whether to enable the feed-forward function in a mode other

than Look-ahead acc/dec before interpolation mode
0: Enable the function in a mode other than Look-ahead acc/dec
before interpolation mode.
1: Enable the function only in Look-ahead acc/dec before
interpolation mode.
To use the feed-forward function, set bit 1 of parameter No. 1883 to
1.
#7
#6
#5
1802
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
SVF
#3
FUP
#4
TQO
#4
#3
TQO
FUP
#2
#1
#0
SVF
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies whether to validate the servo off signal.
0: Does not validate the servo off signal.
1: Validates the servo off signal.
Whether follow-up is performed for each axis when the servo is
turned off
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
Effective when FVF (bit 2 of parameter No. 1800) is 0.
Specifies whether to enable the torque override function.
0: Disable the function. (100% override)
1: Enable the function.
- 117 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
1803
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
ADJ
#2
CLP
#3
MVB
#4
#3
#2
#1
MVB
CLP
ADJ
#0
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies the axis along which to move in adjustment mode in
synchronous control.
0: Not an axis along which to move in adjustment mode.
1: Axis along which to move in adjustment mode.
When this parameter is set to "1," the axis enters adjustment mode.
For an axis for which this parameter is set to "1," movement is
performed with a master axis move command.
Specify the bit for only one of the master and slave axes.
If a single master axis has multiple slave axes, set this bit to 1 for that
axis for which a synchronous error alarm is issued to recover the axis.
When alarms are issued for multiple axes, recover one axis, then
change this parameter to recover another axis.
Specifies whether to compensate for synchronous error in
synchronous control.
0: Compensates for synchronous error.
1: Does not compensate for synchronous error.
(Set this bit only for the master axis.)
Specifies whether to validate a command to move the machine in the
direction of increasing the synchronous error in the adjustment mode.
0: Ignores the command.
1: Validates the command.
If a single master axis has multiple slave axes, reducing the
synchronous error on one axis by means of movement along the
master axis may result in increase in the synchronous error on another
slave axis. When this parameter is set to "0," the master axis cannot
move in either direction. Use ADJ (bit 1 of parameter No. 1803) to
allow movement along a slave axis, and perform the appropriate
adjustment operation.
- 118 -
B-63330EN/03
1804
[Input type]
[Data type]
#7
#6
CNT
RBK
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
DGP
PLC
Parameter input
Bitaxis
NOTE
effective.
#0
PLC
#1
DGP
#6
RBK
#7
CNT
PLC01 Specifies whether the value set in parameter No. 1876

(number of speed feedback pulses) or parameter No. 1891 (number of
position feedback pulses) exceeds 32767.
0: The value set in parameter No. 1876 or No. 1891 does not
exceed 32767.
1: The value set in parameter No. 1876 or No. 1891 exceeds 32767.
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameter No. 1876 or 1891 to
Y10 of the original value.
Specifies whether to set the digital servo parameters specific to the
motor at power-on.
0: Sets the digital servo parameters specific to the motor.
1: Does not set the digital servo parameters specific to the motor.
When this bit is set to 0 after the motor type is specified, the standard
settings for the motor type are automatically set at power-on. This bit
is also set to 1 at power-on.
Cutting feed/rapid traverse backlash compensation is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
Specifies whether to specify spindle contour control for the serial
interface spindle.
0: Does not specify spindle contour control.
1: Specifies spindle contour control.
#7
1810
[Input type]
[Data type]
#6
#5
#4
#3
NAD
#2
#1
#0
SCI
Parameter input
Bit
NOTE
effective.
#1
SCI
During servo-off, an in-position check is

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
- 119 -
B-63330EN/03
NOTE
For the FS15B, this parameter bit was specified as
follows. (This was not described in the manual.)
#1
SCI During servo-off, an in-position check is
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
#6
NAD
Specifies whether to perform A/D conversion of spindle or servo

motor current.
0: Performs A/D conversion.
1: Does not perform A/D conversion.
#7
#6
1815
[Input type]
[Data type]
#5
#4
APC
APZ
#3
#2
#1
#0
OPT
Parameter input
Bitaxis
NOTE
effective.
#1
OPT
Specifies whether to use a separate pulse coder as the position

detector.
0: Does not use any separate pulse coder.
1: Uses a separate pulse coder.
NOTE
Refer to PSL (bit 3 of parameter No. 1807).
#4
APZ
#5
APC
Indicates whether relative positioning of the machine position and

absolute-position detector is complete when an absolute-position
detector (absolute pulse coder) is used as the position detector.
0: Not complete
1: Complete
When an absolute-position detector is used: Set this bit to 0 when
primary at-site adjustment is done or the absolute pulse coder is
replaced. Then turn on the power, and set the origin of the absoluteposition detector by using, or example, manual reference position
return. Relative positioning of the machine position and absoluteposition detector is complete and APZx is automatically set to 1.
Indicates whether the position detector is
0: a detector other than an absolute position detector.
1: an absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder) .
- 120 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
1816
[Input type]
[Data type]
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
ACM
Parameter input
Bitaxis
NOTE
effective.
#7
ACM
Specify whether to use an optional command multiplication factor

1/N.
0: Does not use the factor.
1: Uses the factor.
This bit is effective only when an optional command multiplication
factor option is provided.
#7
1817
[Input type]
[Data type]
#6
#5
TDM
#4
#3
#2
#1
HYB
SYN
#0
Parameter input
Bitaxis
NOTE
effective.
#1
SYN
#2
HYB
Specifies whether to execute synchronous control.

0: Executes synchronous control when the synchronous control
selection signal SYNCx for the slave axis is "1."
1: Always executes synchronous control.
Set this parameter only for a slave axis.
Dual position feedback compensation clamp is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
NOTE
With the FANUC Series 15i, the use of a function
equivalent to FANUC Series 15B hybrid control requires
the dual position feedback function. When the
compensation clamp function for dual position
feedback is used, therefore, a setting to enable dual
position feedback is required in addition to the setting of
this bit.
#6
TDM
Specifies whether to validate tandem control.

0: Does not validate tandem control.
1: Validate tandem control.
Set this parameter for both master and slave axes.
- 121 -
1820
B-63330EN/03
Command multiplier for each axis (CMR)
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
1821
Parameter input
Integeraxis
See the following descriptions.
i) When CMR = 0.5 to 48
Set ACM (bit 7 of parameter No. 1816) to 0.
Then specify the value given by the following expression.
Setting = CMR*2
Valid range: 1 to 96
ii) When CMR = 1/2 to 1/27
(An optional command multiplier (option) is required)
Set ACM (bit 7 of parameter No. 1816) to 1.
Then specify the value given by the following expression.
Setting = 1/CMR
Valid range: 1 to 27
Value of the numerator of a command multiplier for each axis (optional
command multiplier)
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - 9999
Specify the value of the numerator of a command multiplier for each
axis. The optional command multiplier is required.
- 122 -
B-63330EN/03
1822
Value of the denominator of a command multiplier for each axis (optional

command multiplier)
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - 9999
Specify the value of the denominator of a command multiplier for
each axis. The optional command multiplier is required. To use the
optional command multiplier n/m (n: 1821, m: 1822) , set a value
other than 0 in parameter No. 1821 and No. 1822.
1825
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Servo loop gain for each axis
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0.01/sec
1 - 9999
Specify the position control loop gain for each axis.
For a machine which performs linear or circular interpolation
(cutting) , specify the same value for all axes. For a machine which
requires only positioning, different values may be specified for
different axes. The larger the specified loop gain, the higher the
position control response. If the loop gain is too large, the servo
system becomes unstable.
The relationships between the positioning deviation (amount of pulses
stored in the error counter) and feedrate are expressed as follows:
Positioning deviation = feedrate/ (60*loop gain)
Unit: Positioning deviation mm, inches, or deg
Feedrate mm/min, inches/min, or deg/min
loop gain 1/sec
1827
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Axis-by-axis in-position width
Parameter input
Integer axis
Detection unit
0 to 99999999
Set an in-position width for each axis.
If the difference between the machine position and specified position
(absolute positional deviation value) is smaller than the in-position
width, it is assumed that the machine has reached the specified
position, that is, the machine is in position.
When bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1800 is set to 1, this parameter
specifies an in-position width for each axis at rapid traverse time.
- 123 -
1828
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1829
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1830
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Positioning deviation limit for each axis while it is moving
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 99999999
Specify the positioning deviation limit for each axis while it is
moving.
If the positioning deviation limit of the axis is exceeded while the axis
is moving, a servo alarm is issued and the machine stops immediately
(same as an emergency stop) .
Generally, specify a value larger than the positioning deviation in the
rapid traverse mode.
Positioning deviation limit for each axis when it is stopped
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 99999999
Specify the positioning deviation limit for each axis when it is
stopped.
If the positioning deviation limit of the axis is exceeded when the axis
is stopped, a servo alarm is issued and the machine stops immediately
(same as an emergency stop) .
Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the servo off mode
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 99999999
Specify the positioning deviation limit for each axis in the servo off
mode.
If the positioning deviation limit of the servo off mode is exceeded, a
servo alarm is issued and the machine stops immediately (same as an
emergency stop) .
Generally, specify the same value as for the positioning deviation
limit for an axis when it is stopped.
- 124 -
B-63330EN/03
1832
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1837
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1838
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Feed-stop position deviation for each axis
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 99999999
Specify the feed-stop position deviation for each axis. If the
positioning deviation of an axis while it is moving exceeds the feedstop position deviation for the axis, pulse distribution and
acceleration/deceleration control are temporarily stopped. When the
positioning deviation becomes less than the feed-stop position
deviation, pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration control are
restarted.
The feed-stop function is mainly used for decreasing overshoot when
a large servo motor is accelerated or decelerated.
Generally, specify the intermediate value between the positioning
deviation limit while the tool moving and the positioning deviation
limit for the axis in the rapid traverse mode as the feed-stop position
deviation.
Positioning deviation limit while the tool is moving in the rigid tapping mode
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 99999999
Specify the positioning deviation limit for a drilling axis while the
tool is moving in the rigid tapping mode. In the rigid tapping mode,
the position gain of a drilling axis is the same as that of the spindle.
Generally, the position gain of the spindle must not be excessively
large. In the rigid tapping mode, therefore, the position gain of a
drilling axis is smaller than the position gain in other modes. The
positioning deviation limit for the drilling axis while the tool is
moving in the rigid tapping mode is provided separately because the
positioning deviation increases if the position gain decreases at the
same speed.
Axis-by-axis in-position width at cutting feed time
Parameter input
Integer axis
Detection uni
0 to 99999999
Set an in-position width at cutting feed time for each axis.
This parameter is used when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1800 is set
to 1.
- 125 -
1841
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1842
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1843
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Servo error amount with which reference position return assumed possible
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 32767
Set the servo error amount with which reference position return is
assumed possible.
Usually, set 0. (If a value equal to or less than 0 is set, it is regarded
to be 128.)
If, during reference position return, a feedrate that exceeds the
specified value is not attained by the time the tool leaves the limit
switch for deceleration (the deceleration signal *DEC is restored to
"1") , alarm "PS200 PULSCODER INVALID ZERO RETURN" is
issued.
If, during reference position return, a feedrate that exceeds the
specified servo error amount is not attained by the time the tool leaves
the limit switch for deceleration (the deceleration signal DEC i is
restored to "1") , alarm PS200 is issued.
Torque difference alarm detection timer
Parameter input
Integer
msec
0 - 4000
Specify the time allowed before the beginning of torque difference
alarm detection for synchronous control after the servo ready signal
(SA[F000#6]) becomes 1.
If the parameter is 0, 512 ms is assumed.
Position deviation limit at torque limit skip
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 327670
Set the position deviation limit during a torque limit skip command
for each axis. If the position deviation exceeds the position deviation
limit, SP alarm (SV0109) is issued and the system stops instantly.
- 126 -
B-63330EN/03
1844
Grid shift amount of the reference position shift function
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
-999999999 - 999999999
Distance to the first grid point found since the deceleration dog is
turned off when the reference position shift amount (parameter No.
1850) is set to 0.
NOTE
When SFD (bit 4 of parameter No. 1008) is set
to 1, the grid amount (parameter No. 1844) is
set to 0, and the reference position shift amount
(parameter No. 1850) is set to 0, a value is
automatically set. The automatically set value
must not be changed.
1846
Distance with which the second-stage smooth backlash compensation is

started
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1847
Parameter input
Integer axis
Detection unit
0 to 999999999
For each axis, set a distance from the point where the direction of axis
movement is reversed to the point where the second-stage smooth
backlash compensation is started.
Distance with which the second-stage smooth backlash compensation is
terminated
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer axis
Detection unit
0 to 999999999
For each axis, set a distance from the point where the direction of axis
movement is reversed to the point where the second-stage smooth
backlash compensation is terminated.
- 127 -
1848
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1849
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
First-stage smooth backlash compensation amount
Parameter input
Integer axis
Detection unit
-9999 to 9999
For each axis, set a first-stage smooth backlash compensation amount.
Backlash compensation amount used for rapid traverse for each axis
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
-9999 - 9999
Set the backlash compensation amount used in rapid traverse for each
axis. (This parameter is valid when RBK, #6 of parameter 1804, is
set to 1.)
More precise machining can be performed by changing the backlash
compensation amount depending on the feedrate, rapid traverse or the
cutting feed for positioning.
Let the measured backlash at cutting feed be A and the measured
backlash at rapid traverse be B. The backlash compensation amount is
shown below depending on the change of feedrate (cutting feed or
rapid traverse) and the change of the direction of movement.
Change of feed mode
Change of
movement direction
Same direction
Opposite direction
Cutting feed
Cutting feed
Rapid traverse
Rapid traverse
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
Cutting feed
Rapid traverse
0
A
0
B
(B+)
(-)
(B+)
Note 1) = (A-B)/2
Note 2) The signs() of compensation values indicate the same directions as those
used for indicating movement directions.
- 128 -
B-63330EN/03
1850
Grid shift/reference position shift for each axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 99999999
Specify the grid shift for each axis.
The grid position can be shifted by the amount specified in the
parameter to move the reference position. The grid shift must not
exceed the reference counter capacity (RC1x to RC4x (bits 0 to 3 of
parameter No. 1816) or parameter No. 1896) .
NOTE
When SFD (bit 4 of parameter No. 1008) is set to 1, this
parameter indicates the "reference position shift
amount for each axis." In this case, the valid range is:
-999999999 to 999999999.
1851
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Backlash compensation for each axis
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
-9999 - 9999
Specify the backlash compensation for each axis.
When an axis moves in the direction opposite to the reference
position return direction after power-on, the first backlash
compensation is made.
1862
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Velocity control observer
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - 32767
The set value should be 3559.
If the velocity loop observer is used (parameter no.1808#2=1) , the set
value should be 956.
1863
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Velocity control observer
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - 32767
The set value should be 3329.
If the velocity loop observer is used (parameter no.1808#2=1) , the set
value should be 510.
- 129 -
B-63330EN/03
1875
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Load-inertia ratio
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - 32767
(Load inertia) / (Motor inertia) * 256
For tandem control, set
(Load inertia) / (Motor inertia) * 256/2
to both the master and the slave axis.
1879
Direction of the motor revolution
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
-111 - 111
Specify the direction of the motor revolution.
In the tandem control, switch over the revolution direction by this
parameter if it is different among the master axis and the slave axis.
1881
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Permissible error at start of chopping compensation
Parameter input
Integer
detection unit
0 - 99999999
Chopping compensation is made when the difference between the
underrun amounts at the top and bottom dead centers due to the servo
position control delay is less than the setting. When 0 is specified for
this parameter, no compensation is made.
#7
1883
[Input type]
[Data type]
#6
BCT
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
BCT
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Setting of the vertical axis drop prevention function
0: Does not delay the de-energizing timing. (The function is
disabled.)
1: Delays the de-energizing timing. (The function is enabled.)
- 130 -
B-63330EN/03
1896
Capacity of the reference counter for each axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1910
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 999999999
Specifies a desired reference counter capacity. When 0 is specified for
this parameter, the standard setting (data No. 1816) is used. In case
distance coded linear scale, specifies a distance of mark to mark on
distance coded scale. Even when PLC01 of data No. 1804 is set to 1,
the unit of data is not multiplied by 10.
Turn the power on again after specifying this parameter.
Multiplication of the maximum permissible synchronous error immediately
after power-on
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
1912
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 100
Synchronous error alarm 2 is checked with the value equal to the
maximum permissible error (parameter No. 1913) multiplied by the
value of this parameter until synchronization is established
immediately after power-on.
If the value exceeds 32767, it is clamped to 32767.
Dead zone for the synchronous error on each axis
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
1 - 32767
When the synchronous error does not exceed the setting, it is not
compensated for.
Specify this parameter only for a slave axis.
- 131 -
1913
B-63330EN/03
Maximum permissible synchronous error for synchronous error alarm 2
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1914
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1915
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
1 - 32767
Specify the maximum permissible synchronous error for synchronous
error alarm 2.
Maximum permissible synchronous error for synchronous error alarm 1
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
1 - 32767
Specify the maximum permissible synchronous error for synchronous
error alarm 1.
Compensation gain of the synchronous error for each axis
Parameter input
Integeraxis
1 - 1024
The gain of synchronization error compensation is set.
As many pulses as the number of compensation pulses for every 8msec sampling period, obtained from the following equation, are
output to the slave axis.
This setting is made for the slave axis only.
Compensation pulses = synchronization error
Ci
1024
Ci: Compensation gain

1917
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Synchronous error zero width 2 for an individual axis
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 32767
Specify the synchronous error zero width 2 for synchronous error
smoothing suppression.
The setting made for this parameter must be smaller than the value
specified in parameter No. 1912.
- 132 -
B-63330EN/03
NOTE
The setting made for this parameter must be smaller
than the value specified in parameter No. 1912.
1918
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Synchronous error compensation gain 2 for an individual axis
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - 1024
Specify the synchronous error compensation gain 2 for synchronous
error smoothing suppression.
The setting made for this parameter must be smaller than the value
specified in parameter No. 1915.
NOTE
The setting made for this parameter must be smaller
than the value specified in parameter No. 1915.
#7
#6
#5
1930
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
STH
#4
SMS
[Input type]
[Data type]
#7
TQC
#3
#2
#1
SMS
#0
STH
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Turning mode of dual position feedback is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Specifies whether to enable the synchronous error compensation
smoothing suppress function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
#7
1951
#4
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
TQC
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies whether to perform torque control for the relevant axis.
0: Torque control is not performed for the axis.
1: Torque control is performed for the axis.
- 133 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
#4
#3
1952
[Input type]
[Data type]
#2
VFA
#2
#1
Parameter input
Bitaxis
In the tandem control, the averaging function of the velocity feedback
is,
0: valid.
1: invalid.
This parameter should be set only for the master axis.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
1955
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
EGB
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies the axis on which to perform synchronization when using
the electronic gear box function (EGB) .
0: Axis on which to perform synchronization with the EGB.
1: Not an axis on which to perform synchronization with the EGB.
Set 1 for both the EGB slave and dummy axes.
#7
#5
TQO
#6
#5
ABN
#3
#2
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies which to output to the check board for each axis.
0: Torque command
1: Estimated load torque
#6
#5
1958
#0
#4
TQO
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
EGB
1957
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
VFA
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
ABN
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies whether the estimated load torque output function is enabled
for each axis.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
When the excessive-load alarm function is used, the estimated load
torque output function must be enabled.
- 134 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
#5
1959
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
HNG
1980
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
1996
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
HNG
Parameter input
Bitaxis
Specifies whether to detect a separate detector disconnection alarm in
feedrate command mode under PMC axis control, as follows:
0: Separate detector disconnection alarm to be detected
1: Separate detector disconnection alarm not to be detected
Pre-load value for each axis (Tcmd offset)
Parameter input
Integeraxis
(Amplifier limit) /7282
-1821 - 1821
In the tandem control, this parameter is used to suppress the backlash.
The set value should be slightly bigger than the friction.
A typical value is the 1/3 of the rated torque.
Retract amount on detecting an irregular load
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 32767
If an abnormal load is detected, the direction of the motor rotation can
be reversed. This parameter sets the amount of reverse motor rotation.
When a specified feedrate is not higher than the feedrate listed below,
and so the motor turns at a low speed, the motor stops immediately
without reversing the motor rotation. This is to prevent the motor
from turning in the reverse direction excessively.
Let A be this parameter value. When the feedrate is higher than the
feedrate indicated below in the detection unit used, the motor turns in
the reverse direction by A from the point at which an abnormal load is
detected, then stops.
Detection unit
10
m
1
m
0.1
m
0.01 m
0.001 m
A/
A/
A/
A/
A/
Feedrate
0.8 mm/ min
8
mm/ min
80
mm/ min
800
mm/ min
8000
mm/ min
If this parameter is set to 0, the motor rotation will not reversed, but it
will stop immediately when an abnormal load is detected.
For details, refer to FANUC AC Servo Amplifier Maintenance
Manual.
- 135 -
1997
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Threshold value for the detection of an irregular load
Parameter input
Integeraxis
Unit of the torque command
From 0 through 7282 (7282 denotes the maximum available torque
from the motor)
The irregular load alarm is generated when the load for a servo axis
exceeds this value.
The set value should be bigger than the maximum value of the load
torque observed in the setting of the parameter TDO (no.1957#5) =1.
The set value 7282 corresponds 4.4V of the observed value.
1998
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Torque constant
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0.00001Nm/ (1 torque command)
1 - 32767
This parameter is set according to the torque character of the motor.
NOTE
In case of using linear motor, the data unit is
0.001N/(1 torque command).
#7
2603
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
SBL
#6
SBL
#5
#4
Parameter input
Bit axis
Smooth backlash compensation is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- 136 -
#3
#2
#1
#0
B-63330EN/03
4.12
DI/DO PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2000 AND LATER)

#7
#6
#5
2000
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
RSD
#1
RWM
#2
STJ
#3
STR
#4
OPS
#3
#2
#1
#0
OPS
STR
STJ
RWM
RSD
Parameter input
Bit
The resetting (RST) signal is output:
0: Whenever the system is reset.
1: Only when the reset button is pressed on the MDI panel.
The rewinding signal (RWD) :
0: Not output.
1: While the reset and rewind signal searches memory for the
beginning of a program.
The signal indicating that automatic operation is being activated
(STL) :
0: Not output during operation by manual numeric commands.
1: Output during operation by manual numeric commands.
Specifies whether the STL signal is output when programs are loaded
by the cycle start signal in the part program edit mode (see RDS in
parameter No. 2200) .
0: Not output
1: Output
Specifies whether the automatic operation in-process signal (OP) is
turned on when a sequence number is searched for.
0: Not turned on
1: Turned on
#7
#6
#5
2001
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#4
#3
PSO
MPN
#2
#1
#0
MOC
ENR
Parameter input
Bit
NOTE
effective.
#0
ENR
#1
MOC
At emergency stop:
0: The system is reset.
1: The system is not reset, but an alarm is raised. When the system
is reset, the emergency stop state is released.
If all the mode selection signals are turned off:
0: No mode is assumed.
1: The previously selected mode is assumed.
- 137 -
#3
MPN
#4
PSO
B-63330EN/03
Specifies whether the incremental feed is specified with the

incremental feed selection signals DIST0 to DIST26 or with the
manual handle feed selection signals MP1, MP2, and MP4.
0: Specified with the incremental feed selection signals DIST0 to
DIST26.
1: Specified with the manual handle feed selection signals MP1,
MP2, and PM4.
Specifies whether override signals OV1 to OV8, ROV1, and ROV2
use positive or negative logic.
0: Negative
1: Positive
This bit is valid only when the FS3 interface is used. Usually, set this
bit to 0. When the FS3 interface is selected, set POV to 1 if necessary.
#7
#6
#5
2002
[Input type]
[Data type]
#2
NGA
#4
BSC
MSN
#2
#1
#0
NGA
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether the timeout of the response from the PMC is
checked with the G10.1 command.
0: Checked
1: Not checked
This bit is used to debug the PMC program.
Specifies when to check the block start interlock signal (*BSL) if a
command for a single block performs multiple operations as in a
canned cycle.
0: At the start of the first cycle only.
1: At the start of each cycle.
#7
#0
#3
BSC
#6
#5
2003
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
BSN
TSN
SSN
MSN
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether a minus (-) can be used in an M code.
0: Cannot be used
1: Can be used
NOTE
To enable the use of a minus (-) in an M code, the
allowable number of digits in an M code must be
nine or less.
- 138 -
B-63330EN/03
#1
SSN
Specifies whether a minus (-) can be used in an S code.

0: Cannot be used
1: Can be used
NOTE
To enable the use of a minus (-) in an S code, the
allowable number of digits in an S code must be nine
or less.
#2
TSN
Specifies whether a minus (-) can be used in a T code.

0: Cannot be used
1: Can be used
NOTE
To enable the use of a minus (-) in a T code, the
allowable number of digits in an T code must be nine
or less.
#3
BSN
Specifies whether a minus (-) can be used in the specification of the

2nd auxiliary function.
0: Cannot be used
1: Can be used
NOTE
To enable the use of a minus (-) in the 2nd auxiliary
function, the allowable number of digits in the 2nd
auxiliary function must be nine or less.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
2004
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
MHI
MHI
Parameter input
Bit
The strobe and completion signals for the M, S, T, or B codes are
transmitted in the:
0: Normal system.
1: High-speed system.
#7
2005
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
DIT
#0
#6
#5
SKE
#4
D3A
#3
#2
#1
PDT
DIT
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to enable the all-axis/axis-by-axis interlock
function for the axes controlled by PMC axis control.
0: Enable the all-axis/axis-by-axis interlock function along axes
under PMC control.
1: Disable the all-axis-axis-by-axis interlock function along axes
under PMC control. (Movements along the axes are not
stopped.)
- 139 -
#2
PDT
#4
D3A
#7
SKE
B-63330EN/03
Specifies axis selection signals used for the simultaneous start

command for the PMC axis control function.
0: Use the FDxX15 to FDxX0 signals.
1: Use the DTxX31 to DTxX0 signals.
In three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode, axis movement
signals are:
0: Output to the program command axis.
1: Output to the axis of travel.
Specifies which skip signal is to be used for PMC axis control as
follows:
0: SKIP1 (same skip signal as that for the CNC)
1: PCSKP (signal specific to PMC axis control)
#7
#6
#5
2007
#1
[Input type]
[Data type]
EWN
#3
G5S
#4
CTR
2010
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
#4
#3
CTR
G5S
#2
#1
#0
EWN
Parameter input
Bit
When a search by workpiece number is made, a workpiece number is
specified by using:
0: Workpiece number search signals (WN1 to WN16)
(A number from 1 to 31 can be specified.)
1: Extended workpiece number search signals (EWN0 to EWN26)
(A number from 1 to 99999999 can be specified.)
In binary input operation mode, single-block stop is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
At power-on, the status of the toggle-type custom soft key function
signal (CTSF) immediately before the previous power-off is:
0: Not restored.
1: Restored.
Delay time of the MF, SF, TF, or BF strobe signal
Parameter input
Integer
msec
0 - 32767
Specify the time waited before the MF, SF, TF, or BF signal is sent
after the M, S, T, or B code is sent.
M, S, T, B code
MF, SF, TF, BF signal
Delay time
- 140 -
B-63330EN/03
2011
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Minimum width of the M, S, T, or B function completion (FIN) signal
Parameter input
Integer
msec
0 - 32767
Specify the minimum signal width at which the M, S, T, or B function
completion signal (FIN) is assumed to be valid.
M, S, T, B code
MF, SF, TF, BF signal
FIN signal
Shorter than
minimum signal
width, so ignored.
2012
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Longer than minimum

signal width, so
recognized.
Output time of the MF, SF, TF, or BF strobe signal
Parameter input
Integer
msec
0 - 32767
M, S, T, or B code
MF, SF, TF, or BF signal
Delay
2014
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Signal width
Time that mode unselected status is ignored
Parameter input
Integer
msec
From 0 through 2000
If parameter 2001 is specified to ignore the mode selection, when all
the mode selection signals are off (MOC in parameter 2001 = 0) , this
parameter enables the previously selected mode to be maintained for
the specified time that mode unselected status is ignored.
Normally, specify the time needed to ignore mode signal chatter.
- 141 -
2015
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
2016
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
2020
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Time that invalid mode selected status is ignored
Parameter input
Integer
msec
0 - 2000
If an invalid combination of mode signals is input, the previously
selected mode is maintained for the specified time that the invalid
mode selected status is ignored. After that, the mode unselected status
is specified.
Normally, specify the time needed to ignore mode signal chatter.
Manual feedrate override clamp value
Parameter input
Integer
0.01%
0 - 65534
This parameter specifies the value used to clamp the manual feedrate
override when an override value larger than the manual feedrate
override clamp value is input. This parameter is valid only when the
basic machine interface (BMI) is used.
Positive (+) direction command button on the software operators panel
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0-9
Specify the number of the numeric (arrow) key on the MDI panel
which instructs manual feed in the positive (+) direction on the
software operators panel for each axis. The setting of 5 cannot be
used because the numeric key 5 is fixed to the manual rapid traverse
switch.
This parameter can be used for the first to sixth axes. It is ignored for
the seventh and subsequent axes.
Specifying 0 means that the MDI panel does not have any numeric
key that instructs the positive (+) direction.
Example
If 6 is set for the 1st axis:
Numeric key 6 instructs the + direction of the 1st axis.
If 9 is set for the 2nd axis:
Numeric key 9 instructs the + direction of the 2nd axis.
If 8 is set for the 3rd axis:
Numeric key 8 instructs the + direction of the 3rd axis.
- 142 -
B-63330EN/03
2021
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Negative (-) direction command button on the software operators panel
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0-9
Specify the number of the numeric (arrow) key on the MDI panel
which instructs manual feed in the negative (-) direction on the
software operators panel for each axis. The setting of 5 cannot be
used because the numeric key 5 is fixed to the manual rapid traverse
switch.
This parameter can be used for the first to sixth axes. It is ignored for
the seventh and subsequent axes.
Specifying 0 means that the MDI panel does not have any numeric
key that instructs the negative (-) direction.
Example
If 4 is set for the 1st axis:
Numeric key 4 instructs the - direction of the 1st axis.
If 1 is set for the 2nd axis:
Numeric key 1 instructs the - direction of the 2nd axis.
If 2 is set for the 3rd axis:
Numeric key 2 instructs the - direction of the 3rd axis.
2030
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Allowable number of digits in an M code
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 10
Specify the allowable number of digits in an M code.
NOTE
To set the allowable number of digits in an M
code to 10, the use of a minus "-" in an M code
must be disabled.
2031
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Allowable number of digits in an S code
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 10
Specify the allowable number of digits in an S code.
NOTE
To set the allowable number of digits in an S
code to 10, the use of a minus "-" in an S code
must be disabled.
- 143 -
2032
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Allowable number of digits in a T code
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 10
Specify the allowable number of digits in a T code.
NOTE
To set the allowable number of digits in a T code
to 10, the use of a minus "-" in a T code must be
disabled.
2033
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Allowable number of digits in a B code (2nd auxiliary function)
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 10
Specify the allowable number of digits in a 2nd auxiliary function.
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed 3.
To enable the input of the decimal point, the number of decimal
places must be set for parameter No. 2428. In this case, the allowable
number of digits to be set for this parameter must include the number
of decimal places.
NOTE
To set the allowable number of digits in the 2nd
auxiliary function to 10, the use of a minus "-" in
the 2nd auxiliary function must be disabled.
2034
Type of auxiliary function to be used in binary input operation mode (remote

buffer)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0-3
Specify the type of auxiliary function to be used in binary input
operation mode.
0 : Second auxiliary function
1 : M function
2 : S function
3 : T function
- 144 -
B-63330EN/03
2049
Correspondence between a workpiece number and a program number in an

external workpiece number search (PN)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
2052
Parameter input
Integer
-1 - 999999
The meaning of the parameter varies depending on the value to be set
as follows:
(1) If bit 1 (EWN) of parameter No. 2007 is set to 0:
Let WN be the workpiece number specified by the workpiece
number search signal (WN1 to WN16) .
<1> If PN is 0 to 999999:
Program number = PN * 100 + WN
PN indicates the upper six digits of the program number.
<2> If PN is a negative value or a value exceeding 999999:
The upper six digits of the program number are set to the
smallest number among existing programs.
For example, when the workpiece number is 21, a program
with the smallest number is searched for among existing
programs having program numbers such as O00000021,
O00000121, and O00000221. Therefore, the upper six
digits of a program number cannot be specified. When this
method is used, programs with program numbers of which
lower two digits are the same must not be registered in
memory at the same time.
(2) This parameter is not used if bit 1 (EWN) of parameter No. 2007
is set to 1. In this case, the program number is assumed to equal
the workpiece number.
Rapid traverse rate for a drilling cycle in the three-dimensional coordinate
conversion mode
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
Specify the rapid traverse rate for a drilling cycle in the threedimensional coordinate conversion mode.
(1) Rapid traverse to point R
(2) Retraction to point R
(3) Rapid traverse to the initial point
When 0 is specified, a dry run feedrate is used. A cutting override is
applied to motions (1) to (3) because cutting-mode operation is
performed in the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode.
- 145 -
B-63330EN/03
2060
Area override for area 1 in automatic feedrate control by area
2061
2062
2063
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
%
0 to 127
The area overrides for areas 1 to 4 in automatic feedrate control by
area are set as percentages. If 0 is set for an area, the setting for the
area becomes invalid.
The area override is applied to the feedrate resulting from override of
a specified feedrate.
#7
#6
#5
2070
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
IH3
IH2
IH1
Parameter input
Bit
NOTE
effective.
#0
IH1
Specifies whether to use an I/O-Link-connected manual handle for the

first manual handle.
0: Not used. (An ordinary manual handle is used.)
1: Used.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to "1" and the power is
turned off and then on again, if the appropriate
address value is not set for parameter No. 2071, this
parameter is automatically set to "0" so that the I/OLink-connected manual handle cannot be used.
- 146 -
B-63330EN/03
#1
IH2

second manual handle.
1: Used.
NOTE
#2
IH3

third manual handle.
1: Used.
NOTE
2071
Address value of the first I/O-Link-connected manual handle
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 127
Specifies the address value (X address of the PMC) of the first I/OLink-connected manual handle.
NOTE
When an I/O-Link-connected manual handle is
specified for the first manual handle, but the
specified address value is not appropriate, this
parameter is automatically set to -1.
- 147 -
2072
B-63330EN/03
Address value of the second I/O-Link-connected manual handle
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 127
Specifies the address value (X address of the PMC) of the second I/OLink-connected manual handle.
NOTE
specified for the second manual handle, but the
2073
Address value of the third I/O-Link-connected manual handle
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 127
Specifies the address value (X address of the PMC) of the third I/OLink-connected manual handle.
NOTE
specified for the third manual handle, but the
#7
#6
#5
2080
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
SLV
#4
#3
PPE
PMN
#2
#1
#0
SLV
Setting input
Bit
Specifies whether to use multiple-slave displays (for up to four
slaves) in the Power Mate CNC manager function, as follows:
0: Do not use.
1: Use.
- 148 -
B-63330EN/03
#3
PMN
#4
PPE
2081
Specifies whether to enable the Power Mate CNC manager function,

as follows:
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
This parameter is set if it is necessary to give preference to ladderbased commands for each connected slave (to stop communication
with the Power Mate CNC manger function) after the data needed by
the slave has been set up or confirmed.
Specifies whether to enable parameter setting for the Power Mate
CNC manger function if parameter PWE (data number 8000) is set to
0, as follows:
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
Program number for which data is to be input or output (Power Mate CNC
manager)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Integer
0 - 99999999
This parameter specifies the program number for which the slave-side
data (parameter) is to be input or output using the Power Mate CNC
manager function.
A slave in I/O link group n uses the following program number: Set
value + n*10
If the set value is 0, it is impossible to input or output data
(parameter) .
(Do not specify a number that leads to a program number larger than
99999999.)
- 149 -
B-63330EN/03
2090
Axis name for Power Mate CNC manager function slave 1
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
65 - 90
These parameters specify the axis name of a slave for a position
display used by the Power Mate CNC manager function.
If the set value is 0, the axis name becomes 1.
- 150 -
B-63330EN/03
4.13
DISPLAY/MDI AND EDIT PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2200

AND LATER)
2200
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
RDL
#1
REP
#2
RAL
#3
NPE
#4
NM9
#6
PAL
#7
RDS
#7
#6
RDS
PAL
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
NM9
NPE
RAL
REP
RDL
Parameter input
Bit
When all programs are loaded simultaneously in the foreground
(including external I/O device control) :
0: All the programs are loaded after previously loaded programs.
1: Previously loaded programs are deleted first, then all the
programs are loaded. Edition-prohibited programs, however, are
not deleted.
If an attempt is made to load a program whose program number is the
same as that of a previously loaded program:
0: An alarm occurs.
1: The previously loaded program is deleted first, then the
attempted program is loaded. Edition-prohibited programs,
however, are not deleted. In this case, an alarm occurs.
Specifies whether a single program or all programs are loaded under
external I/O device control (during both foreground and background
editions) or by a cycle start signal.
0: Single program
1: All programs
While a program is loaded, M02, M30, or M99 is:
0: Assumed to be a program end.
1: Not assumed to be a program end. In this case, the first block of
the program must contain the program number.
While a program is loaded, M99 is:
0: Assumed to be a program end.
1: Not assumed to be a program end.
The setting of this parameter is valid only when NPE = 0. Namely, to
specify the parameter so that not M99, but M02 or M30 is assumed to
be a program end during program loading, set NPE to 0 and NM9 to
1.
Specifies whether a single program or all programs are punched under
external I/O device control (only during foreground edition) .
0: Single program
1: All programs
Specifies whether loading programs by a cycle start signal is valid.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
This parameter is used to load programs externally, such as from the
PMC or similar devices.
- 151 -
2201
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
NE9
#1
ND9
#2
SB9
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
NCO
EDT
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
SB9
ND9
NE9
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether editing programs 09000 to 09999 is prohibited.
0: Not prohibited
1: Prohibited
Specifies whether programs 09000 to 09999 are displayed while they
are executed.
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
Specifies whether a single block stop is valid for the macro statements
of programs 09000 to 09999.
0: Not valid
1: Valid
NOTE
Specify 1 when you want to check programs 09000 to
09999 containing custom macro statements.
#6
EDT
Specifies whether program edition is enabled when the mode selector

is set to the MEMORY position.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NOTE
1 When 1 is specified
After the program is stopped in the MEMORY mode
with the single block or feed hold function, the mode is
changed to the EDIT mode, enabling the program to
be edited.
Editing while the main program is run
- Exactly the same as the normal edit function
Editing while the subprogram is run
- The program can be edited only in units of word.
- The programs called in the TAP or MDI mode
cannot be edited.
- Only the program can be edited.
2 When this parameter is changed, the power must be
turned off, then turned on again.
3 Before restarting the operation in the MEMORY mode,
be sure to return the cursor to the original position.
#7
NCO
Specifies whether the memory for the selected program is

automatically arranged when background editing is completed.
0: Arranged
1: Not arranged
- 152 -
B-63330EN/03
2202
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
D10
#1
DSE
#2
DTL
#3
DCR
#4
DES
#5
DEV
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
DVM
DSM
DEV
DES
DCR
DTL
DSE
D10
Parameter input
Bit
The position data (excluding the machine position) is displayed on the
CRT
0: In least input increments.
1: In the unit obtained by multiplying the least increment unit by
10.
Specifies whether the coordinate system of the incremental positions
displayed on the CRT is specified.
0: Not specified
1: Specified
Setting 1 (specified) refers to the following:
(i) Manual reference position return
(ii) Specification of the coordinate system with G92 (G50 for Gcode system A for the lathe system)
(iii) When G92.1 (G50.3 for G-code system A for the lathe system) ,
which presets the workpiece coordinate system, sets the absolute
positions displayed on the CRT, the displayed incremental
positions are also set to the same values as the displayed absolute
positions.
Specifies whether the incremental and absolute positions displayed on
the CRT include the distance traveled by tool length
compensation/tool length compensation in tool axis direction.
0: The positions include the distance traveled.
1: The positions do not include the distance traveled. (The
positions specified by the program are displayed.)
When using three-dimensional coordinate conversion, set this bit to 1.
the CRT include the distance traveled by cutter compensation.
0: The positions include the distance traveled.
1: The positions do not include the distance traveled. (The
positions specified by the program are displayed.)
When using three-dimensional coordinate conversion, set this bit to 1.
the CRT include the acceleration/declaration control delay.
0: The positions do not include the acceleration/deceleration
control delay.
1: The positions include the acceleration/deceleration control
delay.
the CRT include the servo delay(position deviation) .
0: The positions do not include the servo delay(position deviation) .
1: The positions include the servo delay(position deviation) .
- 153 -
#6
DSM
#7
DVM
Specifies whether the machine positions displayed on the CRT

include the acceleration/deceleration control delay.
0: The positions do not include the acceleration/deceleration
control delay.
1: The positions include the acceleration/deceleration control
delay.
Specifies whether the machine positions displayed on the CRT
include the servo delay (positional deviation) .
0: The positions displayed on the CRT do not include the servo
delay (positional deviation) .
1: The positions displayed on the CRT include the servo delay
(positional deviation) .
#7
2203
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
MCN
#4
TLN
#7
NNO
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
NNO
NOS
#2
#1
#0
MCN
The machine positions are displayed on the CRT:

0: In millimeters for a millimeter machine or in inches for an inch
machine irrespective of the unit of data.
1: In millimeters for metric input or in inches for inch input.
T codes displayed on the program check screen and T codes that can
be read with system variables indicate
0: Pot numbers
1: Tool numbers
When operator messages are set by external data input/output,
messages set with different numbers are:
0: Line-fed.
1: Not line-fed.
#6
#5
2204
#0
#3
Parameter input
Bit
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
TLN
#4
#3
#2
DAK
#1
#0
NOS
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether the actual spindle speed is displayed.
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
The actual spindle speed is displayed based on the feedback by the
position coder installed in the spindle. For serial spindles, the actual
spindle speed can be displayed based on the speed monitor data from
the spindle motor, depending on the setting of ASD (bit 4 of
parameter No. 5820) .
Specify 1 for the machine without the position coder because the
machine does not require threading and feed each rotation or if you do
not want to display the actual spindle speed.
- 154 -
B-63330EN/03
#2
DAK
2205
Specifies whether to display coordinates in the program coordinate

system or workpiece coordinate system as absolute coordinates when
the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is set.
0: Display coordinates in the program coordinate system.
1: Display coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
SPA
ITA
FRE
GER
JPN
ENG
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
#1
#0
2206
[Input type]
[Data type]
SWE
Parameter input
Bit
Set the display language according to the following table:
Display language SWE
English
Japanese
German
French
Italian
Spanish
Swedish
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
SPA
ITA
FRE
GER
JPN
ENG
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
When a language other than English and Japanese is specified, the

option for changing the display language is required.
NOTE
1 When all the bits are set to 0, English is used as the
display language.
2 When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
2207
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
GST
#6
GTR
#7
GTL
#7
#6
GTL
GTR
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
GST
Parameter input
Bit
While background drawing is executed, a non-graphic G code is used
to:
0: Continue the drawing.
1: Stop the drawing.
Specifies whether cutter compensation is enabled while background
drawing is executed.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Specifies whether tool length compensation is enabled while
background drawing is executed.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
- 155 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
2208
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
DMK
#4
D3T
#5
D3D
#5
#4
D3D
D3T
#3
BGM
Specifies whether the manual overlap screen is displayed with the

program coordinate system or workpiece coordinate system.
0: Program coordinate system (coordinate system after conversion)
1: Workpiece coordinate system (coordinate system before
conversion)
From the values in the current position display, the tool length
compensation along the tool axis is
0: Not subtracted.
1: Subtracted.
For three-dimensional coordinate conversion, the remaining distance
the tool must be moved is displayed
0: About the program coordinate system.
1: About the workpiece coordinate system.
#6
#5
#4
#3
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit
The coordinates used in background drawing are:
0: Absolute coordinates
1: Machine coordinates
Password (PSW)
Locked parameter
Integer
0 - 99999999
Specify a password (PSW) . When a value other than 0 is specified,
the password is assumed. When the password is specified, the display
of this parameter becomes blank, and program edition is locked. This
parameter can be specified when password (PSW) = 0, i.e., the key is
in a normal state or when password (PSW) = key (KEY) , i.e., the key
is unlocked.
2211
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
#2
BGM
2210
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
#0
DMK
2209
#2
#1
Parameter input
Bit
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#2
Key (KEY)
Locked parameter
Integer
0 - 99999999
Specifying the same value as the setting of PSW unlocks the key.
The specified value is not displayed.
When the power is turned on, this parameter is automatically
initialized to 0. If, therefore, the power is turned off with the key
- 156 -
B-63330EN/03
unlocked, and then turned on again, the key is automatically

unlocked.
2212
Minimum value for the program protection range (PMIN)
2213
Maximum value for the program protection range (PMAX)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Locked parameter
Integer
0 - 99999999
Programs in the range specified by these parameters can be protected.
Specify the range of program numbers to be protected.
PMAX must be greater than PMIN.
The range can be specified when password (PSW) = 0, i.e., the key is
in a normal state or when password (PSW) = key (KEY) , i.e., the key
is unlocked.
[Example]
Parameter No.2212 = 70000000
Parameter No.2213 = 84999999
Under the above conditions, programs O70000000 to O84999999 are
protected.
When PMIN is set to 0, it is regarded to be 9000. When PMAX is set
to 0, it is regarded to be 9999. Thus, with the default settings of these
parameters, programs 09000 to 09999 are protected.
NOTE
1 Parameters Nos. 2210 to 2213 are not punched or
read.
2 Parameters Nos. 2210 to 2213 are not cleared even if
a parameter file clear operation is performed at IPL
time.
3 The password (PSW) and the key (KEY) are not
displayed.
When the password (PSW) is set to 0, however, 0 is
displayed for parameter 2210 to indicate that the key
is in a normal state.
4 In setting the password (PSW) and the key (KEY),
[+INPUT] is equivalent to [INPUT]. For example,
when the key (KEY) is set to 99, entering 1 and
pressing [+INPUT] causes 1 to be set.
- 157 -
#7
2214
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
3HN
#7
APL
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
NOM
#4
GDM
2218
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
RVS
#6
NIS
#2
#1
#0
3HN
Specifies whether to update the amount of manual interrupt during

three-dimensional handle interrupt mode.
0: Updated.
1: Not updated.
Specifies whether to preset the relative position indicator
automatically when the manual feed-based active offset change mode
is selected, as follows:
0: Do not preset.
1: Preset.
This bit is used to restore the previous value of an offset when it has
been changed in the Changing Active Offset Value with Manual
Move mode. Making axis movement by manual feed in such a way
that the relative position indicator (counter) becomes 0 can restore the
previous value of the offset.
#6
#5
2217
#2
#3
Parameter input
Bitaxis
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
APL
#4
#3
GDM
#2
#1
#0
NOM
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to automatically switch to the operator message
screen if an operator message is set with external data input/output or
custom macro system variable #3006.
0: Switched.
1: Not switched.
Specifies whether to perform tool path drawing at the tool position in
the machine coordinate system.
0: Not performed. (Performed in the workpiece coordinate system.)
1: Performed.
#7
#6
ODR
NIS
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RVS
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to enable display in reverse video for a
monochrome LCD.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Specifies the insertion position assumed when INSERT editing is
performed on the program text screen.
0: Inserted after the cursor position.
1: Inserted before the cursor position.
- 158 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
ODR
Specifies the units of the program sizes on the program directory

screen.
0: KB units.
1: Page units. (The page refers to the management unit within the
CNC.)
#7
#6
#5
2219
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
TPC
#3
MLC
2221
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
#4
#3
#2
#1
MLC
TPC
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to display the touch panel compensation screen.
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
Usually, set this bit to 0. Touch panel compensation is required only
when a new panel is installed, when the existing panel is replaced, or
when memory is all cleared. Set the bit to 1 only when touch panel
compensation is to be performed. After the end of compensation, set it
to 0.
At power on, the 2-LCD-unit connection function selects:
0: the LCD unit specified for parameter No.2221.
1: the LCD unit selected before the power was disconnected.
Number of the LCD unit to be selected at power on
Parameter input
Integer
0 and 1
Enter the number of the first LCD unit to be selected at power on
using the 2-LCD-unit connection function.
Entering 0 causes LCD unit 1 to be selected. Entering 1 causes LCD
unit 2 to be selected.
If a number larger than the number of mounted LCD units is entered,
the last LCD unit will be selected.
2231
Axis number on the load meter for the first servo axis
2232
Axis number on the load meter for the second servo axis
2233
Axis number on the load meter for the third servo axis
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
#0
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
Specify the axis number to be displayed on the load meter for the
servo axis.
- 159 -
2234
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Rated load to be displayed on the load meter of the 1st analog spindle motor
Parameter input
Integer
From 0 through 128
Specify the rated load of the motor corresponding to the load meter.
Example) When the load meter is at 100% and the input to the AD
converter is 6 [V],
Set 128 x 6 [V]/10 [V] = 77.
2238
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Program check screen position display type
Setting input
Integer
0-2
Specify the type of the current position display on the program check
screen.
Setting
0
1
2
Position display type

Relative position display
Absolute position display
Machine position display
The current position display type can be changed using the

appropriate soft key on the program check screen. When the type is
changed using the soft key, this parameter is automatically changed.
2239
Percentage at which a life warning is displayed on the periodic maintenance

screen
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
%
0 99
If, on the periodic maintenance screen, the remaining time reaches the
specified percentage of the lifetime, the item names and the remaining
time are displayed red to give a warning.
- 160 -
B-63330EN/03
2240
[Input type]
[Data type]
#6
NDO
#7
HDC
#7
#6
HDC
NDO
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies the processing performed by screen hard copy function
when the shift key is pressed or when the hard copy execution request
signal is issued, as follows:
0: Screen data is obtained, and immediately output to the memory
card.
1: Only screen data is obtained, but data is output from the memory
card screen.
The obtained screen data is saved to memory in the CNC. Even if this
parameter is set to 0, therefore, the most recently obtained screen data
can be output from the memory card screen.
Specifies whether to enable the screen hard copy function, as follows:
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
2246
Operating time display type 1 on the program check screen
2247
Operating time display type 2 on the program check screen
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
#0
Setting input
Integer
05
Specify the types of the operating time displayed on two lines on the
program check screen.
Setting
1
2
3
4
5
Operating time display type

Automatic operation time
Cutting time
Cycle time
General-purpose timer time
Number of machined parts
When 0 is set, the automatic operation time is displayed on the first

line, while the cycle time is displayed on the second line.
- 161 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
2248
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
SRV
Setting input
Bit
NOTE
effective.
#0
SRV
2249
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
If the display unit is monochrome (with graphic display capabilities),

the cursor and the title characters on operation screens are displayed:
0 : In a normal way. (Characters are displayed black.)
1 : In reverse video. (Characters are displayed white.)
Cursor/title line background color brightness
Setting input
Integer
0-8
specify the brightness of the background color of the cursor and titles.
If 0 is entered, the standard brightness of the system is assumed.
2250
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Background color brightness
Setting input
Integer
0-8
specify the brightness of the background on the screen.
If 0 is entered, the standard brightness of the system is assumed.
2274
Number of the program to start background drawing
2275
Number of the sequence to start background drawing
2276
Number of the program to end background drawing
2277
Number of the sequence to end background drawing
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 99999999
To draw only part of a program, specify drawing start and end blocks
with the program number and sequence number. When the above
- 162 -
B-63330EN/03
parameters are set to 0, the function is ignored, and the whole

program is drawn. Normally, specify 0.
NOTE
Blocks Oxxxxxxxx and Nxxxxxxxx, which correspond
respectively to the program and sequence numbers to
be specified in the above parameters, must be single
blocks or contain NC statements. If a subprogram,
macro program, or command for calling a macro
program is specified for the block, the block is
ignored.
2278
Background drawing program number
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
2286
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
JSP
#3
MDC
#5
PDS
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 99999999
Specify the number of the desired drawing program. Press the HEAD
soft key to move the drawing program pointer to the head of the
program number specified by this parameter.
#7
#6
#5
NDP
JIS
PDS
#4
#3
MDC
#2
#1
#0
JSP
Parameter input
Bit
Display the following on the overall position display screen or the
program check screen.
In manual operation mode:
Jog feed rate (X-axis) with any override included.
Automatic operation mode:
Dry run speed with any override included.
0: Does not display the jog feed rate or dry run speed.
1: Displays the jog feed rate or dry run speed.
Specifies whether to allow erasing of all maintenance information.
0: Not allowed.
1: Allowed.
Specifies whether to display the status when a life warning is issued
for data registered on the periodic maintenance screen.
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
- 163 -
#6
JIS
B-63330EN/03
Specifies whether to output the kanji/hiragana characters of item

names as FANUC or JIS codes on the periodic maintenance screen.
0: FANUC codes.
1: JIS codes.
NOTE
When data is already registered and the data
contains kanji/hiragana characters, characters are
not displayed correctly if this bit is changed.
To solve this problem, the data must be reregistered.
#7
NDP
2311
Specifies whether to display the periodic maintenance screen.

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
Name of the general-purpose switch 1 on the software operators panel (first
character)
2312
Name of the general-purpose switch 1 on the software operators panel

(second character)
2313
Name of the general-purpose switch 1 on the software operators panel (third

character)
2314

(fourth character)
2315
Name of the general-purpose switch 1 on the software operators panel (fifth

character)
2316

(sixth character)
2317

(seventh character)
2318

(eighth character)
2321

character)
2322

(second character)
2323

character)
- 164 -
B-63330EN/03
2324

(fourth character)
2325

character)
2326
N Name of the general-purpose switch 2 on the software operators panel

(sixth character)
2327

(seventh character)
2328

(eighth character)
2331

character)
2332

(second character)
2333

character)
2334

(fourth character)
2335

character)
2336

(sixth character)
2337

(seventh character)
2338

(eighth character)
2341

character)
2342

(second character)
- 165 -
2343
B-63330EN/03

character)
2344

(fourth character)
2345

character)
2346

(sixth character)
2347

(seventh character)
2348

(eighth character)
2351

character)
2352

(second character)
2353

character)
2354

(fourth character)
2355

character)
2356

(sixth character)
2357

(seventh character)
2358

(eighth character)
2361

character)
- 166 -
B-63330EN/03
2362

(second character)
2363

character)
2364

(fourth character)
2365

character)
2366

(sixth character)
2367

(seventh character)
2368

(eighth character)
2371

character)
2372

(second character)
2373

character)
2374

(fourth character)
2375

character)
2376

(sixth character)
2377

(seventh character)
2378

(eighth character)
- 167 -
2381
B-63330EN/03

character)
2382

(second character)
2383

character)
2384

(fourth character)
2385

character)
2386

(sixth character)
2387

(seventh character)
2388

(eighth character)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
-128 - 127
Specify the names of the general-purpose switches on the software
operators panel, using the character-to-code correspondence table
(attached) . The name of a switch can be up to eight characters.
Parameter numbers 2311 to 2318: Name of general-purpose switch 1
- 168 -
B-63330EN/03
4.14
PROGRAM PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2400 AND LATER)

#7
#6
2400
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
DPI
#1
F41
#5
#4
DWL
M30
#3
#2
#1
#0
G70
F41
DPI
Parameter input
Bit
If the decimal point is omitted in an address in which the decimal
point can be used:
0: The least input increment is assumed. (Ordinary decimal point
input)
1: The mm, inch, degree, and sec units are assumed. (Fixed
decimal point input)
If the feed per minute of F code (G94 mode) is entered in metric
without the decimal point, the unit is:
0: 1 mm/min
1: 0.1 mm/min
If it is entered with the decimal point, the unit is always mm/min.
NOTE
It is not effective if the increment system is IS-A.
#2
G70
#4
M30
#5
DWL
2401
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
G01
#1
G90
Inch input and metric input are specified as shown below:

0: G20 (inch input) and G21 (metric input)
1: G70 (inch input) and G71 (metric input)
If M30 is entered in memory operation:
0: Only M30 is sent to the machine, and the program head is
searched for by the reset and rewind signal (RRW) .
1: If M30 is sent to the machine, the program head is automatically
searched for at the same time. Therefore, when completion
signal FIN for M30 is returned before reset or reset and rewind,
the program is reexecuted from the beginning.
Dwell (G04) is:
0: Always dwell in seconds
1: Dwell in seconds in case of feed per minute mode (G94) or
dwell in revolutions in case of feed per revolution mode (G95)
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
NCM
MBF
G18
G95
G44
G43
G90
G01
Parameter input
Bit
Mode at power on and in clear status
0: G00 mode (positioning)
1: G01 mode (linear interpolation)
0: G91 mode (incremental command)
1: G90 mode (absolute command)
- 169 -
#2
#3
G43
G44
#4
G95
#5
G18
#6
MBF
B-63330EN/03
G43 and G44 set G43, G44, or G49 mode to be entered when power is
turned on and when clear operation is performed (for M series only) .
G43
G44
G43, G44, or G49 mode
0
0
1
0
1
0
G49 mode
G44 mode
G43 mode

0: G94 mode (feed per minute)
1: G95 mode (feed per revolution)
0: G17 mode
1: G18 mode
Selects or cancels the multibuffer mode at power on and in the clear
state.
0: Cancels the multibuffer mode.
1: Selects the multibuffer mode. (When the optional multibuffer
15-block/100-block function is not provided, five buffer blocks
are used for the look-ahead operation.)
When the multibuffer mode is selected, acceleration/deceleration
before look-ahead interpolation is enabled at the same time.
If the fine HPCC option is provided, fine HPCC mode is enabled at
the same time.
NOTE
This parameter becomes valid when the system is
reset.
#7
NCM
Specifies whether the following modal information is cleared by

reset:
0: Cleared
1: Not cleared but saved.
G00 to G03 (except G06.2) , G17 to G19, G17.1, G93 to G95, G96 to
G97, G90 to G91, F codes, S codes, and T codes
#7
2402
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
INO
#6
#5
SMX
#4
PRN
#3
#2
#1
ZNP
INO
#0
Parameter input
Bit
After manual intervention by manual absolute on, INC specifies
whether the travel command path for absolute (G90) and for
incremental (G91) are the same.
0: Same (path for absolute)
1: Different
- 170 -
B-63330EN/03
NOTE
This parameter is no longer effective. Regardless
of whether this parameter is set to 0 or 1, the travel
command paths for absolute (G90) and for
incremental (G91) are different after manual
intervention by manual absolute on.
If the travel command paths for absolute (G90) and
for incremental (G91) must be the same, set ABS (bit
3 of parameter No. 2409).
See the item for ABS (bit 3 of parameter No. 2409).
#2
ZNP
When the manual reference position return is completed, the work

coordinate system is:
0: Preset only under the reset condition (OP signal is OFF) .
1: Always preset.
NOTE
If this bit is set to 1, all axes are always preset
regardless of the setting of bit 3 (PLZx) of parameter
No. 1005.
#4
PRN
#6
SMX
With a linear scale having reference marks and with a reference

position return without dogs, during a manual reference position
return after origin establishment, the presetting of the coordinate
system:
0: Is always performed.
1: May or may not be performed depending on bit 3 (PLZ) of
parameter No. 1005, bit 2 (ZNP) of No. 2402, and bit 1 (NOZ) of
No. 2403.
S code instructed in the same block as G92 (a coordinate system
setting) is:
0: The maximum spindle speed command is assumed.
1: The maximum spindle speed command is not assumed.
(Spindle speed command is assumed.)
#7
#6
#5
2403
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
M02
PCM
#4
#3
ENS
#2
#1
#0
NOZ
M02
Parameter input
Bit
When M02 is transmitted during memory operation
0: M02 is only sent to the machine, and reset and rewind signal
(RRW) is used for program heading.
1: M02 is sent out to the machine, and a program heading is
automatically executed. Consequently, when completion signal
FIN for M02 is returned without reset or reset and rewind, the
program is restarted from the beginning.
- 171 -
#1
B-63330EN/03
NOZ
0:
#3
ENS
#5
PCM
When the manual reference position is returned, whether the

coordinate system is preset depends on parameter No. 1005
PLZx or 2402 ZNP.
1: The coordinate system is always not preset when the manual
reference position is returned in all axes. (Except for the first
manual reference position return after power on)
When a blank code (not a punched hole) of EIA code was
commanded in the significant information section:
0: It shall be an alarm.
1: It shall be ignored.
Counting the total number of machined parts and the number of
machined parts is specified by:
0: M02, M30, or M code set by parameter No. 2426
1: Only M code set by parameter No. 2426
#7
#6
#5
2404
[Input type]
[Data type]
#5
SFL
2405
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
SNM
#5
NPA
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
SFL
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to specify a program number or file number for the
address P format in an external device subprogram call.
0: Specify a program number.
1: Specify a file number.
#7
#6
#5
RSO
FPR
NPA
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
SNM
Parameter input
Bit
At reset and power on, G43.9 mode and the compensation vector are:
0: Cleared.
1: Not cleared.
When movement along the PMC control axis is specified by an NC
program:
0: The alarm PS0450 occurs.
1: The alarm PS0450 does not occur.
NOTE
If 1 is selected, the CNC move command is ignored.
#6
FPR
Specifies whether the function for feed per rotation without a position
coder (the function for converting feed-per-rotation F into feed-perminute F) is used in the feed-per-rotation mode (G95) .
0: Not used.
1: Used.
- 172 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
RSO
Specifies whether spindle override is enabled when the function for

feed-per-rotation without a position coder (the function for converting
feed-per-rotation F into feed-per-minute F) is being used in the feedper-rotation mode (G95) .
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
2407
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
PLE
PLE
Parameter input
Bit
Whether plane conversion is performed for a G92 or G92.1 command
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#7
2409
[Input type]
[Data type]
#2
O52
#0
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
KWZ
K43
G26
ABS
O52
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether the G52 command suppresses buffering.
0: Suppressed.
1: Not suppressed.
NOTE
If G52 is specified so that it does not suppress
buffering, the first move command since the
G52 command must be specified as absolute.
#3
ABS
#4
G26
#5
K43
#6
KWZ
After manual intervention by manual absolute on, this bit specifies

whether the travel command path for absolute (G90) and for
incremental (G91) are the same.
0: Different
1: Same (path for absolute)
Specifies whether G25 or G26 mode is selected when the power is
switched on, or in a cleared condition, as follows:
0: G25 mode (spindle speed fluctuation detection disabled)
1: G26 mode (spindle speed fluctuation detection enabled)
Specifies whether to clear the tool length compensation vector, G43
to G49 in the modal G code group, and H codes when the system is
reset.
0: Cleared.
Specifies whether to clear G54 to G59 in the modal G code group
when the system is reset.
0: Cleared. (Initialized to G54.)
When fixture offset is used, whether to clear fixture offset mode when
the system is reset depends on the setting of this parameter.
- 173 -
B-63330EN/03
2410
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Arc radius error limit value
Setting input
Real
0 - 999999999
Specify a valid limit value as the difference between the radius value
at the start and end points for circular interpolation command.
Standard setting: 20
2411
M code 1 which does not put the following block in the buffer register
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 999999999
Specify M codes that do not put the following block in the buffer
register. If there is an M code whose next block should not be put in
the buffer register until the M function processing terminates in the
machine specify these M codes.
M00, M01, M02, and M30 are treated as M codes that do not put the
following block in the buffer register even though these parameters
are not specified for them. M98, M99, M codes set for parameters
Nos. 7071 to 7089, and those defined by parameters Nos. 7096, 7098,
7099, and 7010 are treated as M codes that put the following block in
the buffer register even though these parameters are specified for
them.
- 174 -
B-63330EN/03
2426
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
2428
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
M code for counting up the number of parts
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 999999999
Specifies the M code for counting up the number of parts. To specify
no code, set 0. (Counting up is not performed with M00.) M98 and
M99 cannot be used for counting up. (If they are set, they are
ignored and counting up is not performed.)
Number of decimal places of the 2nd auxiliary function (B)
Parameter input
Integer
0-8
Set the number of decimal places of the 2nd auxiliary function.
If 0 is set, the decimal point cannot be input.
2429
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
2431
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
M code for tool replacement
Parameter input
Integer
From 0 through 99999999 (excluding 01, 02, 30, 98, 99 and calling M
code)
Set the M code for a tool replacement command in tool life
management and in tool offset by the tool number. If 0 is set, is
regarded as 6 (M06) .
M code to execute external device subprogram calls
Setting input
Integer
0 - 99999999
Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When 0
is set, M198 is used. M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be used
to execute external device subprogram calls. When a negative number,
1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198 is used to execute
external device subprogram calls.
- 175 -
2440
B-63330EN/03
Minimum radius to which a specified feedrate is kept in spiral interpolation

or conical interpolation
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
(In case of IS-B, from 1.0 through 999999.999 for mm input and
from 1.0 through 99999.9999 for inch input)
If this parameter is set to 0 or out of range, it is assumed that the
minimum value in the data range is specified. In spiral interpolation
and conical interpolation, the feedrate is usually kept constant. When
the radius of a spiral becomes small near the center of the spiral,
however, the corresponding angular velocity may become very high.
To prevent this from occurring, the system keeps the angular velocity
constant when the radius of a spiral reaches the value specified in this
parameter, resulting in a lower velocity than before.
2450
Range of M codes without buffering (1)
(lower limit)
2451
(upper limit)
2452
(lower limit)
2453
(upper limit)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
3 99999999
Specify the upper and lower limits of M codes without buffering. If
the specified upper and lower limits are found to be incompatible, the
entered parameters are invalidated.
Example)
To specify M10 to M19 and M90000000 to M99999999 as M codes
without buffering, specify the following:
No. 2451 = 10
No. 2452 = 19
No. 2453 = 90000000
No. 2454 = 99999999
NOTE
M00, M01, M02, and M30 are treated as M codes
without buffering even if they are not contained in the
parameter limits. M98, M99, the M codes set for
parameters Nos. 7071 to 7089, and those defined by
parameters Nos. 7096, 7098, 7099, and 7101 are not
treated as M codes without buffering even if they are
contained in the parameter limits.
- 176 -
B-63330EN/03
2454
Range of 2nd auxiliary function codes without buffering (1)
(lower limit)
2455
(upper limit)
2456
(lower limit)
2457
(lower limit)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
2458
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
M16
#5
MZE
#6
MER
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 99999999
Specify the upper and lower limits of 2nd auxiliary function codes
without buffering. If the specified upper and lower limits are found to
be incompatible, the entered parameters are invalidated.
#7
#6
#5
MCL
MER
MZE
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
M16
Parameter input
Bit
MDI operation is:
0: For the FS15 type.
1: For the FS16 type.
After the start of MDI operation, program editing during operation is:
0: Not inhibited.
1: Inhibited.
This setting is valid only when bit 0 (M16) of parameter No. (2458) is
set to 1.
In single-block operation mode in MDI, when the last block of a
program has been executed, the executed program is:
0: Not erased.
1: Erased.
This setting is valid only when bit 0 (M16) of parameter No. 2458 is
set to 1.
NOTE
Even when this bit is set so that program erasure is
not performed, a program is erased if it is executed
with "%" (end of record) read. ("%" is inserted
automatically at the end of a program.)
#7
MCL
When a reset is made, a program created in MDI mode is:

0: Not erased.
The cursor is placed at the end of the program after reset.
1: Erased.
This setting is valid only when bit 0 (M16) of parameter No. 2458 is
1.
- 177 -
2510
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
2511
B-63330EN/03
Involute interpolation allowable error limit
Parameter input
Real
parameter setting table (B))
The involute interpolation command is used to specify the limit value
allowed as a shift between the involute curve passing through the start
point and the involute curve passing through the end point.
A negative value is compared as its absolute value.
Permissible difference between the positions of the specified end point and
the end point calculated from the increment or decrement and number of
circles in spiral or conical interpolation
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
2524
Parameter input
Realaxis
0 - 999999999
Specify the maximum permissible difference (absolute value)
between the positions of the specified end pint and the end point
calculated from the increment or decrement and number of circles in
spiral or conical interpolation.
Radius of virtual circle for feedrate specification on virtual circle for rotation
axis
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real number axis
The increment system of the axis is followed.
0 or a positive 9-digit least input increment (See Standard Parameter
Setting Table (B).)
(0.0 to +999999.999 for IS-B)
Set the radius of a virtual circle when using the method of feedrate
specification on a virtual circle for a rotation axis.
When 0.0 is specified for a rotation axis, the rotation axis is excluded
from feedrate calculation.
- 178 -
B-63330EN/03
2590
First character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode
2591
Second character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode
2592
Third character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode
2593
Fourth character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode
2594
Fifth character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode
2595
Sixth character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode
2596
Seventh character to be made to blink in G05.1 Q1 mode
NOTE
To enable changes made to these parameters, turn
the power off and on again.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 to 95
Specify the first to seventh characters that should blink in G05.1 Q1
mode (acceleration/deceleration mode before look-ahead interpolation
and fine HPCC mode) using ASCII codes in decimal format.
If all the parameters are reset to 0, the character string "HPCC"
blinks.
Any code No. from 032 to 095 in the "Character versus Code Table"
can be specified in these parameters.
- 179 -
4.15
B-63330EN/03

FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 3000 AND LATER)
A detailed description of parameters between 3000 and 3999 is
omitted.
See FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series PARAMETER
MANUAL (B-65160E) for details.
- 180 -
B-63330EN/03
4.16

FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 3000 AND LATER)
4601
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Output format of files
Parameter input
Integer
0-1
Specify the format to use when the data obtained by tracing with the
waveform diagnosis function is to be output to an external
input/output device.
0: FS15i format
1: FS15B format (old format)
4602
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Servo alarm trigger
Parameter input
Integer
0-1
If the trace condition is either type 2 or 3, specify whether the
occurrence of a servo alarm should be considered a trigger event.
0: The occurrence of a servo alarm is considered a trigger event.
1: The occurrence of a servo alarm is not considered a trigger event.
4603
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Machine signal trigger
Parameter input
Integer
0-3
If the trace condition is either type 2 or 3, specify whether a machine
signal should be considered a trigger event.
0: An on machine signal is considered a trigger event.
1: An off machine signal is considered a trigger event.
2: A machine signal change is considered a trigger event.
3: A machine signal is not considered a trigger event.
4604
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Trace time
Parameter input
Integer
msec
10 - 80000
Specify the time in which data is to be traced.
- 181 -
B-63330EN/03
4606
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
4607
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Trace condition
Parameter input
Integer
0-2
Set a trace condition.
0: Type 1 - Data within a specified time immediately after [Trace]
is pressed is acquired.
1: Type 2 - Data within a specified time immediately after the
occurrence of an event is acquired after [Trace] is pressed.
2: Type 3 - Data within a specified time immediately before the
occurrence of an event is acquired after [Trace] is pressed.
Machine signal trigger (address)
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 49997
Specify the machine signal to be considered a trigger event.
Number of ten thousands: Signal type (1: G, 2: F, 3: X, and 4: Y)
Number of thousands, number of hundreds, and number of tens:
Signal address
Number of units: Bit number
[Example] 10043 = G4.3(SBK)
4608
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
4610
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Delay time
Parameter input
Integer
msec
0 - 160000
If the trace condition is type 3, specify the time by which the end of a
trace after the occurrence of an event is to be delayed.
Horizontal axis graduation unit
Parameter input
Integer
msec
25 - 800
Specify the value equivalent to one graduation on the horizontal axis
(time axis).
4611
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Axis number 1
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 24
Specify the axis number of trace data 1.
- 182 -
B-63330EN/03
4612
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Axis number 2
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 24
4613
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Data type 1
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 10
Specify the data type of trace data item 1.
0: None
1: Servo error
2: Servo pulses to be generated
3: Servo torque
4: Servo pulses after acc/dec
5: Actual speed
6: Servo electric current command
7: Data during heat simulation
8: Composite speed for all axes
9: Spindle speed
10: Spindle load meter
4614
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
4615
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
4616
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Data type 2
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 10
The settings are given in the explanation of parameter 4613.
Vertical axis graduation unit 1
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 500000
of trace data item 1.
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 500000
- 183 -
B-63330EN/03
4619
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Machine signal 1
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 49997
Specify machine signal 1 to be traced.
Number of ten thousands: Signal type (1: G, 2: F, 3: X, and 4: Y)
Number of thousands, number of hundreds, and number of tens:
Signal address
Number of units: Bit number
[Example] 10043 = G4.3(SBK)
4620
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Machine signal 2
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 49997
4621
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Machine signal 3
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 49997
4622
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Machine signal 4
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 49997
4623
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Waveform color 1
Parameter input
Integer
0-7
Specify the drawing color of trace data item 1.
0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow
4: Blue 5: Violet 6: Light blue 7: White
- 184 -
B-63330EN/03
4624
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Waveform color 2
Parameter input
Integer
0-7
4632
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Axis number 3
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 24
4633
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Axis number 4
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 24
4634
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Data type 3
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 10
4635
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
4636
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Data type 4
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 10
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 500000
- 185 -
B-63330EN/03
4637
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 500000
4638
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Waveform color 3
Parameter input
Integer
0-7
4639
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Waveform color 4
Parameter input
Integer
0-7
#7
#6
#5
4660
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0, #1
#4
ATL
#3
#2
#1
#0
SPL
TQ2
TQ1
Parameter input
Bit
TQ1 TQ2
Set a store interval for the fine torque sensing function.
#2
SPL
#4
ATL
Store interval
TQ2
TQ1
8ms
16ms
32ms
0
0
1
0
1
0
The function for saving stored disturbance load torque data as sample
data is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
On the fine torque sensing graph screen, a modification to the
abnormal load detection alarm threshold value is:
0: Impossible.
1: Possible.
When this bit is set to 1, a modification to the abnormal load
detection alarm threshold value can be made on the fine torque
- 186 -
B-63330EN/03
sensing graph screen, and such a modification is reflected in

parameter No. 1997 (servo axis) or parameter No. 3341 (spindle).
4670
Axis 1 subject to fine torque sensing
4671
4672
4673
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
-4 to 24
Specify axes subject to fine torque sensing. When servo axes are
subject to fine torque sensing, specify controlled axis numbers in the
range 1 to the maximum number of controlled axes. When spindles
are subject to fine torque sensing, reverse the sign of the spindle
numbers and specify spindle numbers in the range 1 to the maximum
number of controlled spindles with the minus sign.
NOTE
1 When 0 is set as axis N subject to fine torque
sensing, the settings for axis N+1 and up are ignored,
and the setting of 0 is assumed.
2 When a servo axis is subject to fine torque sensing,
bit 0 of parameter No. 1958 for the axis needs to be
set to 1. When this parameter is set to 0 for a
controlled axis, the torque sensing command signal,
even entered, is not stored.
4730
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Target board specification 1
Parameter input
Integer
0-1
In trace data 1 of waveform diagnosis function, the target board for
the tracing of specified memory is specified.
0: CNC main board
1: Customer's board
- 187 -
B-63330EN/03
4731
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Access size specification 1
Parameter input
Integer
0-4
In trace data 1 of waveform diagnosis function, the access size for the
tracing of specified memory is specified.
0: One byte (signed)
1: One byte (unsigned)
2: Two bytes (signed)
3: Two bytes (unsigned)
4: Four bytes (signed)
NOTE
If an illegal access size is specified, a system alarm
may be issued.
4732
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Memory address specification 1
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 999999999
In trace data 1 of waveform diagnosis function, the memory address
for the tracing of specified memory is specified.
NOTE
Specify an existing address.
If an illegal address is specified, a system alarm may
be issued.
4733
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0-1
0: CNC main board
1: Customers board
- 188 -
B-63330EN/03
4734
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0-4
NOTE
may be issued.
4735
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 999999999
NOTE
be issued.
4736
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0-1
0: CNC main board
1: Customers board
- 189 -
B-63330EN/03
4737
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0-4
NOTE
may be issued.
4738
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 999999999
NOTE
be issued.
4739
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0-1
0: CNC main board
1: Customers board
- 190 -
B-63330EN/03
4740
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0-4
NOTE
may be issued.
4741
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 999999999
NOTE
be issued.
- 191 -
4.17
B-63330EN/03
DRAWING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 4820 AND LATER)

#7
#6
#5
4820
[Input type]
[Data type]
#2
BGG
4821
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
4822
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
4823
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
BGG
Setting input
Bit
Switch between drawing functions. The operable function is:
0: Tool path drawing.
1: Background drawing.
Specifying the cutting feed color in tool path drawing
Parameter input
Integer
0-7
Specify the color of the cutting feed path in tool path drawing and
background drawing.
Specifying rapid traverse color in tool path drawing
Parameter input
Integer
0-7
Specify the color of the rapid traverse path in tool path drawing and
background drawing.
Specifying the graphic coordinate system
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 12
Specify the graphic coordinate system in tool path drawing and
background drawing.
1: XY 2: YZ 3: ZX
4: YX 5: ZY 6: XZ
7: XYZ 8: YZX 9: ZXY
10: XY+XZ 11: YZ+YX 12: ZX+ZY
- 192 -
B-63330EN/03
4824
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
4831
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
4832
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
4833
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
4834
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Color indicating reverse operation in tool path drawing
Parameter input
Integer
0-7
Specify the color used to indicate the path of reverse operation in tool
path drawing.
Initial value of horizontal angular displacement
Parameter input
Integer
degree
-360 - 360
Set the initial value of horizontal angular displacement when the
graphic coordinate system is three-dimensional.
Angular displacement on horizontal plane of vertical rotation axis
Parameter input
Integer
degree
-360 - 360
Set the angular displacement on a horizontal plane of a vertical
rotation axis when the graphic coordinate system is threedimensional.
Horizontal angular displacement
Parameter input
Integer
degree
-360 - 360
Set the horizontal angular displacement when the graphic coordinate
system is three-dimensional.
The actual angular displacement is equal to the initial value of
horizontal angular displacement (parameter 4831) plus the value of
this parameter.
Vertical angular displacement
Parameter input
Integer
degree
-360 - 360
Set the vertical angular displacement when the graphic coordinate
system is three-dimensional.
- 193 -
B-63330EN/03
4835
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
4881
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
4882
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
4883
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Scale factor
Parameter input
Integer
multiplied by 0.01
1 - 10000
Set the scale factor.
Center coordinate of the drawing range
Parameter input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set the center coordinate of the drawing range.
Maximum coordinate of the drawing range
Parameter input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set the maximum coordinate of the drawing range.
Minimum coordinate of the drawing range
Parameter input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set the minimum coordinate of the drawing range
- 194 -
B-63330EN/03
4.18
DATA I/O PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5000 AND LATER)

#7
#6
#5
5000
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
CDC
ETX
TCC
ECH
422
Parameter input
Bit
NOTE
effective.
#0
422
#1
ECH
#2
TCC
#3
ETX
The interface between the host and the remote buffer is:
0: An RS-232-C interface.
1: RS-422 interface.
The system automatically sets this bit by deciding whether the remote
buffer board provides an RS-232-C or RS-422 interface.
At the time of switching between remote and DNC operations (with
protocol A only), the response of SAT is that:
0: 0 is always sent to the data section of SAT (byte position 1).
1: The data section of SET (byte position 1) is echoed back to the
data section of SAT (byte position 1).
The communication code is:
0: ASCII for protocol A.
For protocol B/extended protocol B, DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4,
SYN, and NAK are ISO codes.
1: ISO for protocol A.
For protocol B/extended protocol B, DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4,
SYN, and NAK are ASCII codes.
0:
#4
CDC
For protocol A, the message end code is the ASCII/ISO CR code.

For protocol B/extended protocol B, neither CNC resets nor
alarms are posted to the host computer.
1: For protocol A, the message end code is the ASCII/ISO ETX
code.
For protocol B/extended protocol B, the SYN code is sent when
the CNC is reset, and the NAK code when an alarm is issued.
Selection between ASCII and ISO is performed with TCC of this
parameter.
For protocol B/extended protocol B, when this bit is 1, the following
parameters also take effect after the power is turned OFF and then ON
again:
Nos. 5070, 5072, 5073, 5082, 5083
The CD (signal quality detection) of the RS-232-C interface is:
0: Checked.
1: Not checked.
- 195 -
5001
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5002
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5003
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5004
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5013
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Device number of reader/punch unit connected to JD5A of MAIN
Setting input
Integer
1-6
Set the device number of the reader/punch unit connected to
connector JD5A.
Set the code numbers of the reader/punch units corresponding to
device numbers 1 to 6 in parameter Nos. 5100 to 5162.
Device number of reader/punch unit connected to JD5B of MAIN
Setting input
Integer
1-6
connector JD5B.
Device number of reader/punch unit connected to JD36A of the display unit
Setting input
Integer
1-6
connector JD36A.
Device number of reader/punch unit connected to modem card
Setting input
Integer
1-6
Set the device number of the reader/punch unit connected to modem
card.
Device number of reader/punch unit connected to JD6A of the display unit
Setting input
Integer
1-6
connector JD6A (RS422 interface) .
- 196 -
B-63330EN/03
5020
Device number for a reader/punch attached to JD5C on the additional-axis

board
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5021
Setting input
Integer
1 to 6
This parameter specifies the device number for a reader/punch
attached to connector JD5C.
The specification data numbers for devices corresponding to
reader/punch device numbers 1 to 6 are specified in parameter Nos.
5100 to 5162.
Device number for a reader/punch attached to JD6B on the additional-axis
board
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Integer
1 to 6
This parameter specifies the device number for a reader/punch
attached to connector JD6B.
The specification data numbers for devices corresponding to
reader/punch device numbers 1 to 6 are specified in parameter Nos.
5100 to 5162.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
5040
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
DSW
DSW
Parameter input
Bit
When an error occurs in a data server operation (excluding read and
punch operations) :
0: A BG alarm is issued.
1: A warning is issued.
#7
#6
#5
5042
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
MNC
Parameter input
Bit
NOTE
turned off then back on for the setting to become
effective.
#0
MNC
Specifies whether to perform DNC operation and external device

subprogram calls from a memory card.
0: Do not perform these operations.
1: Perform these operations.
- 197 -
5070
B-63330EN/03
Minimum baud rate at which reception clock pulses are supplied from the
remote device (for the RS-422 remote buffer only)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Integer
0 - 13
Boundary value at which the reception clock of the CNC is
synchronized with the host clock.
1 : 50, 2 : 100, 3 : 110, 4 : 150, 5 : 200, 6 : 300, 7 : 600. 8 : 1200,
9 : 2400, 10 : 4800, 11 : 9600, 12 : 19200, 13 : 38400 [bps]
If using the PROGRAM FILE Mate, set 13.
NOTE
At 38400 bps or higher, be sure to synchronize the
reception clock.
If the transfer rate exceeds the setting of this
parameter, the reception clock of the CNC is
synchronized with the host clock (provided that the
value of parameter No. 5073 is equal to or greater
than the value of No. 5070).
If communicating at high transmission rate using
another RS-422 interface, refer to the supplementary
manual supplied with the remote buffer for details.
5071
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5072
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
RS-422 I/O device type number (remote buffer)
Setting input
Integer
0,8
Set the type number of the host of the remote buffer.
8: PROGRAM FILE Mate
0: Type other than the above
For example, if using a personal computer, set 0.
Number of RS-422 stop bits (remote buffer)
Setting input
Integer
1, 2
Specify the number of RS-422 device stop bits of the remote buffer.
If the number of stop bits is specified as 1, a parity bit is attached.
NOTE
If the number of stop bits is specified as 1, a parity bit
is attached.
- 198 -
B-63330EN/03
5073
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5074
RS-422 baud rate (remote buffer)
Setting input
Integer
2 15
Specify the RS422 device baud rate of the remote buffer.
The valid settings are given below, together with the corresponding
baud rates.
1 : 50, 2 : 100, 3 : 110, 4 : 150, 5 : 200, 6 : 300, 7 : 600. 8 : 1200,
9 : 2400, 10 : 4800, 11 : 9600, 12 : 19200, 13 : 38400, 14 : 76800,
15 : 86400 [bps]
RS-422 protocol selection (remote buffer)
NOTE
After this parameter has been set, the power must
be off turned off then back on for the setting to
become effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Integer
1-3
1: Protocol B
2: Extended protocol B
3: Protocol A/extended protocol A
Switching between protocol A and extended protocol A is performed
with the appropriate parameter of the <SET> command.
For details of each protocol, refer to the supplementary manual
supplied with the remote buffer.
NOTE
If protocol A/extended protocol A is selected, any
changes to the following parameters take effect
after the power is turned OFF and then ON again:
Nos. 5070, 5072, and 5073
5081
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
RS-232-C I/O device type number (remote buffer)
Setting input
Integer
0,7,8
Set the type number of the RS-232-C I/O device host of the remote
buffer.
7: FANUC Cassette, PROGRAM FILE
8: PROGRAM FILE Mate, Floppy Cassette
0: Type other than the above
For example, if using a personal computer, set 0.
- 199 -
5082
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Number of RS-232-C stop bits (remote buffer)
Setting input
Integer
1, 2
Specify the number of RS-232-C device stop bits of the remote buffer.
NOTE
If the number of stop bits is specified as 1, a parity bit
is attached.
5083
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5084
RS-232-C baud rate (remote buffer)
Setting input
Integer
1 12
Specify the RS-232-C device baud rate of the remote buffer.
The valid settings are given below, together with the corresponding
baud rates.
1 : 50, 2 : 100, 3 : 110, 4 : 150, 5 : 200, 6 : 300, 7 : 600. 8 : 1200,
9 : 2400, 10 : 4800, 11 : 9600, 12 : 19200 [bps]
RS-232-C protocol selection (remote buffer)
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Integer
1-3
1: Protocol B
2: Extended protocol B
3: Protocol A/extended protocol A
Switching between protocol A and extended protocol A is performed
with the appropriate parameter of the <SET> command.
For details of each protocol, refer to the supplementary manual
(B-63322EN-1) supplied with the remote buffer.
NOTE
If protocol A/extended protocol A is selected, any
changes to the following parameters take effect after
the power is turned OFF and then ON again:
Nos. 5082 and 5083
- 200 -
B-63330EN/03
5110
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Code number of reader/punch unit corresponding to device number 1
Setting input
Integer
1-8
The specification number of the reader/punch device corresponding to
device number 1 is set.
The following lists the specification numbers and corresponding
reader/punch device specifications:
Specification
No.
1
Uses control code (DC1 to DC4) . Outputs feeds with

punch. Tape reader.
Does not use control code (DC1 to DC4) . Outputs
feeds with punch.
Uses control code (DC1 to DC4) . Does not output
feeds with punch.
Does not use control code (DC1 to DC4) . Does not
output feeds with punch.
Portable tape reader
PPR, Handy File (local mode)
FANUC Cassette (bubble cassette)
Floppy Cassette, PROGRAM FILE Mate
Handy File (remote mode)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5111
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5112
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Reader/punch device specifications
Number of stop bits of reader/punch unit corresponding to device number 1
Setting input
Integer
1-2
Set the number of stop bits of reader/punch unit corresponding to
device number 1.
Baud rate of reader/punch unit corresponding to device number 1
Setting input
Integer
1 - 12
The baud rate of the reader/punch device corresponding to device
number 1 is set.
The following lists the setting numbers and corresponding actual baud
rates:
Setting number
Baud rate
Setting number
Baud rate
1
2
3
4
5
6
50
100
110
150
200
300
7
8
9
10
11
12
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
- 201 -
B-63330EN/03
5120
5121
5122
5130
5131
5132
5140
5141
5142
5150
5151
5152
5160
5161
5162
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Integer
1 - 12
The method for setting these parameters Nos. 5120 to 5162 is the
same as for setting the specifications of the input/output unit
corresponding to device number 1.
- 202 -
B-63330EN/03
4.19
STROKE LIMIT PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5200 AND

LATER)
#7
5200
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
OUT
#1
POS
#7
PLC
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
PLC
#1
#0
POS
OUT
Setting input
Bit
Specifies whether to use the interior or exterior of stored stroke limit
2.
0: The interior of stored stroke limit 2 is used as the inhibited area.
1: The exterior of stored stroke limit 2 is used as the inhibited area.
Specifies whether to enable the position switch function.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Specifies whether to perform pre-move stroke check.
0: Pre-move stroke check is not performed.
1: Pre-move stroke check is performed.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when the pre-move
stroke option is provided.
#7
#6
5201
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
LMS
#4
DLM
#5
PSA
#5
#4
#3
PSA
DLM
LMS
#2
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to enable the stored stroke limit switching signal
EXLM.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Specifies whether to enable the axis-direction-specific stored stroke
limit switching signals +EXLx and -EXLx.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When this parameter is set to "1," the stored stroke limit switching
signal EXLM, common to all axes, is disabled.
Specifies whether to consider the servo delay (positional deviation)
and acceleration/deceleration delay when the position switch function
determines the operation range.
0: Do not consider these delays.
1: Consider these delays.
- 203 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
5210
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
OT2
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
OT2
Setting input
Bitaxis
Specifies whether to check stored stroke limit 2 for each axis (valid
when OUT is set to 0.) .
0: Stored stroke limit 2 is not checked for each axis.
1: Stored stroke limit 2 is checked for each axis.
NOTE
If OUT (bit 0) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 1,
stored stroke limit 2 is checked for all the
controlled axes.
5220
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5221
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5222
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Positive (+) direction coordinate of stored stroke limit 1 of each axis I
Parameter input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set the coordinate in the positive-direction machine coordinate system
of stored stroke limit 1 for each axis.
Negative (-) direction coordinate of stored stroke limit 1 of each axis I
Parameter input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set the coordinate in the negative-direction machine coordinate
system of stored stroke limit 1 for each axis.
Positive (+) direction coordinate of stored stroke limit 2 of each axis
Setting input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set the coordinate in the positive-direction machine coordinate system
of stored stroke limit 2 for each axis.
- 204 -
B-63330EN/03
5223
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5226
Negative (-) direction coordinate of stored stroke limit 2 of each axis
Setting input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set the coordinate in the negative-direction machine coordinate
system of stored stroke limit 2 for each axis.
Mark 2 interval for a linear scale having reference marks
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5227
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 999999999
Specifies the mark 2 interval for a linear scale having reference
marks.
Distance between the origin of the linear scale having reference marks and
the reference position
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
-999999999 - 999999999
Specifies the distance between the origin of the linear scale having
reference marks and the reference position. The "scale origin" here is
that point where mark 1 coincides with mark 2. Usually, this point
does not physical exist on the scale.
- 205 -
5228
B-63330EN/03
Distance 2 from the zero point of the distance coded linear scale to reference
position
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer axis
Detection unit
-999 to 999
This parameter is used when the distance from the zero point of the
distance coded linear scale to the reference position exceeds the range
set in parameter No. 5227.
The distance from the scale zero point to reference position is
obtained using the following expression:
Distance from the scale zero point to reference position =
(value in parameter No. 5228)1,000,000,000+(value in parameter No.
5227)
The scale zero point is that point at which mark 1 and mark 2 match.
Normally, this point is a virtual point that does not physically exist on
the scale.
NOTE
1 Set parameter Nos. 5227 and 5228 so that the
distance from the scale zero point to the reference
position is within the range from -999,999,999,999
to +999,999,999,999 If a value exceeding the
range is set, the alarm OT0448 occur.
2 The scale body can not cross the scale zero point.
The scale range must be within the range from
scale zero point to next scale zero point.
If the reference position is on the positive side when viewed from the
scale zero point, a positive value is set in this parameter. If the
reference position is on the negative side when viewed from the scale
zero point, a negative value is set. For details, refer to "Distance
coded linear scale" in the connection manual (function).
Reference position
Scale zero point
Scale body
Scale end
Mark 1 = mark 2
Mark 1
Mark 2
8.0
Mark 1
42.0
8.2
Parameter No.1896
Parameter No.5226
Parameter No.52281,000,000,000+parameter No.5227
- 206 -
Mark 2
41.8
B-63330EN/03
5260
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5261
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Coordinate II along each axis in the plus direction of stored stroke limit 1.
Parameter input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set a coordinate along each axis of the machine coordinate system in
the plus direction of stored stroke limit 1.
When the stored stroke limit switch signal EXLM is set to 1, or the
stored stroke limit switch signal based on the axis direction signal
+EXLx is set to 1, a stroke limit check is made using this parameter
instead of parameter No. 5220.
Coordinate II along each axis in the minus direction of stored stroke limit 1
Parameter input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set a coordinate along each axis of the machine coordinate system in
the minus direction of stored stroke limit 1.
When the stored stroke limit switch signal EXLM is set to 1, or the
stored stroke limit switch signal based on the axis direction signal EXLx is set to 1, a stroke limit check is made using this parameter
instead of parameter No. 5221.
- 207 -
5270
B-63330EN/03
Controlled axis for which the 1-st position switch function is performed
(PSWA01)
5271
Controlled axis for which the 2-nd position switch function is performed
(PSWA02)
5272
Controlled axis for which the 3-rd position switch function is performed
(PSWA03)
5273
Controlled axis for which the 4-th position switch function is performed
(PSWA04)
5274
(PSWA05)
5275
(PSWA06)
5276
(PSWA07)
5277
(PSWA08)
5278
(PSWA09)
5279
(PSWA10)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
Set the controlled axis number corresponding to one of the first to
tenth position switch functions. When the machine coordinate of the
corresponding axis is within a parameter-set range, the corresponding
position switch signal is output to the PMC. The position switch
signal corresponding to the n-th position switch function is PSWn (n:
1 to 10) .
NOTE
The setting of 0 means that the position switch
function of the number is not used.
- 208 -
B-63330EN/03
5280
Maximum value of the operating range of the 1-st position switch (PSW101)
5281
Maximum value of the operating range of the 2-nd position switch (PSW102)
5282
Maximum value of the operating range of the 3-rd position switch (PSW103)
5283
Maximum value of the operating range of the 4-th position switch (PSW104)
5284
5285
5286
5287
5288
5289
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
table (A) )
Set the maximum value of the operating range of the first to tenth
position switches.
NOTE
1 For a diameter-specified axis, use radius values to
specify the parameters used to set the maximum
and minimum values of an operating range.
2 The position switch function is enabled upon
completion of reference position return.
- 209 -
B-63330EN/03
5290
Minimum value of the operating range of the 1-st position switch (PSW201)
5291
Minimum value of the operating range of the 2-nd position switch (PSW202)
5292
Minimum value of the operating range of the 3-rd position switch (PSW203)
5293
Minimum value of the operating range of the 4-th position switch (PSW204)
5294
5295
5296
5297
5298
5299
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
table (A) )
Set the minimum value of the operating range of the first to tenth
position switches.
NOTE
1 For a diameter-specified axis, use radius values to
specify the parameters used to set the maximum
and minimum values of an operating range.
2 The position switch function is enabled upon
completion of reference position return.
- 210 -
B-63330EN/03
4.20
PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION PARAMETERS (DATA NO.

5420 AND LATER)
5420
Number of pitch error compensation point of reference position for each axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
From 0 through 1279 or from 0 through 3071 depending on the
number of controlled axes is less than or equal to 10 or greater than
10, respectively.
Set the number of the pitch error compensation point corresponding to
the reference position for each axis.
In rotation-axis pitch error compensation, a compensation point
number is basically set with the 0-degree point (machine zero point)
set as the reference position. If the reference position is not located at
the 0-degree point (machine zero point) , set parameters as follows:
Set the parameter (No. 5424) specifying the interval between
pitch error compensation points so that the reference position is
an integral multiple of the interval away from the 0-degree point
(machine zero point)
Set the parameter (No. 5422) specifying the number of the
farthest compensation point in the positive direction so that it
specifies the 360-degree (= 0-degree) point.
Set the parameter (No. 5425) specifying angular displacement
per rotation to 360 degrees.
5421
Number of pitch error compensation point with the largest negative value for
each axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
10, respectively.
Set the number of the pitch error compensation point with the largest
negative value for each axis.
- 211 -
B-63330EN/03
In rotation-axis pitch error compensation, be sure to assign the

number of the farthest pitch error compensation point in the negative
direction to a compensation point positioned next to the 0-degree
point in the positive direction.
NOTE
When bidirectional pitch error compensation is
enabled, this parameter specifies the number of the
farthest pitch error compensation point in the
negative direction in the case of positive-direction
movement.
5422
Number of pitch error compensation point with the largest positive value for
each axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
10, respectively.
Set the number of the pitch error compensation point with the largest
positive value for each axis.
NOTE
A value greater than the setting of parameter No. 5420
must be set.
When bidirectional pitch error compensation is
enabled, this parameter specifies the number of the
farthest pitch error compensation point in the positive
direction in the case of positive-direction movement.
5423
Magnification of pitch error compensation for each axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - 100
Set the magnification of pitch error compensation for each axis.
When 1 is set as the magnification of pitch error compensation, the
unit for compensation data is the same as the detection unit.
- 212 -
B-63330EN/03
5424
Interval of pitch error compensation points for each axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5425
Parameter input
Realaxis
Pitch error compensation points are set at regular intervals. Set this
interval for each axis.
The minimum interval of pitch error compensation points is
determined from the following equation:
Minimum interval = maximum feedrate/7500
Unit:mm, inch, deg or mm/min, inch /min, deg/min
Example: When the maximum feedrate is 15000 mm/min, the
minimum interval of pitch error compensation points is 2 mm.
Angular displacement per rotation in rotation-axis pitch error compensation
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Comp. point
Comp. value
11
+1
Parameter input
Realaxis
For rotation-axis pitch error compensation (with bit 2 (ROP) of
parameter No. 1006 set to 1) , set angular displacement per rotation
for each axis. The angular displacement per rotation need not always
be 360 degrees. The period in rotation-axis pitch error compensation
can be set.
The angular displacement per rotation, compensation interval, and
number of compensation points must satisfy the following equation:
Angular displacement per rotation = compensation interval x number
of compensation points
The sum of the compensation values per rotation must always be 0.
(Ex) Rotary-axis type pitch error compensation
12
+1
13
+2
14
-1
15
-2
16
-2
17
-2
18
-1
19
+2
20
+1
21
-2
22
-1
23
+1
24
+1
In this case the set values are as follows.

Data no.
Value
5420
10
- 213 -
5421
1
5422
25
5423
1
5424
24.0
5425
360.
25
+2
5426
[Input type]
[Data type]
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
#5
IPP
IPC
BDP
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
HPE
Parameter input
Bitaxis
NOTE
effective.
#3
HPE
#5
BDP
#6
IPC
#7
IPP
The output of interpolation-type pitch error compensation, threedimensional error compensation, and interpolation-type straightness
compensation is based on:
0: Detection unit
1: 1/1000 of the detection unit (same as for nano compensation)
Specifies whether to use bidirectional pitch error compensation.
0: Do not use.
1: Use.
Specifies whether to use the interpolating straightness compensation
function.
0: Do not use.
1: Use.
This parameter is valid only when it is set for those move axes
(controlled axis numbers set in parameter No. 5481 to No. 5485) .
Specifies whether to use interpolating pitch error compensation.
0: Do not use.
1: Use.
In interpolating pitch error compensation, compensation pulses are
output one at a time at constant intervals between adjacent pitch error
compensation points.
When second cyclical pitch error compensation and interpolating
pitch error compensation are used at the same time, second cyclical
pitch error compensation pulses are output according to the
interpolating pitch error compensation method between compensation
points set by second cyclical pitch error compensation.
When a greater feedrate is used, multiple compensation pulses may be
output.
The minimum interval where multiple pulses are not output at a time
is determined by the following equation:
Minimum interval of pitch error compensation points = (Fmax/7500)
(Pmax+1)
Fmax : Maximum feedrate
Pmax : Maximum pitch error compensation value
Example: When the maximum feedrate is 15000 mm/min, and the
maximum pitch error compensation value is 7 pulses, the minimum
interval of compensation points is 16 mm.
NOTE
The interpolating pitch error compensation function
cannot be used for spindle positioning.
- 214 -
B-63330EN/03
5427
Number of the farthest bidirectional pitch error compensation point in the

negative direction (in the case of negative-direction movement)
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
From 0 through 1279 (or from 10000 through 11279) or from 0
through 3071 (or from 10000 through 13071) depending on the
10, respectively.
When using bidirectional pitch error compensation, set the number of
the farthest compensation point in the negative direction in the case of
negative-direction movement.
NOTE
1 In parameter No. 5421, set the number of the
farthest compensation point in the negative direction
in the case of positive-direction movement.
2 No set of compensation data for one axis must
extend from 1279 (or 3071) to 10000.
5428
Pitch error compensation value at the reference position when a movement

is made to the reference position in the direction opposite to the reference
position return direction
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
-32768 - 32767
By using an absolute value, set a pitch error compensation value at the
reference position when a movement is made to the reference position
in the negative direction if the reference position return direction (bit
5 (ZMI) of parameter No. 1006) is positive, or when a movement is
made to the reference position in the positive direction if the reference
position return direction is negative.
- 215 -
5430
B-63330EN/03
Number of the farthest second cyclical pitch error compensation point in the
negative direction for each axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5431
Parameter input
Integeraxis
10, respectively.
The compensation point specified with this parameter is used as a
reference point for second cyclical pitch error compensation. This
reference point is used as a compensation point at the reference
position. The compensation value at the compensation reference point
must be 0.
Number of the farthest second cyclical pitch error compensation point in the
positive direction for each axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5432
Parameter input
Integeraxis
10, respectively.
Set the number of the farthest second cyclical pitch error
compensation point in the positive direction for each axis.
Interval between second cyclical pitch error compensation points for each
axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Realaxis
From 0 through the space between neiboring points of the pitch error
compensation (parameter no.5424) .
- 216 -
B-63330EN/03
Set the interval between second cyclical pitch error compensation

points for each axis.
5433
Magnification for second cyclical pitch error compensation for each axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - 100
Set a magnification for second cyclical pitch error compensation for
each axis.
When 1 is set as the magnification for second cyclical pitch error
compensation, the unit of compensation data is the same as the
detection unit.
5440
Axis for which three-dimensional error compensation is performed (1st axis)
5441
Axis for which three-dimensional error compensation is performed (2nd axis)
5442
Axis for which three-dimensional error compensation is performed (3rd axis)
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
1 - Max axes
Set three axes for which three-dimensional error compensation is
performed.
5443
Number of three-dimensional error compensation points (1-st axis)
5444
Number of three-dimensional error compensation points (2-nd axis)
5445
Number of three-dimensional error compensation points (3-rd axis)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
2 - 25
Set the number of three-dimensional error compensation points.
- 217 -
5446
B-63330EN/03
Number of the three-dimensional error compensation point at the reference

position (1-st axis)
5447

position (2-nd axis)
5448

position (3-rd axis)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
From 0 through the number of the compensation points
Set the number of the three-dimensional error compensation point at
the reference position.
5449
Magnification for three-dimensional error compensation (1-st axis)
5450
Magnification for three-dimensional error compensation (2-nd axis)
5451
Magnification for three-dimensional error compensation (3-rd axis)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 100
Set a magnification for three-dimensional error compensation.
5452
Three-dimensional error compensation interval (1-st axis)
5453
Three-dimensional error compensation interval (2-nd axis)
5454
Three-dimensional error compensation interval (3-rd axis)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
mm, inch (machine unit)
table (A) )
Set a three-dimensional error compensation interval.
- 218 -
B-63330EN/03
5461
Gradient compensation point number a for each axis
5462
Gradient compensation point number b for each axis
5463
Gradient compensation point number c for each axis
5464
Gradient compensation point number d for each axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
10, respectively.
Set a gradient compensation point. A compensation point to be set
becomes a compensation number in stored pitch error compensation.
5471
Compensation alpha at gradient compensation point number d for each axis
5472
Compensation beta at gradient compensation point number b for each axis
5473
Compensation gamma at gradient compensation point number c for each axis
5474
Compensation delta at gradient compensation point number d for each axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
-32767 - 32767
Set a compensation for each compensation point.
- 219 -
B-63330EN/03
5481
Axis number of straightness compensation move axis 1
5482
5483
5484
5485
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
From 1 through the number of controlled axes
Set the axis number of a straightness compensation move axis.
NOTE
Compensation is not applied when 0 is specified.
5491
Axis number of compensation axis 1 for straightness compensation move axis 1
5492
5493
5494
5495
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
From 1 through the number of controlled axes
Set the axis number of a compensation axis.
NOTE
Compensation is not applied when 0 is specified.
- 220 -
B-63330EN/03
5501
Compensation point number a of straightness compensation move axis 1
5502
Compensation point number b of straightness compensation move axis 1
5503
Compensation point number c of straightness compensation move axis 1
5504
Compensation point number d of straightness compensation move axis 1
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
detection unit
10, respectively.
Set a compensation point number in stored pitch error compensation.
Fourth among the four compensation points set for each move axis.
5511
5512
5513
5514
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
10, respectively.
- 221 -
B-63330EN/03
5521
5522
5523
5524
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
10, respectively.
5551
Compensation corresponding to compensation point number a of move axis 1
5552
Compensation corresponding to compensation point number b of move axis 1
5553
Compensation corresponding to compensation point number c of move axis 1
5554
Compensation corresponding to compensation point number d of move axis 1
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
detection unit
-32767 - 32767
Note) Set a compensation for each compensation point.
- 222 -
B-63330EN/03
5561
5562
5563
5564
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
detection unit
-32767 - 32767
5571
5572
5573
5574
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
detection unit
-32767 - 32767
- 223 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
#4
#3
5580
[Input type]
[Data type]
#2
#1
#0
SMT
Parameter input
Bit
NOTE
effective.
#1
SMT
5581
The parameters (No. 5591 to No. 5595) for straightness compensation

multiplier:
0: Are effective only for the first move axis when two or more
move axes are set using the same axis number.
1: Are effective for the respective move axes even when two or
more move axes set using the same axis number.
When the straightness compensation function is used, be sure to set
SCMT to 1.
Straightness compensation point number of most negative side of move
axis 1
5582

axis 2
5583

axis 3
5584

axis 4
5585

axis 5
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
From 1280 through 1919 or from 3072 through 3711 depending on
the number of controlled axes is less than or equal to 10 or greater
than 10, respectively.
Specify the straightness compensation point number located at the
most negative position for each move axis.
- 224 -
B-63330EN/03
When the value set in this parameter is out of the data range, an alarm
is issued, and compensation cannot be performed.
5591
Straightness compensation multiplier of move axis 1
5592
5593
5594
5595
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 100
Specify a straightness compensation multiplier for each axis.
When the straightness compensation multiplier is set to 1, the unit of
compensation data is the same as the detection unit. When the
multiplier is set to 0, straightness compensation is not applied.
- 225 -
4.21
B-63330EN/03
SPINDLE CONTROL PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5602 AND

LATER)
#7
5602
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
NAL
#4
TPE
#5
TLE
#6
RSC
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
APW
#7
NDP
#5
#4
#3
RSC
TLE
TPE
NAL
#2
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bitspindle
Specifies whether to display an alarm detected by the spindle
amplifier.
0: Display.
1: Do not display.
(Valid when bit 0 (ALM) of parameter No. 5807 is set to 0)
When this parameter is set to 1, alarms detected by the spindle
amplifier are ignored. So, set this parameter to 0 at all times except in
maintenance.
Specifies whether tool offset values (G45 to G48) are included at the
current position of the axis under constant surface speed control.
0: Included.
1: Not included.
Specifies whether a tool length compensation value is included at the
current position of the axis under constant surface speed control.
0: Included.
1: Not included. Usually, set this parameter to 1.
Specifies whether to use the current position for a positioning
command (such as G00) under constant surface speed control.
0: Use.
1: Do not use. Instead, the coordinates of an end point are used for
constant surface speed control.
#7
5603
#6
#6
#5
NDP
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
APW
Parameter input
Bitspindle
Specifies whether to transfer parameter No. 3020 through No. 3031 or
parameter No. 3000 through 3393 from the CNC to the spindle
amplifier when a serial spindle is used.
0: Transfer parameter No. 3020 through No. 3031.
1: Transfer parameter No. 3000 through No. 3393.
Set 1 only for serial spindle adjustment.
Specifies whether to make a position coder disconnection check when
an analog spindle is used.
0: Make a check.
1: Do not make a check.
(Valid when bit 3 (NAL) of parameter No. 5602) is set to 0)
- 226 -
B-63330EN/03
Set this parameter to 1 if no position coder is installed when an analog

spindle is used.
#7
#6
#5
5605
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
TEL
#2
TSC
#4
IOR
5606
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#3
IOR
#2
#1
TSC
TEL
#0
Parameter input
Bitspindle
Specifies whether to use exponential acceleration/deceleration or
linear acceleration/deceleration for the spindle and drilling axis in the
rigid tapping mode.
0: Use exponential acceleration/deceleration.
1: Use linear acceleration/deceleration (constant acceleration/
deceleration) .
Usually, set this parameter to 1.
Specifies whether an acceleration/deceleration time constant/FL
feedrate is fixed or switched among four stages for the spindle and
drilling axis in the rigid tapping mode.
0: Fixed. Parameter No. 5751, No. 5752, and No. 5757
1: Switched among four stages according to the spindle speed S.
Parameter No. 5757, and No. 5884 through No. 5894
Specifies whether to cancel the spindle positioning mode upon reset.
0: Do not cancel.
1: Cancel.
#7
#6
ORD
ORN
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
A/S
Parameter input
Bitspindle
NOTE
effective.
#0
A/S
Specifies whether the spindle is an analog spindle or serial spindle.

0: Analog spindle
1: Serial spindle
NOTE
1 Spindle analog output option is required when
using an analog spindle.
2 Spindle serial output option is required when
using a serial spindle.
#6
ORN
Specifies whether to perform spindle orientation at the beginning of

rigid tapping as follows:
0: Do not perform.
1: Perform.
- 227 -
#7
ORD
B-63330EN/03
Specifies the direction of spindle orientation at the beginning of

analog spindle rigid tapping as follows:
0: Positive direction
1: Negative direction
This parameter is valid when parameter ORN (bit 6 of parameter No.
5606) = 1.
For a serial spindle, bit 4 of parameter No. 3004 is used to specify the
direction of spindle orientation. Refer to the FANUC AC SPINDLE
MOTOR Series Parameter Manual (B-65160E) for details.
NOTE
When this parameter is 0, the direction of spindle
orientation is negative if a G84.2/G84.3 block issues
an I/O command (for specifying a negative direction).
When the parameter is 1, the direction of spindle
orientation is negative also if a G84.2/G83.3 block
issues an I/O command (for specifying a positive
direction).
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
5607
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
PLD
PLD
Parameter input
Bitspindle
Specifies whether the spindle parameters for the serial spindle are
automatically set when power is turned on.
0: Automatically set.
1: Not automatically set.
If this parameter is set to 0 after a motor model code is set, the
standard values matching the motor model are set in the parameters at
the next power-on time, and this parameter is set to 1.
#7
#6
#5
5608
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
RSR
#0
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RSR
Parameter input
Bitspindle
Specifies whether the relationships of G84.2/G84.3, drilling axis
move direction, and spindle rotation direction in the rigid tapping
mode are of type A or type B.
0: Type A
1: Type B
Type A:
Point R
point Z
- 228 -
Positive
direction
Negative
direction
Command
G84.2
G84.3
Reverse
Normal
rotation
rotation
Normal
Reverse
rotation
rotation
B-63330EN/03
Type B:
Point R
point Z
#7
#6
Positive
direction
Negative
direction
#5
5609
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
NGC
#2
MOM
5611
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
#4
Command
G84.2
G84.3
Normal
Reverse
rotation
rotation
Normal
Reverse
rotation
rotation
#3
#2
#1
MOM
#0
NGC
Parameter input
Bitspindle
Specifies whether the position gain of the Cs contour control axis
under Cs contour control is automatically set for other servo axes.
0: Set automatically.
1: Not set automatically.
Specifies whether the serial spindle uses the orientation function of
external stop position setting type based on the position coder.
0: Do not use the function.
1: Use the function.
Number of samples of sampling data for obtaining the mean spindle speed
Parameter input
Integerspindle
0-4
The mean value of sampling data is used for spindle speed indication,
feed per revolution, and threading so that the effect of fluctuation of
the spindle speed is reduced. Set how many samples of sampling data
are required to obtain the mean.
0: 1 sample
1: 2 samples
2: 4 samples
3: 8 samples
4: 16 samples
NOTE
5612
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Unit of spindle speed to be output by DO signals
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1/10-N min-1
0-3
Set the unit of output by the specified spindle speed signal, actual
spindle speed signal, and maximum spindle speed signal.
- 229 -
B-63330EN/03
nit of output spindle speed

-1
1 min
-1
0.1 min
-1
0.01 min
-1
0.001 min
5613
Setting
0
1
2
3
Compensation value for the offset voltage of the spindle speed analog
output
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
[Adjustment]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
Velo
-1024 - 1024
Set the compensation value for the offset voltage of the spindle speed
analog output.
To make adjustment, follow the procedure explained below:
<1> Set the standard setting 0.
<2> Specify the spindle speed at which the spindle speed analog
output becomes 0.
<3> Measure the output voltage.
<4> Set the value obtained from the following equation in the
Setting =
8191 measured voltage (V)

12.5
parameter.
<5> After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed again at
which the spindle speed analog output becomes 0, then check
that the output voltage is 0 V.
5614
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
[Adjustment]
Data for adjusting the gain of the spindle speed analog output
Parameter input
Integerspindle
700 - 1250
Set data for adjusting the gain of the spindle speed analog output.
Make adjustment by following the procedure explained below:
<1> Set the standard setting to 800.
<2> Specify the spindle speed at which the spindle speed analog
output voltage is maximized (10 V) .
<3> Measure the output voltage.
<4> Set the value obtained from the following equation in the
parameter.
Setting =
10(V)
800
Measured voltage (V)
<5> After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed again at
which the spindle speed analog output voltage is maximized,
then check that the output voltage is 10 V.
- 230 -
B-63330EN/03
5621
Maximum spindle speed for the spindle speed fluctuation detection function
(gear 1)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5622
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 32767
(gear 2)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5623
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 32767
(gear 3)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5624
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 32767
(gear 4)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5625
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 32767
(gear 5)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5626
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 32767
(gear 6)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 32767
- 231 -
5627
B-63330EN/03
(gear 7)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5628
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 32767
(gear 8)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5680
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 32767
M code for specifying spindle orientation
Parameter input
Integerspindle
6 - 97
Set an M code for spindle orientation of spindle positioning axes
NOTE
- When this parameter is set to 0, all spindle
positioning functions for the spindle are disabled.
- M00 to M05, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be set.
- No other M codes for the spindle positioning function
can be set at the same time.
- M codes used for other functions cannot be set at the
same time.
5681
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
M code for canceling the spindle positioning mode
Parameter input
Integerspindle
6 - 97
Set an M code for canceling the spindle positioning mode of spindle
positioning axes.
NOTE
- M00 to M05, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be set.
same time.
- 232 -
B-63330EN/03
5701
Spindle speed permission ratio (q) at which it is assumed that the spindle
has attained the specified spindle speed
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5702
Parameter input
Integerspindle
If parameter FLR (bit 1 of parameter No. 5808) is 0: 1.0%
If parameter FLR (bit 1 of parameter No. 5808) is 0: 1 to 50
This parameter specifies a spindle speed permission ratio at which the
spindle speed fluctuation detection function assumes that the spindle
has attained the specified speed.
Spindle speed fluctuation ratio (r) not triggering a spindle speed fluctuation
detection alarm
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
This parameter specifies a spindle speed fluctuation ratio not
triggering a spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm.
5711
Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (first stage)
5712
Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (second stage)
5713
Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (third stage)
5714
Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (fourth stage)
5715
Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (fifth stage)
5716
Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (sixth stage)
5717
Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (seventh stage)
5718
Maximum spindle speed during rigid tapping (eighth stage)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 999999999
These parameters specify the maximum spindle speed used for each
gear stage during rigid tapping. Issuing an S command having a
value larger than each specified value is results in an alarm.
- 233 -
B-63330EN/03
NOTE
No check is made if all of values specified in
parameter Nos. 5711 to 5718 are 0.
If a nonzero value is specified in a parameter for the
"ath" gear stage, and all the parameters for gears
lower than the "ath" gear stage are reset to 0, a check
is made with a value specified for the "ath" gear stage
if the "ath" stage or a lower stage is selected.
For example, when parameter Nos. 5711 to 5713 = 0,
parameter No. 5714 = 800, and parameter Nos. 5715
to 5718 = 0, a check is made with an upper limit of
S800 if the fourth stage or a lower stage is selected.
5721
Spindle speed fluctuation range (I) not triggering a spindle speed fluctuation
detection alarm
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5722
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 32767
This parameter specifies a permissible fluctuation range that does not
trigger a spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm.
Time (p) allowed from when the specified spindle speed is changed until
spindle speed fluctuation detection begins
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5751
Parameter input
Integerspindle
msec
0 - 32767
This parameter specifies the time (p) allowed from when the specified
spindle speed is changed until spindle speed fluctuation detection
begins. In other words, spindle speed fluctuation detection is not
performed until the specified time elapses after the specified spindle
speed is changed.
Time constant at acceleration/deceleration of the spindle and drilling axis in
rigid tapping (fixed)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
msec
0 - 4000
Set an acceleration/deceleration time constant when a fixed
acceleration/deceleration time constant is used for the spindle and
drilling axis in rigid tapping (with bit 2 (TSC) of parameter No. 5605
set to 0) .
- 234 -
B-63330EN/03
5752
FL feedrate at acceleration/deceleration of the spindle and drilling axis in


[Data type] Realspindle
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
Depend on the increment system of the drilling axis
Set an FL feedrate when a fixed FL feedrate is used for the spindle
and drilling axis in rigid tapping (with bit 2 (TSC) of parameter No.
5605 set to 0) .
5757
Spindle speed for determining acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed in

[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 32767
Set a spindle speed when a fixed acceleration/deceleration time
constant/FL feedrate is used for the spindle and drilling axis in rigid
tapping (with bit 2 (TSC) of parameter No. 5602 set to 0) .
When the type of acceleration/deceleration used for rigid tapping is
linear acceleration/deceleration (with bit 1 (TEL) of parameter No.
5605 set to 1) , the speed set in this parameter is increased or
decreased for the time set in parameter No. 5751.
Acceleration/
deceleration
time
Acceleration/
deceleration
time
TC
TC
S
command
Relationship between S
command and actual
acceleration/deceleration
time during linear
Relationship between S
command and actual
time during exponential
- 235 -
S
command
5804
B-63330EN/03
Allowable range for constant spindle speed signal output in exponential

[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
0 - 99999999
The constant spindle speed signal is output when the difference in the
number of remaining pulses held in the acceleration/deceleration
circuit between two adjacent distribution periods (ITPs) is zero. In
exponential acceleration/deceleration, however, the difference in the
number of remaining pulses between two adjacent ITPs does not
become zero even when a constant speed is kept. In this case, a
constant speed is assumed to be reached when the difference in the
number of remaining pulses is within the range specified in this
parameter.
In the figure shown below, the number of pulses accummulated in the
acceleration/deceleration circuit at ITP6 is:
1+2+3+4+5+6
At ITP7, the number of accummulated pulses is:
1+2+3+4+5+6+7
Therefore, the difference in pulses accummulated in the
acceleration/deceleration circuit at ITP6 and ITP7 is 7.
The difference will not become 0 indefinitely.
Actual feedrate
Feedrate
specified in F
3
2
p6
p7
p5
p4
p3
p2
p1
t
ITP1
ITP2
ITP3
ITP4
ITP5
ITP6
ITP7
pn:
Number of output pulses in one ITP
n:
Number of pulses accumulated in the acceleration/deceleration circuit in one ITP
- 236 -
Time
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
5807
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
ALM
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether the spindle alarms (SPxxxx) of all spindles are
enabled or ignored.
0: Enabled.
1: Ignored.
When this parameter is set to 1, the spindle-related alarms are ignored.
So, set this parameter to 0 at all times except in maintenance.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
5808
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
OMI
#1
FLR
AIT
#1
IOE
#0
FLR
OMI
Specifies whether the spindle positioning orientation direction is the

plus direction or minus direction when an analog spindle is used.
0: Plus direction
1: Minus direction
Specifies the measurement unit for the permission ratio (q) and
fluctuation ratio (r) specified in spindle speed fluctuation detection
parameter Nos. 5701 and 5702, respectively, as follows:
0: 1% units
1: 0.1% units
#6
#5
5809
#0
#1
Parameter input
Bitspindle
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
ALM
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
IOE
AIT
Parameter input
Bitspindle
Specifies whether to enable or disable axis-by-axis interlock for a
spindle positioning axis.
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
Specifies whether to cancel the spindle positioning mode upon
emergency stop.
0: Do not cancel.
1: Cancel.
- 237 -
5810
B-63330EN/03
Error pulse difference between spindles used to determine the completion of

spindle phase synchronization
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
0 - 32767
5811
Error pulse difference between spindles used to issue a spindle

synchronization control alarm
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
0 - 32767
Cutting in-position width for Cs contour control
5813
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer spindle
Detection unit
0 to 99999999
Set a cutting in-position width for Cs contour control.
This parameter is used when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1800 is set
to 1.
#7
5820
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
ASD
#7
SVP
#6
#5
SVP
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
ASD
Parameter input
Bitspindle
Specifies whether the spindle speed of a serial spindle is calculated
from feedback pulses from the position coder or from speed monitor
data.
0: Calculated from feedback pulses from the position coder.
1: Calculated from speed monitor data.
Specifies whether to display a monitor value or peak hold value as a
synchronization error on the spindle screen.
0: Display a monitor value.
1: Display a peak hold value.
Display a peak hold value.
Set the display of a synchronization error in rigid tapping and spindle
synchronization.
- 238 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
#5
5821
[Input type]
[Data type]
#2
STJ
5841
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
STJ
Parameter input
Bitspindle
Specifies when to stop returning the Cs contour control axis to the
reference position.
0: At a reset or emergency stop
1: At a reset, emergency stop, or when the feed axis direction
selection signal is set to "0."
Motor number of each spindle
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5842
Parameter input
Integerspindle
0-4
Set a motor number to be assigned to each spindle.
0: Uses no subsequent spindle numbers.
1: Uses the motor of motor number 1.
Number of pulses of the position coder
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
1 - 32767
Set the number of pulses of the position coder.
- 239 -
5843
B-63330EN/03
Number of pulses of the position detector for a Cs contour control axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5844
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
1 - 999999
Set the number of pulses of the position detector for a Cs contour
control axis.
Axis number subject to constant surface speed control
Parameter input
Integerspindle
0 - Max axes
Specify the ordinal number of an axis that is subject to constant
surface speed control. If an axis is specified in the program (G96P_) ,
constant surface speed control is applied to the axis.
If no axis is specified in the program (G96P_) , or P0 is specified,
constant surface speed control is applied to the axis set in this
parameter.
NOTE
If 0 is set, the P value programmed with G96P_ is
ignored, and constant surface speed control is always
performed on the X-axis.
5845
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Suffix for serial spindle (main spindle) or analog spindle display
Parameter input
Integerspindle
0 - 122
Set a suffix for spindle speed display on a screen such as the position
display screen.
Setting
0, 32
1 to 9, 48 to 57
65 to 90
97 to 122
- 240 -
Character used as suffix

Blank
Numeric 0 to 9
Uppercase letter A to Z
Lowercase letter a to z
B-63330EN/03
5846
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Suffix for serial spindle (sub-spindle) display
Parameter input
Integerspindle
0 - 122
Set a suffix for spindle speed display on a screen such as the position
display screen.
Setting
0, 32
1 to 9, 48 to 57
65 to 90
97 to 122
5847
Character used as suffix

Blank
Numeric 0 to 9
Uppercase letter A to Z
Lowercase letter a to z
Number of teeth on the position coder gear in speed control (feed per
revolution, threading, and so forth)
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5848
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 9999
Set the number of teeth on the position coder gear in speed control
(feed per revolution, threading, and so forth) .
Number of teeth on the spindle gear in speed control (feed per revolution,
threading, and so forth)
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 9999
Set the number of teeth on the spindle gear in speed control (feed per
revolution, threading, and so forth) .
- 241 -
5850
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Spindle number to be selected upon power-up/reset
Parameter input
Integer
0-4
Set a spindle number to be selected upon power-up/reset.
A selected spindle is used as:
Spindle displayed on a screen such as the position display screen
and program check screen
Spindle used for an S command, feed per revolution, constant
surface speed control, threading, canned cycles, rigid tapping,
and spindle speed detection
NOTE
To rewrite this parameter during automatic operation,
always use a non-buffered M code set in parameter
Nos. 2411 to 2420 so that rewriting is performed in
the non-buffering state.
5851
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5852
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5853
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (first stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
Set the number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode
(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (first stage) .
Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (first stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
Set the number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (rigid
tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (first stage) .
Backlash compensation in the servo mode (first stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
-9999 - 9999
Set a backlash compensation in the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle
positioning, and so forth) (first stage) .
- 242 -
B-63330EN/03
5854
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5855
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5856
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5857
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5858
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5859
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (second stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (second stage) .
Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (second stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (second stage) .
Backlash compensation in the servo mode (second stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
-9999 - 9999
positioning, and so forth) (second stage) .
Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (third stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (third stage) .
Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (third stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (third stage) .
Backlash compensation in the servo mode (third stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
-9999 - 9999
positioning, and so forth) (third stage) .
- 243 -
5860
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5861
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5862
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5863
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5864
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5865
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (fourth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (fourth stage) .
Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (fourth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (fourth stage) .
Backlash compensation in the servo mode (fourth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
-9999 - 9999
positioning, and so forth) (fourth stage) .
Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (fifth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (fifth stage) .
Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (fifth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (fifth stage) .
Backlash compensation in the servo mode (fifth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
-9999 - 9999
positioning, and so forth) (fifth stage) .
- 244 -
B-63330EN/03
5866
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5867
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5868
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5869
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5870
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5871
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (sixth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (sixth stage) .
Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (sixth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (sixth stage) .
Backlash compensation in the servo mode (sixth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
-9999 - 9999
positioning, and so forth) (sixth stage) .
Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (seventh stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (seventh stage) .
Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (seventh stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (seventh stage) .
Backlash compensation in the servo mode (seventh stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
-9999 - 9999
positioning, and so forth) (seventh stage) .
- 245 -
5872
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5873
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5874
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5875
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5876
B-63330EN/03
Number of teeth on the position coder gear in the servo mode (eighth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (eighth stage) .
Number of teeth on the spindle gear in the servo mode (eighth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) (eighth stage) .
Backlash compensation in the servo mode (eighth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
-9999 - 9999
positioning, and so forth) (eighth stage) .
Effective area in the servo mode using a position coder
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
0 - 99999999
Set an effective area in the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle
positioning, and so forth) using a position coder.
Positional deviation limit during movement in the servo mode using a
position coder
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
0 - 99999999
Set a positional deviation limit during movement in the servo mode
(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) using a position
coder.
- 246 -
B-63330EN/03
5877
Positional deviation limit during a stop in the servo mode using a position
coder
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5879
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5880
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5881
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5882
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
0 - 99999999
Set a positional deviation limit during a stop in the servo mode (rigid
tapping, spindle positioning) using a position coder.
In-position width for Cs contour control
Parameter input
Integer spindle
Detection unit
0 to 99999999
Set an in-position width for Cs contour control.
When bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1800 is set to 1, this parameter
specifies an in-position width at rapid traverse time for each axis.
Positional deviation limit during movement under Cs contour control
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
0 - 99999999
Set a positional deviation limit during movement under Cs contour
control.
Positional deviation limit during a stop under Cs contour control
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
0 - 99999999
Set a positional deviation limit during a stop under Cs contour
control.
Positional deviation limit during servo-off under Cs contour control
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
0 - 99999999
Set a positional deviation limit during servo-off under Cs contour
control.
- 247 -
5883
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5884
B-63330EN/03
Return feedrate override in rigid tapping
Parameter input
Integerspindle
%
0 - 200
Set a feedrate override to be applied to rigid tapping return operation
and return operation in a peck rigid tapping cycle. When 0 is specified,
the specification of 100% is assumed.
Acceleration/deceleration time constant for drilling axis cutting feed in rigid
tapping (TC1)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5885
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5886
Parameter input
Integerspindle
msec
0 - 4000
Set an acceleration/deceleration time constant at the first stage when
the acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and drilling
axis in rigid tapping is switched according to the S command (bit 1
(TSC) of parameter No. 5605 is set to 1) .
Cutting feed FL feedrate for the drilling axis in rigid tapping (FL1)
Parameter input
Realspindle
Set an FL feedrate at the first stage when the acceleration/deceleration
time constant for the spindle and drilling axis in rigid tapping is
switched according to the S command (bit 1 (TSC) of parameter No.
5605 is set to 1) .
Spindle speed for determining cutting feed acceleration/deceleration in rigid
tapping (S1)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 32767
Set a spindle speed at the first stage when the
acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and drilling
- 248 -
B-63330EN/03
5887
Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant for the drilling axis in

rigid tapping (TC2)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5888
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5889
Parameter input
Integerspindle
msec
0 - 4000
Set an acceleration/deceleration time constant at the second stage
when the acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and
drilling axis in rigid tapping is switched according to the S command
(bit 1 (TSC) of parameter No. 5605 is set to 1) .
Parameter input
Realspindle
Set an FL feedrate at the second stage when the
tapping (S2)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5890
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 32767
Set a spindle speed at the second stage when the
rigid tapping (TC3)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
msec
0 - 4000
Set an acceleration/deceleration time constant at the third stage when
the acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and drilling
- 249 -
5891
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5892
B-63330EN/03
Parameter input
Realspindle
Set an FL feedrate at the third stage when the
tapping (S3)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5893
Parameter input
Integerspindle
min-1
0 - 32767
Set a spindle speed at the third stage when the
rigid tapping (TC4)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5894
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integerspindle
msec
0 - 4000
Set an acceleration/deceleration time constant at the fourth stage
when the acceleration/deceleration time constant for the spindle and
drilling axis in rigid tapping is switched according to the S command
(bit 1 (TSC) of parameter No. 5605 is set to 1) .
Parameter input
Realspindle
Set an FL feedrate at the fourth stage when the
- 250 -
B-63330EN/03
Parameter Nos. 5884 to 5894 are used to change the cutting feed
acceleration/deceleration time constant/FL feedrate on the hole
machining axis in rigid tapping according to the S command. These
parameters set the time constant (TCx) /FL feedrate (FLx) at each
level and the spindle speed (Sx) to set levels. The following show the
relationship between the S command and FL feedrate, the relationship
between the S command and actual acceleration/deceleration time in
linear acceleration/deceleration, and the relationship between the S
command and actual acceleration/deceleration time in exponential
acceleration/deceleration:
Spindle speed command S
S S1
S1 < S S2
S2 < S S3
S3 < S
FL feedrate
FL1
FL2
FL3
FL4
Relationship between S command and FL feedrate
Acceleration/deceleration time
Acceleration/deceleration time
TC4
TC4
TC3
TC3
TC2
TC2
TC1
TC1
S1 S2 S3 S command
Relationship between S command and
actual acceleration/deceleration time
in linear acceleration/deceleration
- 251 -
S1 S2 S3 S command
Relationship between S command and
actual acceleration/deceleration time
in exponential acceleration/deceleration
5895
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Operation sequence pattern for the spindle positioning axis
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1-4
Set an operation sequence pattern for the spindle positioning axis.
1
5896
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Pattern 1: Used in a machine configuration where a mechanical

clamp is used. This pattern applies when clamping cannot be
performed with the spindle motor kept excited. With this pattern,
clamping/unclamping is performed after motor excitation is
turned off.
clamp is used. This pattern applies when unclamping performed
after spindle motor excitation is turned off causes the spindle to
move excessively. With this pattern, an operation sequence is
initiated after the spindle motor is excited, and upon completion
of the sequence, spindle motor excitation is turned off.
clamp is not used. An operation sequence is performed with the
spindle motor excited. So, clamping and unclamping operations
are unnecessary, but I/O signals SUCLPs, *SEUCLs, SCLPs,
and *SECLPs are used to carry out an operation sequence.
clamp is not used. An operation sequence is performed with the
spindle motor excited. So, clamping and unclamping operations
are unnecessary, and I/O signals SUCLPs, *SEUCLs, SCLPs,
and *SECLPs are not used.
M code for semi-fixed angular positioning (Min)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
6 - 97
Set an M code (start) specifying the semi-fixed angular positioning of
the spindle positioning axis.
NOTE
- When specifying an M code for semi-fixed angular
positioning, use parameter No. 5896 and No. 5897.
- M00 through M05, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be
used.
same time.
- 252 -
B-63330EN/03
5897
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
M code for semi-fixed angular positioning (Max)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
6 - 97
Set an M code (end) specifying the semi-fixed angular positioning of
the spindle positioning axis.
NOTE
- When specifying an M code for semi-fixed angular
positioning, use parameter No. 5896 and No. 5897.
- M00 through M05, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be
used.
same time.
5898
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Basic angle for semi-fixed angular positioning
Parameter input
Realspindle
degree
-60 - 60
Set a basic angle for semi-fixed angular positioning. Let be the
setting of parameter No. 5896,
be the setting of parameter No.
5897, and ` be the setting of parameter No. 5898. Then, the
relationship between the specified M code and the amount of
movement is as described below.
M code
Angular
displacement
5960
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
+1
2
+2
3
+3
4
...
...
(-+1)
Position gain in the servo mode
Parameter input
Integerspindle
0.01/sec
1 - 9999
Set an analog spindle position gain in the servo mode (rigid tapping,
spindle positioning, and so forth) . This position gain is used also as a
drilling axis position gain in rigid tapping.
- 253 -
5961
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Position gain multiplier (first stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
Set the position gain multiplier of the analog spindle for gear 1 in the
servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) .
Position gain multiplier GC is obtained from the following equation:
GC =
2048000 360 PC E
PLS SP L
PLS :
SP :
PC :
E:
Number of pulses output from the position coder (pulses/rev)

Number of gear teeth on the spindle side
Number of gear teeth on the position coder side
Specified voltage (V) for turning the spindle motor at 1000
min-1
L:
Angular displacement of the spindle (degrees) per spindle
motor rotation
Example: For the spindle motor and gear ratio given below, GC is
calculated as follows:
PLS = 4096 pulses/rev
SP
=1
PC
=1
E
= 2.2 V
L
= 360 deg
GC =
2048000 360 1 2.2

= 1100
4096 1 360
Note)On the assumption that the spindle motor used turns at 4500
min-1 at 10 V, 2.2 V is required to turn the spindle motor at 1000
min-1
5962
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Drift compensation value (first stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
Velo
-500 - 500
Set the drift compensation value of the analog spindle for gear 1 in
the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) .
Drift compensation DC (a voltage equivalent to positional deviation)
is obtained from the following equation:
DC = 0.000000192 G GC ER
G : Position gain in servo mode (0.01/sec)

GC : Position gain multiplier
ER : Positional deviation (detection unit)
- 254 -
B-63330EN/03
5963
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Position gain multiplier (second stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
GC =
2048000 360 PC E
PLS SP L
PLS :
SP :
PC :
E:

min-1
L:
motor rotation
SP
=1
PC
=1
E
= 2.2 V
L
= 360 deg
GC =
2048000 360 1 2.2

= 1100
4096 1 360
min-1.
5964
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Drift compensation value (second stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
Velo
-500 - 500
DC = 0.000000192 G GC ER

- 255 -
5965
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Position gain multiplier (third stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
GC =
2048000 360 PC E
PLS SP L
PLS :
SP :
PC :
E:

min-1
L:
motor rotation
SP
=1
PC
=1
E
= 2.2 V
L
= 360 deg
GC =
2048000 360 1 2.2

= 1100
4096 1 360
min-1.
5966
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Drift compensation value (third stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
Velo
-500 - 500
DC = 0.000000192 G GC ER

- 256 -
B-63330EN/03
5967
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Position gain multiplier (fourth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
GC =
2048000 360 PC E
PLS SP L
PLS :
SP :
PC :
E:

min-1
L:
motor rotation
SP
=1
PC
=1
E
= 2.2 V
L
= 360 deg
GC =
2048000 360 1 2.2

= 1100
4096 1 360
min-1.
5968
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Drift compensation value (ourth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
Velo
-500 - 500
DC = 0.000000192 G GC ER

- 257 -
5969
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Position gain multiplier (fifth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
GC =
2048000 360 PC E
PLS SP L
PLS :
SP :
PC :
E:

min-1
L:
motor rotation
SP
=1
PC
=1
E
= 2.2 V
L
= 360 deg
GC =
2048000 360 1 2.2

= 1100
4096 1 360
min-1.
5970
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Drift compensation value (first stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
Velo
-500 - 500
DC = 0.000000192 G GC ER

- 258 -
B-63330EN/03
5971
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Position gain multiplier (sixth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
GC =
2048000 360 PC E
PLS SP L
PLS :
SP :
PC :
E:

min-1
L:
motor rotation
SP
=1
PC
=1
E
= 2.2 V
L
= 360 deg
GC =
2048000 360 1 2.2

= 1100
4096 1 360
min-1.
5972
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Drift compensation value (sixth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
Velo
-500 - 500
DC = 0.000000192 G GC ER

- 259 -
5973
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Position gain multiplier (seventh stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
GC =
2048000 360 PC E
PLS SP L
PLS :
SP :
PC :
E:

min-1
L:
motor rotation
SP
=1
PC
=1
E
= 2.2 V
L
= 360 deg
GC =
2048000 360 1 2.2

= 1100
4096 1 360
min-1.
5974
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Drift compensation value (seventh stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
Velo
-500 - 500
DC = 0.000000192 G GC ER

- 260 -
B-63330EN/03
5975
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Position gain multiplier (eighth stage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
1 - 32767
GC =
2048000 360 PC E
PLS SP L
PLS :
SP :
PC :
E:

min-1
L:
motor rotation
SP
=1
PC
=1
E
= 2.2 V
L
= 360 deg
GC =
2048000 360 1 2.2

= 1100
4096 1 360
min-1.
5976
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Drift compensation value (eighthstage)
Parameter input
Integerspindle
Velo
-500 - 500
DC = 0.000000192 G GC ER

- 261 -
5977
B-63330EN/03
Rapid traverse rate for orientation

[Data type] Realspindle
[Unit of data] degree/min
Set a rapid traverse rate for analog spindle orientation in the servo
mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) .
NOTE
Set a rapid traverse rate so that the quantity of errors
is within a range from 128 pulses to 1024 pulses.
5978
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Time constant for orientation
Parameter input
Integerspindle
msec
0 - 4000
Set a time constant for analog spindle orientation in the servo mode
(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) .
5979
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
FL feedrate for orientation
Parameter input
Realspindle
degree/min
Set an FL feedrate for analog spindle orientation in the servo mode
(rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so forth) .
NOTE
Set an FL feedrate rate so that the quantity of
errors is within a range from the effective area to
1024 pulses.
5980
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Grid shift value for orientation
Parameter input
Integerspindle
detection unit
-2048 - 2048
Set a grid shift value from the orientation stop position of the analog
spindle in the servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, and so
forth) .
- 262 -
B-63330EN/03
5984
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5985
Speed for workpiece-axis automatic phase alignment
Parameter input
Real
degree/min
Set a speed for workpiece-axis automatic phase alignment.
Angle deviation from the spindle position (position of the one-rotation
signal) used as a reference for workpiece-axis phase alignment
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
5994
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
degree
table (A) )
Set an angle deviation from the spindle position (position of the onerotation signal) used as a reference for workpiece-axis phase
alignment.
Axial-feed axis number in helical compensation
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
Specify the ordinal number of an axial-feed axis in helical
compensation.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, the Z-axis is set
as the axial-feed axis.
When there are two or more parallel Z-axes, use
this parameter to specify which Z-axis is to be
used as the axial-feed axis.
- 263 -
5995
B-63330EN/03
Axis number of an axis to be synchronized using the method of command

specification for a hobbing machine
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5996
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
5997
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
1 - Max axes
When there are several groups of axes subject to synchronization
control (the axes for which bit 0 (SYN) of parameter No. 1955 is set
to 1) , an axis with which to start synchronization is specified using
the following command (for a hobbing machine) :
G81 T t L l ;
@t: Spindle speed (1 t 1000)
@l: Number of synchronized axis rotations (1 l 21)
Synchronization between the spindle and a specified axis is
established with the ratio of }l rotations about the synchronized axis
to t spindle rotations
t and l correspond to the number of teeth and the number of threads
on the hobbing machine, respectively.
If the above command is specified without setting this parameter
when there are multiple groups of axes to be synchronized, alarm
PS593 is issued.
When only one group of axes is to be synchronized, this parameter is
ignored.
Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB master axis rotation
Parameter input
Integeraxis
1 - 999999999
Set the number of pulses from the position detector per EGB master
axis rotation.
Specify this parameter with four pulses equaling one A/B phase cycle.
Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB slave axis rotation
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
1 - 999999999
Set the number of pulses from the position detector per EGB slave
axis rotation.
Specify the number of pulses output by the detection unit.
Example 1: When th EGB master axis is the spindle, and the EGB
slave axis is the C-axis
- 264 -
B-63330EN/03
CNC
Slave axis
n/m
Command pulse
CMR
Least command increment

0.001 deg
Error
counter
Follow-up
Speed/current
control
CMR
Motor
Gear ratio
A
Detection unit
Synchronous switch
Dummy
p/rev
Detector
Synchronization
coefficient
Error
counter
Detector
C-axis
p/rev
Gear ratio B
Spindle
Spindle-to-detector gear ratio B:

1/1 (The spindle and detector are connected directly.)
Number of pulses from the detector of the spindle :
80000 pulses/rev
(calculated assuming that four pulses are generated in one A/B
phase cycle)
C-axis gear ratio A:
1/36 (The C-axis rotates one turn while the motor rotates 36
turns.)
Number of pulses from the detector of the C-axis : 1,000,000
pulses/rev
C-axis CMR: 1
Flexible feed gear n/m: 1/100
In this case, the number of pulses per spindle rotation is obtained as
follows:
800001/1 = 80000
So, set 80000 in parameter No. 5996.
The number of pulses per C-axis rotation by the detection unit is
obtained as follows:
10000001/361/100=360000
In parameter No. 5997, set 360000.
Example 2: When the spindle-to-detector gear ratio B is 2/3 in the
above example (the detector rotates two turns while the spindle
rotates three turns)
In this case, the number of pulses per spindle rotation is obtained as
follows:

The result will be a fraction. In such a case, change the value set in
parameter No. 5997 while leaving the ratio of parameter Nos. 5996 to
5997 unchanged.

- 265 -
B-63330EN/03
Therefore, set 160000 in parameter No. 5996, and 1080000 in

parameter No. 5997.
Only the ratio of parameter Nos. 5996 to 5997 needs to be satisfied. A
fraction can be reduced to its lowest terms. In the above example, 16
can be specified in parameter No. 5996, and 108 can be specified in
parameter No. 5997.
Actual numbers of pulses are sometimes not specified with the
parameters, but the ratio of the actual number of pulses for the master
axis to the actual number of pulses for the slave axis is always
maintained. As show in Example 2, if the calculated number of pulses
proves to be a fraction, because of the gearing between the master and
slave axes, the values to be specified with the parameters can be
changed while keeping their ratio as is. In such a case, G81.5 cannot
be used in the following specification methods:
G81.5 T_ C_ ;
A speed is specified for the master axis, and the

amount of movement is specified for the slave
axis.
G81.5 P_ C0 L_ ; A number of pulses is specified for the master
axis, and a speed is specified for the slave axis.
G81.5 X_ C0 L_ ; The amount of movement is specified for the
master axis, and a speed is specified for the slave
axis
- 266 -
B-63330EN/03
4.22
TOOL COMPENSATION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 6000

AND LATER)
#7
#6
#5
6000
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
EVO
#1
PNH
#2
PCI
#4
LXY
#4
LXY
#3
#2
#1
#0
PCI
PNH
EVO
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether an offset change is valid starting with the next
block where a D or H code is specified or the next block to be
buffered.
0: Valid starting with the next block where a D or H code is
specified.
1: Valid starting with the next block buffered.
Specifies whether the offset number of a tool offset (G46 to G48) is
specified using a D code or H code.
0: Specified using a D code.
1: Specified using an H code.
Specifies whether a tool offset (G45 to G48) is valid for a circular
command.
0: Not valid.
1: Valid.
Specifies whether the axis to which tool length compensation (G43,
G44) is applied is the Z-axis at all times, or an arbitrary programmed
axis.
0: Z-axis at all times.
1: Arbitrary programmed axis.
- 267 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
6001
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
CSU
#5
#4
#3
#2
CNI
#1
#0
CNC
CSU
Parameter input
Bit
This bit, used with bit 7 (CSC) of parameter No. 6003, sets the
startup/cancel type of cutter compensation.
CSC
CSU
Type
Type A
Operation
A compensation vector perpendicular to the block next to the
startup block or the block preceding the cancellation block is
output.
Tool center path
G41
N2
Programmed path
N1
Type B
A compensation vector perpendicular to the startup block or

cancellation block and an intersection vector are output.
Intersection point
Tool center path
G41
Programmed
path
N2
N1
Type C
When the startup block or cancellation block specifies no

movement operation, the tool is shifted by the cutter
compensation amount in a direction perpendicular to the block
next to the startup or the block before cancellation block.
Intersection point
N3
Shift
G41
Tool center
path
N2
N1
Programmed
path
When the block specifies movement operation, the type is set

according to the CSU setting; if CSU is 0, type A is set, and if
CSU is 1, type B is set.
- 268 -
B-63330EN/03
#1
CNC
This bit, used with bit 6 (CNI) of parameter No. 6001, selects the
method for making an interference check in cutter compensation
mode.
CNI
CNC
Operation
---
Interference check is enabled. The direction and the anlgle of an

arc are checked.
Interference check is enabled. Only the angle of an arc is
checked.
Interference check is disabled.
For the operation taken when the interference check shows the
occurrence of an rference (overcutting) , see the description of bit 5
(CAV) of parameter No. 6008.
NOTE
Checking of only the direction cannot be set.
#6
CNI
Specifies whether an interference check in the cutter compensation

mode is valid.
0: Valid. By setting bit 1 (CNC) of parameter No. 6001, a direction
check and circular angle check are made.
1: Not valid.
#7
6002
[Input type]
[Data type]
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
QNI
#1
#0
OFC
OFA
Parameter input
Bit
The increment system and valid setting range of tool offsets are
determined.
OFE
No.6007#0
0
0
0
0
1
OFD
No.6004#0
0
0
0
1
0
OFC
No.6002#1
0
0
1
0
0
Metric input
OFA
Unit
No.6002#0
1
0.01
0
0.001
0
0.0001
0
0.00001
0
0.000001
OFE
No.6007#0
0
0
0
0
1
OFD
No.6004#0
0
0
0
1
0
OFC
No.6002#1
0
0
1
0
0
Inch input
OFA
Unit
No.6002#0
1
0.001
0
0.0001
0
0.00001
0
0.000001
0
0.0000001
- 269 -
Geometric offset Wear compensation

mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
9999.99
9999.999
9999.9999
9999.99999
999.999999
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
9999.99
9999.999
9999.9999
9999.99999
999.999999
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Geometric offset Wear compensation

inch
inch
inch
inch
inch
999.999
999.9999
999.99999
999.999999
99.9999999
inch
inch
inch
inch
inch
999.999
999.9999
999.99999
999.999999
99.9999999
inch
inch
inch
inch
inch
#6
QNI
Specifies whether, in tool length measurement, a tool offset number is

specified by operation on the MDI unit (cursor-based selection) or by
a signal (tool offset number input signal (OFN0 to OFN5) ) from the
machine.
0: Specified by operation on the MDI unit (cursor-based selection) .
1: Specified by a signal (tool offset number input signal (OFN0 to
OFN5) ) from the machine.
#7
6003
[Input type]
[Data type]
B-63330EN/03
#6
CSC
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
WMC
WMH
WMA
TMA
TC3
TC2
Parameter input
Bit
Bit 5 (WMC) to bit 0 (TC2) are valid only when the tool
length/workpiece origin measurement function is provided.
#0
#1
#2
TC2
TC3
When soft key [ MEASURE ] or [ MEASUR+ ] is selected to set a

tool length compensation amount during the measurement of the tool
length, the tool automatically moves to the tool change position. TC2
and TC3 set the tool change position at one of the reference positions.
TC3
TC2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Tool change position

First reference position
Second reference position
Third reference position
Fourth reference position
TMA
#3
WMA
#4
WMH
#5
WMC
#7
CSC
0: A tool length measurement is made only for the Z-axis.

1: A tool length measurement can be made for each axis.
Specifies whether a workpiece origin offset measurement is made for
the Z-axis only or can be made for each axis.
0: Z-axis only.
1: Each axis.
Specifies whether a workpiece origin offset measurement is made for
end faces only or for both end faces and hole centers.
0: End faces only.
1: Both end faces and hole centers.
Specifies whether an axis for workpiece origin offset measurement is
specified by axis name input or selected with the cursor.
0: Specified by axis name input.
1: Selected with the cursor.
Specifies the type of operation to be performed at start-up and
cancellation of tool side offset in cutter compensation or threedimensional cutter compensation.
0: Type A or type B. (Which type is used is determined by bit 0
(CSU) of parameter No. 6001.)
1: Type C.
- 270 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
6004
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
FTP
#3
SU2
#4
SU3
#5
CYA
#6
CYS
#6
#5
#4
#3
CYS
CYA
SU3
SU2
AIM
#0
OFD
specified.
For more information, see the description of bit 1 (OFC) and bit
0 (OFA) of parameter No. 6002.
Specifies the type of fixture offset.
0: Move type. (A movement is made when the fixture offset is
changed,)
1: Shift type. (No movement is made when the fixture offset is
changed.)
Specifies whether a spindle unit compensation vector is included in
relative position display and absolute position display.
0: Included.
1: Not included.
Specifies whether to enable or disable parameter input on the spindle
unit compensation screen.
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
Specifies whether to perform cylindrical interpolation cutting point
compensation.
0: Perform.
1: Do not perform.
Specifies whether when the cylindrical interpolation cutting point
compensation function is used, cutting point compensation is
performed between blocks or together with a block movement if the
cutting point compensation value is less than the setting of parameter
No. 6112.
0: Performed between blocks.
1: Performed together with a block movement if the cutting point
compensation value is less than the setting of parameter No.
6112.
#6
#5
6005
#1
#1
FTP
Parameter input
Bit
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#2
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
AIM
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to issue an alarm when cutter compensation is
specified in the MDI mode.
0: Issue no alarm. (In this case, cutter compensation is enabled
for commands in the MDI mode, and an intersection calculation
is made. If MDI intervention is performed, however, no
intersection calculation is made, and the previous vector is held.)
1: Issue an alarm (PS0275) .
- 271 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
6007
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
OFE
#2
NR3
#4
ZMV
#3
#2
#1
#0
NR3
OFE
Parameter input
Bit
specified.
For more information, see the description of bit 1 (OFC) and bit
0 (OFA) of parameter No. 6002.
When the programmable mirror image function is used, a threedimensional tool compensation vector is generated as follows:
0: The setting of bit 0 (PNR) of parameter No. 7610 is followed.
1: The mirror axis components of the offset vector are only
inverted.
If bit 0 (PNR) of parameter No. 7610 is set to 1 even when NR3 is set
to 0, the same effect as when NR3 is set to 1 is obtained in threedimensional tool compensation. However, bit 0 (PNR) of parameter
No. 7610 also applies to two-dimensional cutter compensation. So,
use NR3 to affect three-dimensional tool compensation only.
7610#0
0
6007
#2
0 The mirror axis components of The mirror axis components of

an offset vector are inverted.
an offset vector are inverted,
and G41/G42 is also inverted.
(See Note.)
1 The mirror axis components of an offset of three-dimensional
tool compensation are inverted. (Bit 0 of parameter No. 7610
specifies the operation of two-dimensional cutter compensation.)
NOTE
If two or more programmable mirror axes are specified,
G41/G42 is not inverted. Mirror axis components are
the axis components, among vector components, to
which the programmable mirror function is applicable.
#5
ZMV
When the offset of tool length compensation is changed with bit 4

(LXY) of parameter No. 6000 set to 0 and bit 0 (EVO) of parameter
No. 6000 set to 1, the new offset becomes valid from:
0: A block to be buffered next;
1: A block containg the next Z-axis move command or H code
command.
This parameter is valid only when bit 4 (LXY) of parameter No. 6000
is set to 0.
ZMV and bit 0 (EVO) of parameter No. 6000 have the following
relationship:
- 272 -
B-63330EN/03
6008
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
ODI
#2
CCC
#3
WCD
ZMV
(No.6007#5)
EVO
(No.6000#0)
#7
#6
#5
NAG
NAA
CAV
Time when a new offset becomes valid

New offset becomes valid in a block
specifying the next H code.
New offset becomes valid in a block to be
buffered next.
New offset becomes valid in a block
specifying the next Z-axis move command
or H code.
#4
#3
#2
WCD
CCC
#1
#0
ODI
Parameter input
Bit
The tool compensation value is:
0: Used as the radius.
1: Used as the diameter.
Specifies whether the type of outer corner connection in the cutter
compensation mode is linear connection type or circular connection
type.
0: Linear connection type
1: Circular connection type
Specify the direction of the compensation vector that differs
according to the sign of the offset value in grinding wheel wear
compensation.
6008#3
Offset value in D code

Negative
Positive
From command end position
From compensation center
toward compensation center
toward command end
position
From command end position From compensation center
toward compensation center toward command end
position
Compensation vector
Tool center path

Compensation
center
Programmed path
From compensation center toward command end position
- 273 -
B-63330EN/03
Compensation vector
Compensation
center
Tool center path
Programmed path
From command end position to compensation center
#5
CAV
#6
NAA
Specifies operation to be performed when an interference check has

detected the occurrence of interference (overcutting) .
0: An alarm (PS0272) is issued, and machining is stopped
(interference check alarm function) .
1: The tool path is changed to avoid interference (overcutting) , and
machining is continued (interference check avoidance function) .
For the method of interference check, see the descriptions of bit 1
(CNI) of parameter No. 6001 and bit 6 (CAV) of parameter No. 6001.
If the interference check avoidance function judges that the avoidance
operation will be dangerous or that further interference will occur for
the interference avoidance vector, the following action takes place:
0: An alarm is issued.
If the avoidance operation is determined to be dangerous, alarm
PS0278 is issued.
If further interference for the interference avoidance vector is
determined, alarm PS0279 is issued.
1: The avoidance operation will continue without issuing any
alarm.
NOTE
Normally, this bit should be set to 0.
#7
NAG
In the interference check/avoidance function of cutter compensation,

when the length of the gap vector is 0:
0: An avoidance operation is performed.
1: No avoidance operation is performed.
- 274 -
B-63330EN/03
6009
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation mode
Setting input
Integer
3-8
Specify the number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation
mode. If a value equal to or less than 3 is specified, the specification
of 3 blocks is assumed. If a value equal to or greater than 8 is
specified, the specification of 8 blocks is assumed. As more blocks
are read, an overcutting (interference) forecast can be made for much
more blocks ahead. In this case, however, more blocks are read and
analyzed, so that a longer block processing time is required.
This parameter is not enabled immediately when the MDI mode is set
by stopping the cutter compensation mode. The new setting of this
parameter is enabled when the cutter compensation mode is once
cancelled, and the mode is set again.
6010
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Limit for ignoring the small movement resulting from cutter compensation
Setting input
Real
table (A) )
When the tool moves around a corner in cutter compensation mode,
the limit for ignoring the small travel amount resulting from cutter
compensation is set. This limit eliminates the interruption of buffering
caused by the small travel amount generated at the corner and any
change in feedrate due to the interruption.
If Vx Vlimit and VY Vlimit,
this vector is ignored.
Vx
VY
S
r
Tool center path
Even if Vx Vlimit and

VY Vlimit, vector to singleblock stop point remains.
Programmed path
Vlimit is determined depending on the setting in parameter No. 6010.
- 275 -
6011
B-63330EN/03
Constant denominator for three-dimensional tool compensation or tool

length compensation in a specified direction
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Real
table (A) )
Specify the magnitude of a compensation vector.
When this parameter is set to 0,
6020
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
6021
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
I2 +J2 +K2
is set.
Bias set for the tool offset number for each axis
Setting input
Integeraxis
From 0 through the number of the tool offsets
For parallel operation, set a bias for the tool offset number for each
axis. Namely, the value set in this parameter is added to the specified
offset number, and the resultant offset data is used as the tool offset
for the axis.
Bias set for the tool length compensation number for each axis
Setting input
Integeraxis
From 0 through the number of the tool offsets
For parallel operation, set a bias for the tool length compensation
number for each axis. Namely, the value set in this parameter is added
to the specified offset number, and the resultant offset data is used as
the tool length compensation value for the axis.
- 276 -
B-63330EN/03
6024
Distance (L) from reference tool tip position to the reference measurement
surface
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Machine zero
point
(Tool tip
position of
reference tool)
Parameter input
Realaxis
table (A) )
This parameter is used for tool length/workpiece zero point
measurement. For each axis, this parameter sets the distance from the
reference tool tip position to the reference measurement surface (L in
the figure below) when the machine is at the machine zero point.
Tool
T01
Tool
T01
OFSL
OFSL
Zm
Zm
Zt
L
Measurement surface
Workpiece
Measurement
surface
Reference
measurement
surface
@Hm
Table on the machine
Reference block
Table on the machine

Hm
L: Distance from the reference tool tip to the reference measurement surface (machine
coordinates of the reference measurement surface)
Hm: Distance from the reference measurement surface to actual measurement surface
Zm: Distance from the tool tip of the measured tool at the machine zero point to the
measurement surface
Zt: Distance from the tool tip of the measured tool at the machine zero point to the
reference measurement surface
OFSL: Tool length compensation (OFSL = Zm-Hm-L)
- 277 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
6029
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
ONI
#0
ONI
Setting input
Bit
The I, J, and K commands of three-dimensional tool compensation are
specified as follows:
0: The increment system of the reference axis is followed.
1: Up to nine significant digits (nine digits in the integer part to
nine digits in the decimal part) can be specified.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, the I, J, and K
commands of three-dimensional tool compensation
must be specified using a decimal point. If these
commands are specified without a decimal point,
alarm PS0283 is issued.
#7
#6
#5
6030
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
OKI
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
OKI
Parameter input
Bit
The I, J, and K commands in three-dimensional tool compensation
mode conform to:
0: The conventional specifications.
When the I, J, and K commands are all omitted in threedimensional tool compensation mode, the previous vector is
maintained.
When one or two of the I, J, and K commands are omitted
in three-dimensional tool compensation mode, their
components are assumed to be 0.
1: The new specifications.
When the I, J, and K commands are all omitted in threedimensional tool compensation mode, the previous vector is
maintained.
When one or two of the I, J, and K commands are omitted
in three-dimensional tool compensation mode, the previous
values are assumed.
- 278 -
B-63330EN/03
6050
First axis coordinate of compensation center 1 in grinding wheel wear

compensation
6051
Second axis coordinate of compensation center 1 in grinding wheel wear

compensation
6052

compensation
6053

compensation
6054

compensation
6055

compensation
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6056
Parameter input
Real number
The increment system of the reference axis is followed.
table (A).)
(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinates (in the workpiece coordinate system) of a
compensation center in grinding wheel wear compensation.
Axis number of the first axis of the compensation plane in grinding wheel
wear compensation
6057
Axis number of the second axis of the compensation plane in grinding wheel
wear compensation
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
Parameter input
Integer
1 to the number of controlled axes
Set the controlled-axis numbers of the first and second linear axes to
which grinding wheel wear compensation is applied.
NOTE
Before changing an axis of the compensation plane,
set compensation vector cancel mode, or cancel
grinding wheel wear compensation.
- 279 -
B-63330EN/03
6059
Rotation axis for dynamic tool compensation (first group)
6060
Linear axis 1 for dynamic tool compensation (first group)
6061
Linear axis 2 for dynamic tool compensation (first group)
6062
Rotation axis for dynamic tool compensation (second group)
6063
Linear axis 1 for dynamic tool compensation (second group)
6064
Linear axis 2 for dynamic tool compensation (second group)
6065
Rotation axis for dynamic tool compensation (third group)
6066
Linear axis 1 for dynamic tool compensation (third group)
6067
Linear axis 2 for dynamic tool compensation (third group)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
Specify a rotation axis and two linear axes constituting a rotation
plane for dynamic tool compensation. The order in which the two
linear axes are specified must be such that the rotation in the positive
direction about the rotation axis agrees with the rotation from the
positive side of linear axis 1 to the positive side of linear axis 2.
Up to three groups of a rotation axis and two linear axes can be
specified. In dynamic tool compensation value calculation, the data of
the rotation axis of the first group is calculated first. Then, the data of
the rotation axes of the second and third groups is calculated.
If the second or third group is not required, specify 0 in the
corresponding rotation axis parameter.
- 280 -
B-63330EN/03
6068
Rotation axis for fixture offset (first group)
6069
Linear axis 1 for fixture offset (first group)
6070
Linear axis 2 for fixture offset (first group)
6071
Rotation axis for fixture offset (second group)
6072
Linear axis 1 for fixture offset (second group)
6073
Linear axis 2 for fixture offset (second group)
6074
Rotation axis for fixture offset (third group)
6075
Linear axis 1 for fixture offset (third group)
6076
Linear axis 2 for fixture offset (third group)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
Specify a rotation axis and two linear axes constituting a rotation
plane for fixture offset. The order in which the two linear axes are
specified must be such that the rotation in the positive direction about
the rotation axis agrees with the rotation from the positive side of
linear axis 1 to the positive side of linear axis 2.
Up to three groups of a rotation axis and two linear axes can be
specified. In fixture offset calculation, the data of the rotation axis of
the first group is calculated first. Then, the data of the rotation axes of
the second and third groups is calculated.
If the second or third group is not required, specify 0 in the
corresponding rotation axis parameter.
6080
Rotation axis for three-dimensional cutter compensation and so forth (first group)
6081
Linear axis 1 for three-dimensional cutter compensation and so forth (first group)
6082
6083
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
Set the rotation axis and linear axes to perform three-dimensional
cutter compensation/spindle unit compensation/inclined rotary head
tool length compensation (first group) .
- 281 -
6084
B-63330EN/03
Angle of inclination for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cutter

compensation and so forth (first group)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6085
Parameter input
Real
degree
table (A) )
Set the angle of rotation for the rotation axis to perform threedimensional cutter compensation/spindle unit compensation/inclined
rotary head tool length compensation (first group) .
Rotation axis for three-dimensional cutter compensation and so forth
(second group)
6086
Linear axis 1 for three-dimensional cutter compensation and so forth

(second group)
6087

(second group)
6088

(second group)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
6089
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
Set the rotation axis and linear axes to perform three-dimensional
cutter compensation/spindle unit compensation/inclined rotary head
tool length compensation (second group) .
Angle of inclination for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cutter
compensation and so forth (second group)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
degree
table (A) )
Set the angle of rotation for the rotation axis to perform threedimensional cutter compensation/spindle unit compensation/inclined
rotary head tool length compensation (second group) .
Parameter Nos. 6080 to 6089
- 282 -
B-63330EN/03
First group
6080
6081
6082
6083
6084
Rotation axis
Linear axis 1
Linear axis 2
Linear axis 3
Angle of inclination
Second group
6085
6086
6087
6088
6089
These parameters set the relationship between the rotation axis

and rotation plane.
Two groups can be set. Therefore, machines controlled with two
rotation axes are supported.
In the calculation of the tool direction, calculation for the
rotation axis of the first group is made first, then based on the
calculation result, calculation for the rotation axis for the second
group is made.
When two rotation axes are used, the rotation plane may be
changed by the rotation of the other rotation axis. In this case, set
the rotation plane obtained when the rotation axis position is 0
degrees.
When there is one rotation axis, set the rotation axis of the
second group to 0.
- In general, the direction vector of a rotation axis has three direction
components. This function supports direction vectors with one
direction component and two direction components. In each case,
set the following:
A) When the direction vecotor of a rotation axis has one
direction component (type A)
The rotation axis rotates about one of the basic three axes.
1) Set axis numbers for the rotation axis, linear axis 1,
and linear axis 2.
2) Set the linear axis 3 and the angle of inclination to 0.
3) The rotation axis is defined as follows:
- The rotation axis rotates about an axis that
perpendicularly intersects the plane formed by linear
axis 1 and linear axis 2.
- When the rotation axis rotates from the positive
direction of linear axis 1 to the positive direction of
linear axis 2, the rotation axis is said to rotate in the
positive direction.
Z
C
B)
When the direction vector of a rotation axis has two

direction components (type B)
The rotation axis rotates about an axis that lies in a plane
formed by any two of the basic three axes.
- 283 -
B-63330EN/03
1)
2)
3)
4)
Set axis numbers for the rotation axis, linear axis 1,

linear axis 2, and linear axis 3.
The linear axes 1, 2, and 3 form a right-handed
coordinate system in this order.
The angle of inclination is defined as follows:
- Rotation is performed in the plane formed by linear
axes 3 and 1.
linear axis 1, the angle of inclination is positive.
- When the rotation axis and linear axis 3 match, the
angle of inclination is 0 degrees.
When the angle of inclination is 0 degrees, the rotation
axis is defined as follows:
- The rotation axis rotates about an axis that
perpendicularly intersects the plane formed by linear
axes 1 and 2.
linear axis 2, the rotation axis is said to rotate in the
positive direction.
Z
B
Y
: Angle of
inclination
X
6104
Reference angle for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cutter

compensation and so forth (first group)
6105
Reference angle for the rotation axis for three-dimensional cutter

compensation and so forth (second group)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
degree
table (A) )
Set a reference angle for the rotation axis to perform threedimensional cutter compensation/inclined rotary head tool length
compensation.
Set an angle for the rotation axis assumed when a tool axis direction
(parameter No. 6106 to No. 6107) is set.
Usually, set 0.0.
- 284 -
B-63330EN/03
6106
Reference angle for the tool axis in the plane formed by linear axes 2 and 3
(RA)
6107
Reference angle for the tool axis in the plane formed by linear axes 3 and 1
(RB)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
degree
table (A) )
Set the direction of each rotation axis to perform three-dimensional
cutter compensation/inclined rotary head tool length compensation by
using angles RA and RB.
Parameter Nos. 6106 to 6107
The direction of a compensation vector is set by setting an angular
displacement (RA, RB) from the direction of linear axis 3.
RA: Rotation is performed in the plane formed by linear axis 2 and
linear axis 3. When rotation is performed from the positive
direction of linear axis 2 to the positive direction of linear axis 3,
the direction of the rotation is positive.
RB: Rotation is performed in the plane formed by linear axis 3 and
linear axis 1. When rotation is performed from the positive
direction of linear axis 3 to the positive direction of linear axis 1,
the direction of the rotation is positive.
Linear axes 1, 2, and 3 are set in parameter Nos. 6081 to 6083.
When tool axis and
linear axis 3 match
Linear axis 3
Linear axis 2
RA = 0.0
RB = 0.0
Linear axis 1
- 285 -
B-63330EN/03
When tool axis and

linear axis 1 match
Linear axis 3
Linear axis 2
RA = 0.0
RB = 90.0
Linear axis 1
6109
Tool offset axis number for the XY plane
6110
Tool offset axis number for the ZX plane
6111
Tool offset axis number for the YZ plane
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
6112
Parameter input
Integer
1 - Max axes
Specify a tool offset axis that intersects the cylindrical rotation axis at
right angles.
Limit for changing cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation in a
single block
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
1 - 999999999
The following operation is performed, depending on the setting of
parameter No. 6004:
1) When CYS = 0
If the amount of cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation
is smaller than the value set in this parameter, cylindrical
interpolation cutting point compensation is not performed. Instead,
this ignored amount of cylindrical interpolation cutting point
compensation is added to the next amount of cylindrical interpolation
cutting point compensation to determine whether to perform
cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation.
2) When CYS = 1
If the amount of cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation
is smaller than the value set in this parameter, cylindrical
interpolation cutting point compensation is performed together with
the movement of the specified block.
- 286 -
B-63330EN/03
NOTE
Set this parameter as follows:
Setting > (setting for a rotation axis in parameter
No. 1422)*4/3
where 4/3 is a constant for internal processing.
6113
Limit of travel distance moved with the cylindrical interpolation cutting point
compensation in the previous block unchanged.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6114
Parameter input
Real
1 - 999999999
The following operation is performed, depending on the type of
interpolation:
1) For linear interpolation
If the travel distance in a specified block is smaller than the value set
in this parameter, machining is performed without changing the
cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation in the previous
block.
2) For circular interpolation
If the diameter of a specified arc is smaller than the value set in this
parameter, machining is performed without changing the cylindrical
interpolation cutting point compensation in the previous block.
Cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation is not performed
according to a circular movement.
Limit for assuming the block as a non-movement block in intersection
calculation for tool side compensation (G41.2, G42.2)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
table (A) )
When an intersection calculation is made for tool side compensation,
the block is assumed to be a block involving no movement if the
difference in the coordinates of two points on the compensation plane
is smaller than the value set in this parameter. In such a case, an
additional block ahead is read for intersection calculation. Usually, set
a value about 0.01 mm.
- 287 -
6115
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6122
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
6123
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6124
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Angle determination fluctuation value for leading edge offset
Parameter input
Real
degree
table (A) )
This parameter sets a variation range used to determine whether the
included angle between the tool direction vector (VT) and move
direction vector (VM) is 0, 180, or 90 during leading edge
offsetting.
For example, let the included angle between VT and VM be (0
180) , and the angle set in this parameter be . Then, is
determined as follows:
When 0
=0
When (180-) 180
=180
When (90-) (90+)
=90
Normally, set around 1.0 in this parameter.
Axis number of a rotation axis to be preset (first group)
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
Set the axis number of a rotation axis to be preset for spindle unit
offset preset.
Preset amount of a rotation axis (first group)
Parameter input
Real
degree
table (A) )
Set the preset amount of a rotation axis to be preset for spindle unit
offset preset.
Axis number of a rotation axis to be preset (second group)
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
offset preset.
- 288 -
B-63330EN/03
6125
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6126
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
6127
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6128
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
6129
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Preset amount of a rotation axis (second group)
Parameter input
Real
degree
table (A) )
offset preset.
Axis number of a rotation axis to be preset (third group)
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
offset preset.
Preset amount of a rotation axis (third group)
Parameter input
Real
degree
table (A) )
offset preset.
M code for starting presetting
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 99999999
Set an M code for starting presetting for spindle unit offset preset.
M code for ending presetting
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 99999999
Set an M code for ending presetting for spindle unit offset preset.
- 289 -
6130
B-63330EN/03
Distance from the program-specified point (pivot point) to the tool tip
position (cutting point)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
Depend on the increment system of the reference axis.
table (A))
Set the distance from the program-specified point to the actual cutting
point to calculate a three-dimensional cutter compensation vector at
the tool tip position.
If this parameter is 0, the tool tip support of the three-dimensional
cutter compensation function is not effective.
Change the setting of this parameter before turning the threedimensional cutter compensation mode to on.
6140
Axis number of linear axis 1 in the cutter compensation for Rotary table
6141
6142
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
1 to the number of controlled axes
Set the axis numbers of the three linear axes used for the cutter
compensation for Rotary table.
(The linear axes correspond to the coordinate axes in the workpiece
coordinate system.)
- 290 -
B-63330EN/03
6143
Axis number of the rotation axis in the cutter compensation for Rotary table
(first set)
6144
Axis number of the linear axis corresponding to the rotation axis in the
cutter compensation for Rotary table (first set)
6145
Axis number of the rotation axis in the cutter compensation for Rotary table
(second set)
6150
Reference angle of the rotation axis in the cutter compensation for Rotary
table (first set)
6146
Axis number of the linear axis corresponding to the rotation axis in the
cutter compensation for Rotary table (second set)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Invalid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
From 1 to the number of controlled axes
Set the axis numbers of the rotation axes used for the cutter
compensation for Rotary table, as well as the axis numbers of the
linear axes corresponding to the rotation axes. Up to two sets can be
set. The orientation of the rotation axis in the first set depends on
the angle of the rotation axis in the second set. If there is only one
rotation axis, set 0 for parameter No. 6145.
The axis numbers of the linear axes corresponding to the rotation axes
indicate the linear axes about which the rotation axes rotate. See the
table below.
Linear axis about which

a rotation axis rotates
Value set for parameter

No. 6144 or 6146
Rotation direction of the rotation

axis
Direction with an
angular displacement
of 0
Linear axis 1
Axis number of linear axis

1
2
3
Foward direction of linear axis 2 to

forward direction of linear axis 3
Forward direction of
linear axis 2
linear axis 3
linear axis 1
Linear axis 2
Linear axis 3
If the rotation direction of the rotation axis is the reverse of what is

described in the table above, set a negative value for parameter No.
6143 or 6145.
If the direction with an agular displacement of 0 differs from what is
described in the table above, specify parameters Nos. 6150 and 6151,
assuming that the angle of the rotation axis in relation to the direction
described in the table above as the reference angle.
- 291 -
6150
B-63330EN/03
table (first set)
6151
table (second set)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6154
Parameter input
Real
Degrees
Follows the increment system of the reference axis.
9 digits of the least input increment. (See the Standard parameter
setting table (A).)
(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the angles of reference positions on the rotation axes used for
cutter compensation for Rotary table.
Workpiece coordinates of the origin of the table coordinate system in the
cutter compensation for Rotary table
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real axis
Follows the increment system of the corresponding axis.
9 digits of the least input increment. (See the Standard parameter
setting table (A).)
(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the workpiece coordinates of the origin of the table coordinate
system used for the cutter compensation for Rotary table. Specify
the parameter for the three axes specified for parameters Nos. 6140 to
6142. The intersection of two rotation axes is assumed to be the
origin of the table coordinate system.
- 292 -
B-63330EN/03
4.23
CANNED CYCLE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 6200 AND

LATER)
#7
#6
6200
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
FXY
#1
DWL
#2
SIJ
#3
FCU
#4
UIL
#5
EXC
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
EXC
UIL
FCU
SIJ
DWL
FXY
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether the drilling axis in a canned cycle is the Z-axis at
all times or an axis selected by the program.
0: Z-axis at all times
1: Axis selected by the program
Specifies whether a P-based dwell command in a tapping canned
cycle is valid.
0: Not valid.
1: Valid.
Specifies how to set the tool retraction direction and distance after
spindle orientation in a fine boring or back boring canned cycle.
0: Set the tool retraction direction by parameter No. 6240, and set
the distance in the program (Q) .
1: Set the tool retraction direction and distance in the program (I, J,
K) .
Specifies how to make a movement to a drilling position in a canned
cycle.
0: Always use rapid traverse.
1: Use rapid traverse in the positioning mode (G00) , and use linear
interpolation in other modes (G01, G02, G03) .
Specifies whether to change the initial level position when the origin
is set through the MDI unit in a canned cycle.
0: Do not change.
1: Change. The position set through the MDI unit becomes the
initial level position.
Specifies whether G81 is used to specify a canned cycle or external
operation command.
0: G81 specifies a canned cycle.
1: G81 specifies an external operation command.
- 293 -
6201
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
FXB
#1
NM5
#2
RES
#3
RFA
#4
FIN
#5
FM2
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
RFE
NFM
FM2
FIN
RFA
RES
NM5
FXB
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies how to control the spindle in a canned cycle.
0: Control the spindle by using the spindle stop command signal
(SSP) and the spindle reverse rotation command signal (SRV)
(canned cycle I) instead of using M codes.
1: Control the spindle by using M codes (M03, M04, M05)
(canned cycle II) .
Specifies whether to output M05 when the direction of rotation of the
spindle is changed from forward (M03) to reverse (M04) or vice versa
in a canned cycle.
0: Output M05. That is, M05 is output before M03 or M04 is
output. (M05-M04 or M05-M03)
1: Do not output M05. That is, M05 is not output before M03 or
M04 is output.
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (FXB) of parameter No. 6201 is set
to 1.
Specifies how to cancel rigid tapping.
0: Cancel rigid tapping when the spindle enters the speed control
mode.
1: Cancel rigid tapping when the spindle stop confirmation signal is
set to 0 after the spindle enters the speed control mode.
Specifies whether to issue an alarm for an F command that has
significant fractional digits specified in rigid tapping.
0: Do not issue an alarm.
1: Issue an alarm.
Specifies the signal to be entered to indicate when operation for the
spindle stop command signal (SSP) , the spindle reverse rotation
command signal (SRV) , or the external operation signal (EF) has
been completed.
0: FFIN signal (completion signal dedicated to the SSP, SRV and
EF signals)
1: FIN signal (completion signal for M, S, T, and B codes)
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (FXB) of parameter No. 6201 is set
to 0.
Specifies whether to send the FMF signal after return to point R or the
initial position when the spindle stop command signal (SSP) or
spindle reverse rotation command signal (SRV) is output.
0: Do not send the FMF signal (command for reading the SSP and
SRV signals) .
1: Send the FMF signal.
This parameter is valid when bit 6 (NFM) of parameter No. 6201 is
set to 0.
- 294 -
B-63330EN/03
#6
NFM
#7
RFE
Specifies whether to send the FMF signal when the spindle stop
command signal (SSP) or spindle reverse rotation command signal
(SRV) is output.
0: Send the FMF signal (command for reading the SSP and SRV
signals) .
1: Do not send the FMF signal.
Specifies how to treat significant digits after the decimal point
specified in an F command for rigid tapping.
0: Digits after the decimal point are truncated.
1: Digits specified after the decimal point are valid.
Example of F
command
RFA=1,
RFE=0 or RFE=1
RFA=0, RFE=0
RFA=0, RFE=1
6210
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6211
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6221
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
F10. or F10.0
F10.5
F10.0
PS530 (incorrect use of

decimal point) is issued.
F10.0
F10.5
F10.0
F10.0
Return distance in canned cycle G73
Setting input
Real
table (A) )
Set a return distance in canned cycle G73.
Clearance in canned cycle G83
Setting input
Real
table (A))
Set a clearance in canned cycle G83.
Return distance in a peck rigid tapping cycle
Setting input
Real
Set a return distance in a peck rigid tapping cycle.
- 295 -
6240
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Tool retraction direction after G86.1 and G87 orientation
Parameter input
Integeraxis
-10 - 10
Set the tool retraction axis and direction used after spindle orientation
in canned cycle G86.1 or G82. For each drilling axis, the tool
retraction axis and direction after orientation can be set. Specify an
axis number along with a sign (+ or - ) to specify a direction.
Example: Suppose the following:
When the drilling axis is the X-axis, the tool retraction direction
after orientation is -Y.
When the drilling axis is the Y-axis, the tool retraction direction
after orientation is +Z.
When the drilling axis is the Z-axis, the tool retraction direction
after orientation is -X.
Then, set the parameters as follows (assuming that the first axis,
second axis, and third axis are the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis) :
Set the parameter for the first axis to -2 (the tool retraction
direction is -Y) .
Set the parameter for the second axis to 3 (the tool
retraction direction is +Z) .
Set the parameter for the third axis to -1 (the tool retraction
direction is -X) .
Set 0 for other axes.
- 296 -
B-63330EN/03
6261
Effective angle in an interference check for three-dimensional cutter

compensation
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Real
degree
table (A) )
A tool direction change is assumed when the angle difference
between two tool direction vectors in three-dimensional cutter
compensation is equal to or greater than the value set in this
parameter.
When 0 is set, the specification of 45 degrees is assumed.
Let two tool direction vectors be Va and Vb. When the difference in
angle is degrees or more as shown in the figure below, the tool
direction vector is determined to have been changed.
Va
degrees
Vb
6291
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Machine error compensation value
Parameter input
Real
table (A) )
Set the compensation value used to compensate for the difference in
the shortest distance between the center axes of two rotation axes if
coordinate system rotation is not performed with the dynamic fixture
offset coordinate system rotation function.
If 0 is set, no
compensation is performed.
- 297 -
4.24
B-63330EN/03
SCALING AND COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION

PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 6400 AND LATER)
6400
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
RIN
#1
SCR
#2
RTR
#4
D3R
#5
D3M
#7
#6
#5
#4
OLT
OLN
D3M
D3R
#3
#2
#1
#0
RTR
SCR
RIN
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to use an absolute value when setting a rotation
angle (R) for coordinate system rotation (G68) .
0: Use an absolute value at all times.
1: Depend on the mode (absolute mode (G90) or incremental mode
(G91) ) .
Specifies the unit of magnification used for scaling (G51) .
0: 0.00001
1: 0.001
Specifies the degree unit used to set the angle for coordinate system
rotation and three-dimensional coordinate conversion (G68) .
0: 0.00001 deg
1: 0.001 deg
Specifies how the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is
canceled.
0: The three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is canceled
by the G69 command, a reset, or the ERS, ESP, or RRW input
signal from the PMC.
1: The three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode is canceled
only by the G69 command.
Specifies the type of coordinates to be read when the current tool
position in the workpiece coordinate system is read using the custom
macro system variables #5041 through #5050 (ABSOT) in the threedimensional coordinate conversion mode.
0: Read coordinates in a program coordinate system before
coordinate conversion.
1: Read coordinates in a workpiece coordinate system resulting
from coordinate conversion.
NOTE
When the current tool position in the workpiece
coordinate system is read in a mode other than
three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode (G69
mode), coordinates in the coordinate system for
which coordinate conversion is not performed
(workpiece coordinate system) are read.
For an explanation of system variables #5061 to
#5080(ABSKP), see the explanation of DSC (bit 5 of
parameter No. 1200).
- 298 -
B-63330EN/03
#6
OLN
The oiling signal is:

0: Not sent.
1: Sent.
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must
be turned off before operation is continued.
#7
OLT
The oiling signal transmission type is:

0: Type A.
(By specifying an oiling type, the oiling signal OIL is set to 0.)
1: Type B.
(The oiling signal OIL is set to 0 when the oiling completion
signal OILF is returned from the PMC.)
6410
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6411
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6421
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Scaling (G51) magnification
Setting input
Integer
Multiplied by 0.001 or 0.00001 depending on the parameter SCR
(No.6400#1) .
1 - 999999
Set a magnification used for scaling. The value set in this parameter is
used as the default scaling magnification when the scaling
magnification (P) is not specified in the program.
Rotation angle for coordinate system rotation (G68)
Setting input
Integer
0.001 degrees or 0.00001 degrees depending on the parameter RTR
(No.6400#2) .
From -360000 through 360000 or -36000000 through 36000000
depending on the parameter RTR (No.6400#2) .
Set a rotation angle for coordinate system rotation. The value set in
this parameter is used as the default rotation angle for coordinate
system rotation when the coordinate system rotation angle (R) is not
specified in the program.
Scaling magnification for each axis
Setting input
Integeraxis
Multiplied by 0.001 or 0.00001 depending on the parameter SCR
(No.6400#1) .
1 - 999999
Set a scaling magnification for each axis.
- 299 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
#4
#3
6600
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
COV
6610
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
#2
#1
#0
COV
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether a circular cutting point feedrate change is valid.
0: Valid at all times.
1: Valid only in the automatic corner override (G62) mode.
Minimum deceleration rate (MDR) for circular cutting feedrate change
Parameter input
Integer
%
0 - 100
Set a minimum deceleration rate (MDR) for automatic corner override
in circular cutting feedrate change.
When an arc is cut with the tool shifted inward, the arc cutting
feedrate is calculated using the expression shown below, where F is a
specified feedrate. Then, the feedrate along the programmed path
becomes the specified feedrate (F) .
Rc
Rp
Rc: Radius of the tool center path

Rp: Programmed radius
Programmed path
Rc
Rp
Tool center
path
If Rc is too small for Rp, the fraction Rc/Rp becomes almost 0, and
the tool stops. For this reason, the minimum deceleration ratio (MDR)
is set, and the tool feedrate is calculated as FMDR when
Rc/RpMDR.
- 300 -
B-63330EN/03
6611
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Effective angle for internal corner automatic override ( p)
Parameter input
Real
degree
2 - 178
When p, the corner is assumed to be an inside corner.
When a corner is determined to be an inside corner, the feedrate is
overridden within the distance Le in the block before the corner and
the distance Ls in the next block from the corner intersection.
Le and Ls are set in parameter Nos. 6613 and 6614, respectively.
Programmed path
Cutter center path
a
Le
b
Ls
The feedrate is overridden from point a to point b.
6612
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6613
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
6614
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Deceleration rate for automatic corner override (COUR)
Parameter input
Integer
%
1 - 100
Distance for starting automatic override (Le)
Setting input
Real
table (A) )
Distance for ending automatic override (Ls)
Setting input
Real
table (A) )
- 301 -
6630
B-63330EN/03
Lower override limit of automatic velocity control during involute

interpolation
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
%
0 - 100
When the override function is used in the cutter compensation mode
for involute interpolation automatic velocity control, the feedrate of
the tool center may be reduced to an extremely low level near the base
circle in the case of internal offset. To void this, set a lower override
limit in this parameter.
Thus, the feedrate is clamped so that the feedrate is not reduced below
the specified feedrate overridden by the lower limit value set in this
parameter.
NOTE
When 0 or a value not within the specifiable range is
set, involute interpolation automatic velocity control
(override in the cutter compensation mode and
acceleration/deceleration clamping near a base circle)
is disabled.
6820
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Overrun distance and direction of unidirectional positioning (G60)
Parameter input
Realaxis
-32767 - 32767
For each axis, set the overrun distance and direction of unidirectional
positioning (G60) . The positioning direction is determined by the
sign of the data set in this parameter, and the overrun distance is
determined by the value of the data set in this parameter.
Overrun distance > 0: Positioning direction is positive (+) .
Overrun distance < 0: Positioning direction is negative (-) .
Overrun distance = 0: Unidirectional positioning is not performed.
- 302 -
B-63330EN/03
4.25
CUSTOM MACRO PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7000 AND

LATER)
7000
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
TCS
#1
SCS
#2
BCS
#3
MGE
#4
CVA
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
PRT
CLV
GMP
CVA
MGE
BCS
SCS
TCS
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to call subprograms with T codes.
0: Do not call with T codes.
1: Call with T codes.
Specifies whether to call subprograms with S codes.
0: Do not call with S codes.
1: Call with S codes.
Specifies whether to call subprograms with the second auxiliary
function codes.
0: Do not call with the second auxiliary function codes.
1: Call with the second auxiliary function codes.
Specifies whether a G code modal call is made after movement or for
each block.
0: Make a call after movement (equivalent to G66) .
1: Make a call for each block (equivalent to G66.1)
The format for macro call arguments is specified as follows:
0: Arguments are passed in NC format without modifications.
1: Arguments are converted to macro format then passed.
Example: When G65 P_ X10 ; is specified, the value in local
variable #24 in the calling program is set as follows:
Command
#24
ADP[#24]
CVA=0
0.01
10.0
CVA=1
0.01
0.01
NOTE
External operations are the same unless the ADP
function is used.
#5
GMP
#6
CLV
#7
PRT
Specifies whether to allow M, S, T, and B codes to be called while G

codes are being called, and whether to allow G codes to be called
while M, S, T, and B codes are being called.
0: Allow.
1: Do not allow (executed as ordinary M, S, T, B, and G codes) .
Specifies whether to clear custom macro common variables #100
through #199 (cleared when the power is turned off) upon reset.
0: Do not clear.
1: Clear to null.
Specifies whether to output a space instead of a leading zero with
DPRNT.
0: Output a space.
1: Output nothing.
- 303 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
7002
#0
[Input type]
[Data type]
MUS
#1
MSB
#2
MPR
#3
TSE
#4
MIN
#5
DPG
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
DPG
MIN
TSE
MPR
MSB
MUS
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to use interrupt-type custom macros.
0: Do not use.
1: Use.
Specifies whether local variables used in the interrupt program are the
same as those in the main program.
0: Local variables are different from those in the main program
(macro type) .
1: Local variables are the same as those in the main program
(subprogram type) .
Specifies M codes that are used to enable or disable interrupt-type
custom macros.
0: M96/M97
1: M code set in a parameter (parameter No. 7033 or No. 7034)
Specifies whether to use an edge trigger or status trigger to accept the
custom macro interrupt signal.
0: Use an edge trigger (rising edge) .
1: Use a status trigger.
Specifies when to execute CNC statements in the interrupt program.
0: Execute CNC statements by interrupting the block being
executed of the interrupted program (type 1) .
1: Execute CNC statements after the current block of the
interrupted program has been executed (type 2) .
Specifies whether to allow G codes with a decimal point to be called.
0: Do not allow.
1: Allow.
#7
#6
#5
7003
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
VN1
#4
#3
#2
#1
DSM
ATN
#0
Parameter input
Bit
In the registration of variable names with the SETVN statement,
0: Only an alphabetic character is valid as the first character.
1: Either an alphabetic character or digit is valid as the first
character. (FS15B specifications)

If this parameter bit is set to 1, variable names may be registered
using a non-alphabetic character as the first character with the
SETVN command, as in SETVN500[1ST,2ND].
Note,
however, that a variable name cannot be specified instead of a
variable number, as in [#1ST]=100:.
#1
ATN
Specifies the return value of the arctangent function ATAN (with two
arguments) .
0: -180 ATAN[y]/[x] 180
1: 0 ATAN[y]/[x] 360
- 304 -
B-63330EN/03
#2
DSM
Specifies whether a system variable that can be specified (written) on

the let side can be rewritten on the custom macro screen through the
MDI unit.
0: Cannot be rewritten.
1: Can be rewritten.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
7004
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
#1
#0
ISO
Parameter input
Bit
ISO
0:
1:
#7
When EIA codes are used, set in parameter No. 7010 through No.
7018 the bit patterns of codes specified instead of [, ], #, *, =, ?,
@, &, and _.
When ISO/ASCII codes are used, set in parameter No. 7010
through No. 7018 the bit patterns of codes specified instead of
[, ], #, *, =, ?, @, &, and _.
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
7010
[7
[6
[5
[4
[3
[2
[1
[0
7011
]7
]6
]5
]4
]3
]2
]1
]0
7012
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
7013
*7
*6
*5
*4
*3
*2
*1
*0
7014
=7
=6
=5
=4
=3
=2
=1
=0
7015
?7
?6
?5
?4
?3
?2
?1
?0
7016
@7
@6
@5
@4
@3
@2
@1
@0
7017
&7
&6
&5
&4
&3
&2
&1
&0
7018
_7
_6
_5
_4
_3
_2
_1
_0
[Input type]
[Data type]
Parameter input
Bit
[0 to [7 :
]0 to ]7 :
#0 to #7 :
*0 to *7 :
=0 to =7 :
?0 to ?7 :
@0 to @7 :
&0 to &7 :
_0 to _7 :
The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating [ is set.

The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ] is set.
The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating # is set.
The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating * is set.
The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating = is set.
The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ? is set.
The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating @ is set.
The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating & is set.
The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating _ is set.
0: A corresponding bit is 0.
1: A corresponding bit is 1.
- 305 -
B-63330EN/03
7033
M code for turning on custom macro interrupt
7034
M code for turning off custom macro interrupt
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7036
Parameter input
Integer
From 3 through 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99)
When bit 2 (MPR) of parameter No. 7002 is set to 1, that is, when a
parameter is used to set an M code for enabling/disabling interrupttype custom macros, set such an M code in this parameter.
Start number of common variables to be protected among the common
variables (#500 to #999)
7037
End number of common variables to be protected among the common

[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
500 - 999
Among the common variables (#500 to #999) , the range of common
variables specified by this parameter can be protected (by setting their
attributes to read-only) . If a write attempt (on the left side) is made,
an alarm (PS0116) is issued.
NOTE
Set 0 in both parameter No. 7036 and No. 7037
not to protect common variables.
7038
Start number of common variables to be protected among the common

7039
End number of common variables to be protected among the common

[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
200 - 499
Among the common variables (#200 to #499) , the range of common
variables specified by this parameter can be protected (by setting their
attributes to read-only) . If a write attempt (on the left side) is made,
an alarm (PS0116) is issued.
NOTE
Set 0 in both parameter No. 7036 and No. 7037
not to protect common variables. This
parameter has no effect when the option for 900
common variables is not selected.
- 306 -
B-63330EN/03
7040
Number of consecutive macro statement blocks in an execution macro

program that can be processed
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
Block
0 to 99999999
Set the number of consecutive macro statement blocks in an execution
macro program that can be processed. A setting of 0 corresponds to
500 blocks.
Usually, all of consecutive macro statements are executed without
stopping. If there is a large number of consecutive macro statements,
their execution will slow down displays and auxiliary macros. To
prevent this from occurring, the processing of macro statements may
be interrupted with the number of blocks specified, thereby reducing
the effect on displays and auxiliary macros. A setting of 1 to 499
slows down the processing of macro statements, speeding up displays
and auxiliary macros. A setting of 501 or greater speeds up the
processing of macro statements, slowing down displays and auxiliary
macros.
NOTE
This parameter is effective only to macro statements
in an execution macro program.
It has no effect on any macro statements in custom
macro programs.
This parameter has an effect if the number of
consecutive statement blocks is equal to or greater
than the setting of this parameter.
7045
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Operating speed of the auxiliary macro function
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 20
The auxiliary macro function executes auxiliary macros at constant
intervals, several blocks at a time. Use this parameter to specify the
number of blocks to be executed at a time. (Setting + 1) blocks will
be executed. For example, if 5 is set, six blocks will be executed at a
time.
- 307 -
B-63330EN/03
7050
G code used to call the custom macro of program number 9010
7051
7052
7053
7054
7055
7056
7057
7058
7059
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
(From -999 though 999 excluding 0, 5, 65, 66 and 67)
Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers
9010 through 9019. However, note that when a negative value is set in
this parameter, it becomes a modal call. For example, if this
parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G11.
Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit
3 (MGE) of parameter No. 7000.
- 308 -
B-63330EN/03
7060
G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9040
7061
7062
7063
7064
7065
7066
7067
7068
7069
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
-999 - 999
Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers
9040 through 9049. However, note that when a negative value is set in
this parameter, it becomes a modal call. For example, if this
parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G1.1.
Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit
3 (MGE) of parameter No. 7000. Set G codes in the format Gm.n. The
value expressed by (m*10+n) is set in the parameter. The values m
and n must satisfy the following relationships: 0 m 99, 0 n 9.
- 309 -
B-63330EN/03
7071
M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9001
7072
7073
7074
7075
7076
7077
7078
7079
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
(From 3 through 99999999 excluding 30, 98 and 99)
Set the M codes used to call the subprograms of program numbers
9001 through 9009.
NOTE
If the same M code is set in these parameters, the
younger number is called preferentially. For example,
if 100 is set in parameter No. 7071 and 7072, and
programs O9001 and O9002 both exist, O9001 is
called when M100 is specified.
- 310 -
B-63330EN/03
7080
M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9020
7081
7082
7083
7084
7085
7086
7087
7088
7089
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
(From 3 through 99999999 excluding 30, 98 and 99)
Set the M codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers
9020 through 9029. The simple call mode is set.
NOTE
1 If the same M code is set in these parameters, the
younger number is called preferentially. For
example, if 200 is set in parameter No. 7081 and No.
7082, and programs O9021 and O9022 both exist,
O9021 is called when M200 is specified.
2 If the same M code is set in a parameter (No. 7071 to
No. 7079) used to call subprograms and in a
parameter (No. 7080 to No. 7089) used to call
custom macros, a custom macro is called
preferentially. For example, if 300 is set in
parameter No. 7071 and No. 7081, and programs
O9001 and O9021 both exist, O9021 is called when
M300 is specified.
- 311 -
7090
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7091
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7092
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Start G code used to call a custom macro
Parameter input
Integer
-999 - 999
Start program number of a custom macro called by G code
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 99999999
Number of G codes used to call custom macros
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 255
Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G
codes at a time. With G codes as many as the value set in parameter
No. 7092 starting with the G code set in parameter No. 7090, the
custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 7092 starting with the program number set in 7091 can
be called. Set 0 in parameter No. 7092 to disable this mode of calling.
If a negative value is set in parameter No. 7090, the modal call mode
is entered. Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1
depends on bit 3 (MGE) of parameter No. 7000.
Example 1:
When parameter No. 7090 = 900, parameter No. 7091 = 10000000,
and parameter No. 7092 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls
(simple calls) is defined as follows:
G900 -> O10000000
G901 -> O10000001
G902 -> O10000002
:
G999 -> O10000099
When the setting of parameter No. 7090 is changed to -900, the same
set of custom macro calls (modal calls) is defined.
NOTE
1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls
using these parameters are disabled:
1 When a value not within the specifiable range is
set in each parameter
2 (Value of parameter No.7091+value of parameter
No.97092 - 1) > 99999999
2 The specification of a mixture of simple calls and
modal calls is not allowed.
3 If a range of G codes set by these parameters
duplicate G codes specified in parameter No.7050 to
No.7059, the calls specified by parameter No.7050
to 7059 are made preferentially.
- 312 -
B-63330EN/03
7093
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7094
Start G code with a decimal point used to call a custom macro
Parameter input
Integer
-999 - 999
Start program number of a custom macro called by G code with a decimal
point
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 99999999
- 313 -
7095
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Number of G codes with a decimal point used to call custom macros
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 255
Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G
codes with a decimal point at a time. With G codes with a decimal
point as many as the value set in parameter No. 7095 starting with the
G code with a decimal point set in parameter No. 7093, the custom
macros of program numbers as many as the value set in parameter No.
7095 starting with the program number set in 7094 can be called. Set
0 in parameter No. 7095 to disable this mode of calling.
If a negative value is set in parameter No. 7093, the modal call mode
is entered. Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1
depends on bit 3 (MGE) of parameter No. 7000.
Example:
When parameter No. 7093 = 900, parameter No. 7094 = 20000000,
and parameter No. 7095 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls
(simple calls) is defined as follows:
G90.0 -> O20000000
G90.1 -> O20000001
G90.2 -> O20000002
:
G99.9 -> O20000099
When the setting of parameter No. 7093 is changed to -900, the same
set of custom macro calls (modal calls) is defined.
NOTE
1) When a value not within the specifiable range is
2) (Value of parameter No.7094+value of
parameter No.7095 - 1) > 99999999
3) When bit 5 (DPG) of parameter No. 7002 = 0 (to
disable calls using G codes with a decimal point)
2 The specification of a mixture of simple calls and
modal calls is not allowed.
3 If a range of G codes set by these parameters
duplicate G codes specified in parameter No.7060 to
No.7069, the calls specified by parameter No.7060
to 7069 are made preferentially.
- 314 -
B-63330EN/03
7096
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7097
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7098
Start M code used to call a subprogram
Parameter input
Integer
3 - 99999999
Start program number of a subprogram called by M code
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 99999999
Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of subprograms
called by M codes)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 32767
Set this parameter to define multiple subprogram calls using M codes
at a time. With M codes as many as the value set in parameter No.
7098 starting with the M code set in parameter No. 7096, the
subprograms of program numbers as many as the value set in
Example 1:
When parameter No. 7096 = 80000000, parameter No. 7097 =
30000000, and parameter No. 7098 = 100 are set, a set of 100
subprogram calls is defined as follows:
M80000000 -> O30000000
M80000001 -> O30000001
M80000002 -> O30000002
:
M80000099 -> O30000099
NOTE
2 (Value of parameter No. 7097 + value of
parameter No. 7098 - 1) > 99999999
2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters
duplicate M codes specified in parameter No. 7071
to No. 7079, the calls specified by parameter No.
7071 to 7079 are made preferentially.
- 315 -
7099
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7100
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7101
B-63330EN/03
Start M code used to call a custom macro
Parameter input
Integer
3 - 99999999
Start program number of a custom macro called by M code
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 99999999
Number of M codes used to call custom macros (number of custom macros
called by M codes)
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 32767
Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using M
codes at a time. With M codes as many as the value set in parameter
No. 7101 starting with the M code set in parameter No. 7099, the
custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in
Example:
When parameter No. 7099 = 90000000, parameter No. 7100 =
40000000, and parameter No. 7101 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom
macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows:
M90000000 -> O40000000
M90000001 -> O40000001
M90000002 -> O40000002
:
M90000099 -> O40000099
NOTE
2 (Value of parameter No. 7100 + value of
parameter No. 7101 - 1) > 99999999
2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters
duplicate M codes specified in parameter No. 7080
through No. 7089, the calls specified by parameter
No. 7080 through 7089 are made preferentially.
- 316 -
B-63330EN/03
4.26
PROGRAM RESTART, BLOCK RESTART, AND TOOL

RETRACTION AND RETURN PARAMETERS (DATA NO.
7110 AND LATER)
7110
Order of the axes to be used for tool movement in the dry run mode when the
program is restarted
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Integeraxis
0 - 24
Set the order of the axes to be used when the tool is moved to the
restart point in the dry run mode after the program is restarted, using
the axis numbers.
If an entered number exceeds the number of controlled axes, an alarm
is issued when the program is restarted.
#7
#6
#5
7130
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
NBK
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
NBK
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to perform block count operation for a program not
displayed during execution when the program is restarted.
0: Perform block count operation.
1: Do not perform block count operation.
- 317 -
4.27
B-63330EN/03
SKIP FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7200 AND

LATER)
#7
7200
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
HSS
#5
SFN
#6
#5
#4
SRE
SFN
HSS
#3
#2
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to use the high-speed skip signal when the skip
function or multi-step skip function is used.
0: Not used. (The skip signal of the conventional type is used.)
1: Used. (The skip signal of the conventional type is disabled.)
Specifies a feedrate that is used during execution of the multi-step
skip function or skip function using the high-speed skip signal (with
bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 7200 set to 1) .
0: Feedrate of the F code specified in the program
1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 7211 to No. 7214
NOTE
For the skip function not using the high-speed skip
signal (with bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 7200 set to 0),
see the description of bit 3 of parameter No. 1400.
#6
SRE
Specifies whether to use the rising edge or falling edge to assume

signal input when the high-speed skip signal or high-speed
measurement position arrival signal is used.
0: Use the falling edge (contact close -> open) to assume signal
input.
1: Use the rising edge (contact open -> close) to assume signal
input.
NOTE
If this parameter is set to 0 (or 1), and the contact of
the high-speed skip signal is already open (or closed)
when skip operation is specified, the input of the skip
signal is assumed at that time.
In this case, skip operation is performed immediately,
and the block is terminated.
This also applies to the high-speed measurement
position arrival signal for automatic tool length
measurement.
- 318 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
7203
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
TSE
#1
#0
TSE
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies a skip position to be stored in the system variables (#5061 to
#5080) when the torque limit skip command (G31P98/P99) is
specified.
0: Position reflecting a servo error (positional deviation)
1: Position not reflecting a servo error
Position of skip operation
Current CNC position

Machine position
Error amount
Stop point
Origin
Position after compensation
considering delay
Position without considering delay
- 319 -
7205
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0-8
1S1 to 1S8
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
1S8
1S7
1S6
1S5
1S4
1S3
1S2
1S1
Parameter input
Bit
A skip signal to be used for the G31 skip command or G31.1
multistage skip command is set.
- Skip command (G31)
Parameter
1S1
1S2
1S3
1S4
1S5
1S6
1S7
1S8
Corresponding skip signal

High-speed skip signal
DI signal
( HSS (No.7200#4) =1 )
( HSS (No.7200#4) =0 )
HDI0
HDI1
HDI2
SKIP1 is always valid
HDI3
regardless of the settings
HDI4
in parameter 1S1 to 1S8.
HDI5
HDI6
HDI7
- Multistage command (G31.1, G31.2, G31.3, G31.4)

Parameter
1S1
1S2
1S3
1S4
1S5
1S6
1S7

DI signal
( HSS (No.7200#4) =1 )
( HSS (No.7200#4) =0 )
HDI0
SKIP1
HDI1
SKIP2
HDI2
SKIP3
HDI3
SKIP4
HDI4
HDI5
HDI6
1S8
HDI7
0: A corresponding skip signal is invalid.

1: A corresponding skip signal is valid.
- 320 -
B-63330EN/03
7206
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0-8
2S1 to 2S8
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
2S8
2S7
2S6
2S5
2S4
2S3
2S2
2S1
Parameter input
Bit
A skip signal to be used for the G31.2 multistage skip command is set.
Parameter
2S1
2S2
2S3
2S4
2S5
2S6
2S7

DI signal
( HSS (No.7200#4) =1 )
( HSS (No.7200#4) =0 )
HDI0
SKIP1
HDI1
SKIP2
HDI2
SKIP3
HDI3
SKIP4
HDI4
HDI5
HDI6
2S8
HDI7

7207
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0-8
3S1 to 3S8
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
3S8
3S7
3S6
3S5
3S4
3S3
3S2
3S1
Parameter input
Bit
Parameter
3S1
3S2
3S3
3S4
3S5
3S6
3S7

DI signal
( HSS (No.7200#4) =1 )
( HSS (No.7200#4) =0 )
HDI0
SKIP1
HDI1
SKIP2
HDI2
SKIP3
HDI3
SKIP4
HDI4
HDI5
HDI6
3S8
HDI7

- 321 -
7208
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0-8
4S1 to 4S8
B-63330EN/03
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
4S8
4S7
4S6
4S5
4S4
4S3
4S2
4S1
Parameter input
Bit
Parameter
4S1
4S2
4S3
4S4
4S5
4S6
4S7

DI signal
( HSS (No.7200#4) =1 )
( HSS (No.7200#4) =0 )
HDI0
SKIP1
HDI1
SKIP2
HDI2
SKIP3
HDI3
SKIP4
HDI4
HDI5
HDI6
4S8
HDI7

7209
#0-8
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
DS8
DS7
DS6
DS5
DS4
DS3
DS2
DS1
[Input type]
[Data type]
Parameter input
Bit
DS1 to DS8
When the multistage skip option is provided, a skip signal to be used

for the G04 dwell command is set.
Parameter
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
DS5
DS6
DS7

DI signal
( HSS (No.7200#4) =1 )
( HSS (No.7200#4) =0 )
HDI0
SKIP1
HDI1
SKIP2
HDI2
SKIP3
HDI3
SKIP4
HDI4
HDI5
HDI6
DS8
HDI7

- 322 -
B-63330EN/03
7210
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0-8
9S1 to 9S8
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
9S8
9S7
9S6
9S5
9S4
9S3
9S2
9S1
Parameter input
Bit
A skip signal to be used for G31.8 (EGB skip command) is set.
Parameter
9S1
9S2
9S3
9S4
9S5
9S6
9S7

DI signal
( HSS (No.7200#4) =1 )
( HSS (No.7200#4) =0 )
HDI0
SKIP1
HDI1
SKIP2
HDI2
SKIP3
HDI3
SKIP4
HDI4
HDI5
HDI6
9S8
HDI7

7211
Feedrate of the skip function (G31 or G31.1)
7212
Feedrate of the skip function (G31.2)
7213
7214
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
Set the feedrate of the skip function for each G code.
These parameters are valid when bit 5 (SFN) of parameter No. 7200 is
set to 1.
- 323 -
7220
B-63330EN/03
Time width from input of a skip signal until the input of the next skip signal
is enabled when the EGB skip function is used
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
8msec
From 3 through 127. Other values are taken as 3.
Set the time width from input of a skip signal until the input of the
next skip signal is enabled (becomes acceptable) when the EGB skip
function is used.
Set a value in steps of 8 msec.
Example: When 10 is set, 80 msec is assumed.
This parameter is set to prevent the system from accepting a skip
signal mistakenly.
Parameter-set time
Skip signal
<2>
<1>
<3>
After skip signal <1>, skip signal <2> is ignored because it is input
within the parameter-set time. Skip signal <3> is valid.
#7
7300
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
MDC
#6
#5
#4
#3
SEB
#2
#1
#0
AMH
MDC
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether the result of an automatic tool length measurement
is subtracted from or added to the current offset value.
0: Subtracted.
1: Added.
NOTE
The standard setting is 1.
#1
AMH
Specifies whether to use the high-speed measurement position arrival

signal for automatic tool length measurement.
0: Do not use. Instead, the conventional measurement position
arrival signal is used.
1: Use.
- 324 -
B-63330EN/03
#7
SEB
7301
#0-8
Specifies whether to reflect the number of accumulated pulses due to

acceleration/deceleration and positional deviation when the skip
signal or measurement position arrival signal is turned on in skip
operation or automatic tool length measurement.
0: Do not reflect.
1: Reflect for compensation.
The input position of the skip signal (measurement position arrival
signal) is found by reflecting the number of accumulated pulses due to
actual acceleration/deceleration and positional deviation present when
the skip signal (measurement position arrival signal) is turned on.
Namely, this is the same as type B of FS15B. Note that there is no
method equivalent to type A (method of determination from a time
constant and gain) of FS15B.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
1A8
1A7
1A6
1A5
1A4
1A3
1A2
1A1
[Input type]
[Data type]
Parameter input
Bit
1A1 to 1A8
A high-speed measurement position arrival signal to be used for G37

(tool length automatic measurement command) is set.
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
1A5
1A6
1A7
Corresponding high-speed
measurement position arrival signal
HAE1
HAE2
HAE3
HAE4
HAE5
HAE6
HAE7
1A8
HAE8
Parameter
0:
1:
7311
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
A corresponding high-speed measurement position arrival signal

is invalid.
A corresponding high-speed measurement position arrival signal
is valid.
Feedrate during automatic tool length measurement
Parameter input
Real
- 325 -
7321
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7331
B-63330EN/03
Deceleration position in automatic tool length measurement (value of )
Parameter input
Real
Allowable measurement position arrival signal range in automatic tool
length measurement (value of )
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
In the figure below, set the feedrate at the time of measurement in
parameter No. 7311, the deceleration position () in parameter No.
7321, and the range within which the measurement position arrival
signal () is enabled in parameter No. 7331, respectively.
Coordinates specified in G37
Feedrate
Rapid traverse
rate
Feedrate during
measurement
(No.7311)
Rapid traverse
(No.7331)
Start point
(No.7321)
Measurement position
arrival signal
- 326 -
B-63330EN/03
4.28
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PARAMETERS (DATA NO.

7400 AND LATER)
7400
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
#1
GS1
GS2
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
TAD
ABT
SNG
RAG
LTM
SIG
GS2
GS1
Parameter input
Bit
A combination of the maximum number of groups and maximum

number of tools that can be registered for tool life management is set
according to the following table:
Tool life management
Tool life management Tool life management
pairs: with no addition
pairs: 512 pairs
pairs: 1024 pairs
GS2 GS1
option
(#1) (#0)
Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of Number of
groups
tools
groups
tools
groups
tools
0
0
16
16
64
32
128
32
0
1
32
8
128
16
256
16
1
0
64
4
256
8
512
8
1
1
128
2
512
4
1024
4
NOTE
After changing the setting in this parameter, specify
G10 L3; to set data again.
#2
SIG
Specifies whether to specify a group number for tool skip by using a

signal.
0: Do not specify.
1: Specify.
NOTE
If no group number is specified using a signal, tool
skip is performed for the tool of the group currently
used.
#3
LTM
Specifies whether to count tool life by time or frequency.

0: Count tool life by frequency.
1: Count tool life by time.
NOTE
After changing the setting of this parameter, reenter
the data with G10 L3;.
#4
RAG
Specifies how to clear group execution data when the tool change
reset signal (TLRST) is entered.
0: Clear the execution data of a specified group if the life of the
group has expired.
1: Clear the execution data of all registered groups.
- 327 -
#5
SNG
#6
ABT
#7
TAD
B-63330EN/03
Specifies how to handle the tool skip signal (TLSKP) entered when a
tool whose life is not managed is used.
0: Skip the tool of the group most recently used or the group
specified by bit 2 (SIG) of parameter No. 7400.
1: Ignore the tool skip signal. Tool skip based on MDI operation is
also unacceptable.
Specifies whether to issue an alarm when the return tool number does
not belong to the currently used group in tool replacement A.
0: Issue an alarm (PS0442) .
Specifies whether to issue an alarm when no T command is specified
in the block that includes M06 in tool replacement D.
0: Does not issue an alarm.
1: Issues an alarm (PS0440) .
#7
7401
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
#1
CT1
CT2
#6
#5
TRU
TRS
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
LFV
EMD
CT2
CT1
Parameter input
Bit
A tool change type is set according to the following tables:

- Tool life management
CT2 CT1
(#1) (#0)
Tool
change
type
- 328 -
Description
Tool group number
Tool life management
specified in the block that
count timing
specifies the tool change
command (M06)
Group of tools
Life counting is performed
already used
for a tool
in the specified tool group
when M06
is specified next.
Life counting is performed
Tool group to be used next
when a tool in the tool
group specified in the block
that specifies M06 is
specified.
B-63330EN/03
- Tool offset by tool number

Tool
CT2 CT1
change
(#1) (#0)
type
#2
EMD
#3
LFV
#5
TRS
#6
TRU
Description
The offset value corresponding to the tool number (T
code) specified previously becomes valid, and the tool
pot number for the tool number specified in the block
that specifies the tool change M code is output as a
code signal. The offset value corresponding to this tool
number is not made valid by the next tool change M
code.
The offset value corresponding to the tool number (T
code) specified previously becomes valid, and the tool
pot number for the tool number specified in the block
that specifies the tool change M code is output as a
code signal. The offset value corresponding to this tool
number is made valid by the next tool change M code.
Same as type B.
The tool pot number for the tool number specified in the
block that specifies the tool change M code is output as
a code signal, and the corresponding offset value
becomes valid immediately.
Specifies when the asterisk (*) for representing the expiration of life
is displayed.
0: Displayed when the next tool is used.
1: Displayed when the life has expired.
Specifies whether life count override is valid.
0: Not valid.
1: Valid.
Specifies that the tool change reset signal (TLRST) is valid when
RST is not set to 1 for a reset, and:
0: When the reset state is set (OP is set to 0) .
1: When the reset state is set (OP is set to 0) , the automatic
operation stop state is set (STL and SPL are set to 0, and OP is
set to 1) , or the automatic operation halt state is set (STL is set
to 0, and SPL is set to 1) . (However, TLRST is invalid in the
automatic operation stop state, automatic operation halt state,
and automatic operation start state (with STL set to 1) during
data setting command (G10 L3) execution.)
Specifies how to handle a cutting time less than 1 second when life
counting is based on time (LTM = 1) , and the life count interval is 1
second (FCO = 0) .
0: A cutting time less than 1 second is truncated, and is not
counted.
1: A cutting time less than 1 second is rounded off to 1 second, and
is counted.
NOTE
When the life count interval is 0.1 second (FCO = 1),
a cutting time less than 0.1 second is always
rounded off to 0.1 second, and is counted.
- 329 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
7403
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
FCO
#1
#0
FGL
FCO
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether the life count interval is 1 second or 0.1 second
when tool life counting is based on time.
0: 1 second
1: 0.1 second
According to this parameter, the unit of tool life value and tool life
counter display/setting is as follows:
Bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 7403 0 1
Life value and life counter
display/setting unit
1 minute 0.1 minute
NOTE
After changing the setting of this parameter, reenter
the data with G10 L3;.
#1
FGL
7440
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7442
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Specifies whether a life value to be set by L in G10-based life data

registration is set in steps of 1 minute or 0.1 second when tool life
counting is based on time.
0: In steps of 1 minute
1: In steps of 0.1 second
Number for ignoring tool life management
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 99999999
If a value greater than the value set here is specified by a T code, the
value produced by subtracting the value set here from the value of the
T code is used as the tool group number for tool life management.
M code used to restart tool life counting
Parameter input
Integer
From 0 through 99999999 (Excluding 01, 02, 30, 98, 99 and calling
M code)
When the tool life is specified with the number of times the tool has
been used, the tool change signal (TLCHA) is issued if the tool life of
any one of the tool groups has expired at the time of specification of
the M code used to restart tool life counting.
The T code (tool life management group command) specified after the
M code used to restart tool life counting selects a tool whose life has
not expired yet from the specified group. The next M06 code
increments the tool life counter by one.
When the tool life is specified with the time the tool has been used,
specifying the M code used to restart tool life counting does not cause
- 330 -
B-63330EN/03
any operation. When 0 is set in this parameter, the M code used to

restart tool life counting has no effect.
7443
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7444
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
H code for enabling tool length compensation specified by group number
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 9999
Set, in this parameter, an H code for enabling tool length
compensation specified by the currently selected group number.
When 0 is set in this parameter, compensation is enabled by H99.
D code for enabling cutter compensation specified by group number
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 9999
Set, in this parameter, a D code for enabling cutter compensation
specified by the currently selected group number. When 0 is set in
this parameter, compensation is enabled by D99.
- 331 -
4.29
B-63330EN/03
FIVE-AXIS CONTROL FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA

NO. 7514 AND LATER)
7514
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Tool axis direction
Parameter input
Integer
1-3
Enter the tool axis direction when the two rotation axes are set at 0
degree.
Data
1
2
3
- 332 -
Tool axis direction

X-axis
Y-axis
Z-axis
B-63330EN/03
7515
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Master rotation axis number
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
When a machine does not have the rotation axis that turns about the
tool axis, the axis number of a rotation axis used as the master axis is
set. For machines not using the master-axis configuration, 0 is set.
When the tool axis direction is controlled by two rotation axes,
neither of which turns about the tool axis, one of the rotation axes is
mounted on the other rotation axis as shown in the figure below. In
this case, the rotation axis on which the other rotation axis is mounted
is called the master axis.
A- and B-axes (The tool axis is the Z-axis, and the B-axis is the master.)
Rotation center
Tool axis direction
Workpiece
A- and B-axes (The tool axis is the Z-axis, and the A-axis is the master.)
Rotation center
Tool axis direction
Workpiece
Example for setting parameters that determine the machine

configuration
Tool axis direction: Z-axis
Axis configuration: W, X, Y, Z, A, B
Rotation axes: A-axis (axis rotating about the X-axis) , Baxis (axis rotating about the Y-axis)
Master axis: A-axis
Data No.
1029
7514
7515
- 333 -
Data
W
3
5
7516
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7517
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7518
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
B-63330EN/03
Angular displacement of a rotation axis
Parameter input
Realaxis
degree
table (A) )
When using the three-dimensional handle feed function or tool axis
direction tool length compensation function, set the coordinate of a
rotation axis, among the rotation axes determining the tool axis
direction, which is not controlled by the CNC. This parameter is
enabled or disabled, depending on the setting of bit 1 (RAP) of
parameter No. 1014.
Offset value for angular displacement of a rotation axis
Parameter input
Realaxis
degree
table (A) )
An offset can be applied to the angular displacement of the threedimensional handle feed function or tool axis direction tool length
compensation function to compensate for the move direction.
Origin offset value of a rotation axis
Parameter input
Realaxis
degree
table (A) )
Set an angular displacement shifted from the origin for a rotation axis
when the three-dimensional handle feed function or tool axis direction
tool length compensation function is used.
- 334 -
B-63330EN/03
7519
Rotation center compensation vector in tool length compensation along tool

axis
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7520
Parameter input
Real number axis
table (A).)
(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
In the function for tool length compensation along the tool axis, set
the vector from the first rotation axis center to second rotation axis
center.
Spindle center compensation vector in tool length compensation along tool
axis
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7540
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
PHH
#2
TWN
#4
SBP
#5
SVC
Parameter input
Real number axis
table (A).)
(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
the compensation vector of the spindle center.
#7
#6
#5
#4
ETH
DTH
SPC
SBP
#3
#2
#1
TWN
PHH
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to perform two-head three-dimensional handle feed
in parallel axis control and twin table control.
0: Do not perform.
1: Perform.
When this parameter is set to 1, be sure to set parameter No. 7543.
Specifies whether to perform three-dimensional handle
feed/interruption and tool length compensation in tool axis direction
with twin table control.
0: Do not perform these operations.
1: Perform these operations.
In tool length compensation along the tool axis, shift of the control
point is:
0: Calculated automatically.
1: Set in parameter No. 7745.
In tool length compensation along the tool axis, the control point is:
0: Not shifted.
1: Shifted.
The shift method is specified with bit 4 (SBP) of parameter No. 7540.
- 335 -
#6
DTH
#7
ETH
7543
B-63330EN/03
Specifies whether to include or exclude a tool holder offset value in

tool axis direction tool length compensation for tool tip coordinate
display.
0: Exclude.
1: Include.
Specifies whether the tool holder offset function in tool axis direction
tool length compensation is useful for the tool length compensation
function.
0: Not useful.
1: Useful.
Three-dimensional handle feed head to which each axis belongs in parallel
axis control and twin table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0-3
0: Not three-dimensional handle feed axis
1: Three-dimensional handle feed axis of head 1
NOTE
Set 0 when parallel axis control and twin table control
are not used.
7548
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Tool holder offset for tool axis direction tool length compensation
Parameter input
Real
table (A) )
Set an offset value (tool holder offset value) for the machine-specific
portion from the rotation center of the rotation axis to the tool
mounting position when the tool axis direction tool length
compensation function is used.
#7
7550
[Input type]
[Data type]
#6
CLR
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
CLR
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to clear the travel distance by three-dimensional
handle feed upon reset.
0: Do not clear.
1: Clear.
- 336 -
B-63330EN/03
7551
Value set for the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the first
manual handle pulse generator in the first axis direction in tool axis normal
direction handle feed/interrupt
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 24
In a plane perpendicular to the tool axis direction set in parameter No.
7514 among the basic three axes, a movement along the first axis (the
axis encountered first when the axes are arranged in the order of X, Y,
and Z) may be made. In this case, this parameter sets the status of the
manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to HS1E) for the
first manual handle pulse generator.
Example:
When the tool axis is the Z-axis, and this parameter is set to5
The axes perpendicular to the tool axis are the X- and Y-axes, and
the first axis is the X-axis. When the first manual handle pulse
generator is turned with 5 set as the status of the manual handle
feed axis selection signals for the first manual handle pulse
generator, a movement along the X-axis is made.
<Parameter setting and corresponding manual handle feed axis
selection signal status>
The following table shows the correspondence between the parameter
setting and the status of the manual handle feed axis selection signals
for the first manual handle pulse generator. When the first manual
handle pulse generator is turned with the signals set according to the
parameter setting, operation is performed in specified mode.
HS1E
HS1D
HS1C
HS1B
HS1A
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
- 337 -
7552
B-63330EN/03
manual handle pulse generator in the second axis direction in tool axis
normal direction handle feed/interrupt
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7553
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 24
Set the state of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A
to HS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator when a
movement is made in the direction of the second axis (counted in the
order from X to Y to Z) in the plane perpendicular to the direction of
the tool axis specified in parameter No. 7514 among the three basic
axes. (See the table of correspondence with the manual handle feed
axis selection signals of parameter No. 7551.)
manual handle pulse generator in tool axis direction handle feed/interrupt
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7554
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 24
to HS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator for tool axis
direction handle feed/interrupt. (See the table of correspondence
with the manual handle feed axis selection signals of parameter No.
7551.)
manual handle pulse generator for rotation in the tool axis direction in tool
tip center rotation handle feed/interrupt
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 24
to HS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator for rotation in
the tool axis direction of the tool among the two rotation axes when
tool tip center rotation is performed.
(See the table of
correspondence with the manual handle feed axis selection signals of
parameter No. 7551.)
- 338 -
B-63330EN/03
7555
manual handle pulse generator for rotation in a direction other than the tool
axis direction in tool tip center rotation handle feed/interrupt
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7556
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 24
When tool tip center rotation handle feed/interrupt is performed, this
parameter sets the status of the manual handle feed axis selection
signals (HS1A to HS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator to
perform rotation about one of the two rotation axes that is not in the
tool axis direction. (See the table showing the correspondence
between the parameter setting and the manual handle feed axis
selection signals in the description of parameter No. 7551.)
The following table lists the axes subject to axis movement in
parameter Nos. 7554 and 7555 in different machine configurations.
Tool axis direction
Rotation axis
configuration
7554
7555
Z
Z
X
A, C
B, C
A, B
C
C
A
A
B
B
manual handle pulse generator for tool axis direction tool length
compensation value modification
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 24
A tool axis direction tool length compensation value can be modified
by setting the signal corresponding to the setting of this parameter as
the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the first manual
handle pulse generator, then rotating the first manual handle pulse
generator in the tool axis direction tool length compensation mode
(G43.1) . A modified compensation value is canceled by a reset.
(See the table of correspondence with the manual handle feed axis
selection signals of parameter No. 7551.)
- 339 -
7557
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7558
[Input type]
[Data type]
#6
HSS
#7
NT3
B-63330EN/03
Distance from the center of tool rotation to the tool tip
Setting input
Real
table (A) )
Set the distance from the center of rotation to the tool tip for tool tip
center rotation handle feed/interrupt and tool tip position display.
#7
#6
NT3
HSS
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies how to stop axis movement when the manual pulse
generator is rotated by three-dimensional handle feed at a speed
greater than the clamp speed then is stopped.
0: Stop after the amount of movement specified by the manual
pulse generator is made.
1: Stop immediately.
Specifies whether to use the conventional rotary head or Nutator head
for three-dimensional handle feed/interrupt.
0: Conventional rotary head
1: Nutator head
- 340 -
B-63330EN/03
4.30
OTHER PARAMETERS
#7
7565
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
ZAG
#7
NOF
7567
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
#6
#5
NOF
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
ZAG
Setting input
Bit
Specifies whether to perform the deceleration function (deceleration
by Z-axis falling angle) based on cutting load of fine HPCC.
0: Do not perform.
1: Perform.
After setting 1 in this parameter, be sure to set parameter No. 7591,
No. 7592, and No. 9593.
Specifies whether to ignore an F command in fine HPCC.
0: Do not ignore.
1: Ignore.
When 1 is set in this parameter, the specification of the upper feedrate
limit of parameter No. 7567 is assumed.
Upper feedrate limit for fine HPCC
Setting input
Real
Set an upper feedrate limit for fine HPCC. If a feedrate higher than
the value set in this parameter is specified in the fine HPCC mode, the
feedrate is clamped to the value set in this parameter.
When 0 is set in this parameter, the feedrate is not clamped.
When bit 7 (NOF) of parameter No. 7565 is set to 1, the specification
of the feedrate set in this parameter is assumed. If 0 is set in this
parameter at this time, the PS0187 alarm is issued.
- 341 -
B-63330EN/03
7591
Override for area 2 in deceleration based on fine HPCC cutting load
7592
7593
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Setting input
Integer
%
1 - 100
With the deceleration function based on fine HPCC cutting load, a
specified override can be applied according to the Z-axis falling
angle.
A feedrate found from other conditions is multiplied by the override
value of an area to which the falling angle belongs. Note,
however, that no parameter is available for area 1, and an override of
100% is used at all times.
Area 1 0 < 30
Area 2 30 < 45
Area 3 45 < 60
Area 4 60 < 90
#7
#6
#5
7601
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
SRF
TYB
#2
REL
#2
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies how the slave axis and master axis operate with G28, G30,
and G53 in synchronous control.
0: Independent movements are made to specified positions on the
slave axis and master axis.
1: The same operation is performed on the slave axis and master
axis.
#6
7602
#0
#3
SRF
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#5
#4
#3
#2
DDP
INC
G90
REL
#1
#0
TYB
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether the operation sequence of the index table indexing
axis is of type A or type B.
0: Type A
1: Type B
Specifies whether to round index table indexing axis position display
within one rotation in the relative coordinate system.
0: Do not round.
1: Round.
- 342 -
B-63330EN/03
#3
G90
#4
INC
#5
DDP
7603
[Input type]
[Data type]
Specifies whether the specification of an index table indexing axis

follows the absolute mode/incremental mode specification or is
assumed to be specified as an absolute command.
0: Follow the absolute/incremental mode specification.
1: Assumed to be an absolute command at all times.
Specifies whether to use the shortcut direction as the direction of
rotation in the G90 mode when the M code for negative direction
rotation specification (parameter No. 7632) is not set.
0: Do not use the shortcut direction.
1: Use the shortcut direction.
Specifies whether to use the conventional format or the fixed-point
format as the method of decimal point input for index table indexing
axis specification.
0: Conventional format
1: Fixed-point format
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
OPUS
OPSP
OPKY
OPAT
OPOV
OPHD
OPJG
OPMD
Parameter input
Bit
NOTE
effective.
#0
OPMD
#1
OPJG
#2
OPHD
#3
OPOV
#4
OPAT
Specifies whether to perform mode selection on the software

operators panel.
0: Perform.
1: Do not perform.
Specifies whether to perform jog feed axis selection and manual rapid
traverse switching through the MDI keys.
0: Perform.
1: Do not perform.
Specifies whether to perform manual pulse generator feed axis
selection/magnification setting on the software operators panel.
0: Perform.
1: Do not perform.
Specifies whether to set an override for each of a jog feedrate, cutting
feedrate, rapid traverse rate, and spindle speed on the software
operators panel.
0: Set.
1: Do not set.
Specifies whether to perform optional block skip, single block,
machine lock, and dry run operations on the software operators panel.
0: Perform.
1: Do not perform.
- 343 -
#5
OPKY
#6
OPSP
#7
OPUS
Specifies whether to perform memory protection on the software

operators panel.
0: Perform.
1: Do not perform.
Specifies whether to perform feed hold on the software operators
panel.
0: Perform.
1: Do not perform.
Specifies whether to use the general-purpose switches on the software
operators panel.
0: Use.
1: Do not use.
#7
7605
[Input type]
[Data type]
#7
NBC
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
#4
RDS
#3
RAX
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
PNR
#0
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
RAX
RDS
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit
In the binary input operation mode of the remote buffer, the data
format of axis travel distances is:
0: A special one.
1: A general one.
In the binary input operation mode of the remote buffer, auxiliary
functions are:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
#7
7610
#1
Specifies whether to check for interference when a block is restarted.

0: Check.
1: Do not check.
7609
#2
#2
Parameter input
Bit
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
NBC
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
CBK
#1
#0
PNR
Parameter input
Bit
When a programmable mirror image is applied,
0: G41 and G42 are inverted. (See NOTE.)
1: G41 and G42 are not inverted.
This parameter bit is related to NR3 (bit 2 of parameter No.

6007). See the description of this parameter.
- 344 -
B-63330EN/03
NOTE
If two or more programmable mirror axes are
specified, G41 and G42 are not inverted. The
mirror axis component refers to the vector
component on the axis on which the programmable
mirror is enabled.
#7
CBK
Specifies whether to use parameter No. 7685 or address K to specify

the amount of linear axis division (span value) in exponential
interpolation.
0: Use parameter No. 7685.
1: Use address K together with the G02.2/G03.3 code.
#7
7611
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
XSC
#7
DLT
#6
#5
DLT
RSH
#2
#1
#0
XSC
Specifies whether axis-by-axis scaling magnification setting is valid.

0: Not valid.
1: Valid.
Specifies the timing of updating the number of manual interrupt
pulses and the travel distance on the display screen when the tool axis
direction tool length compensation value is changed.
0: When the execution of the next block to be buffered starts
1: Each time the manual pulse generator is turned
#6
#5
7612
#0
#3
Setting input
Bit
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#4
#4
#3
#2
OVT
HDR
#1
#0
RSH
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to cancel the synchronous mode (G81, G81.5)
when the electronic gear box function (EGB) is used.
0: Cancel upon reset.
1: Do not cancel upon reset. The synchronous mode is canceled by
the G80 or G80.5 code only.
- 345 -
#2
HDR
B-63330EN/03
Helical gear compensation direction (Usually, set 1.)

Example: When the rotation direction of the C-axis is the negative (-)
direction, and a left-twisted helical gear is cut:
0: Set a negative (-) value in P.
1: Set a positive (+) value in P.
When HDR = 1
+Z
-Z
+Z
(a)
(b)
+C
C : +, Z : +, P : +
Compensation
direction: +
(e)
C : -, Z : +, P : +
Compensation
direction: -
-Z
(d)
+C
C : +, Z : -, P : +
Compensation
direction: -
C : +, Z : +, P : Compensation
direction: (f)
-C
(c)
+C
(g)
-C
C : -, Z : +, P : Compensation
direction: +
+C
C : +, Z : -, P : Compensation
direction: +
(h)
-C
C : -, Z : -, P : +
Compensation
direction: +
-C
C : -, Z : -, P : Compensation
direction: -
When HDR = 0 ((a), (b), (c), and (d) are the same as when HDR = 1.)
+Z
-Z
(e)
(f)
-C
C : -, Z : +, P : +
Compensation
direction: +
#6
7613
#4
ART
(h)
-C
C : -, Z : -, P : +
Compensation
direction: -
C : -, Z : +, P : Compensation
direction: -
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
(g)
-C
#5
#4
TWJ
ART
#3
-C
C : -, Z : -, P : Compensation
direction: +
#2
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether the retraction function based on a servo spindle
alarm is valid.
0: Not valid.
1: Valid.
- 346 -
B-63330EN/03
#5
TWJ
Specifies how the amount of manual interrupt is reflected in the slave

axis independent mode or synchronous mode of the twin table control
function.
0: The amount of manual interrupt of the master axis only is
reflected for the master axis and slave axis.
1: The amount of manual interrupt of the master axis is reflected
for the master axis, and the amount of manual interrupt of the
slave axis is reflected for the slave axis.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
7614
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
TRI
#1
TRS
#0
TRI
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether the specification of the G10.6 code for tool
withdrawal and return follows the absolute/incremental mode
specification or is an incremental command.
0: Follow the absolute/increment mode specification.
1: Incremental command at all times.
Specifies operation to be performed upon completion of repositioning
in tool withdrawal and return operation.
0: Automatic operation restarts.
1: Operation stops if the single block switch is on. Automatic
operation restarts when the cycle start button is pressed.
#7
#6
#5
7616
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
TRS
#4
#3
EXT
#2
#1
#0
G60
Parameter input
Bit
NOTE
effective.
#0
G60
Specifies whether the G60 code (single direction positioning) is a

one-shot G code (00 group) or modal G code (01 group) .
0: One-shot G code (00 group)
1: Modal G code (01 group)
#3
EXT
Specifies whether to perform external device subprogram calls.

0: Do not perform.
1: Perform.
When a setting is made so that external device subprogram calls are
not performed, M198 is handled as an ordinary M code.
- 347 -
#7
B-63330EN/03
#6
#5
#4
#3
7617
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
DNA
#1
#0
Setting input
Bit
Specifies whether to issue an alarm if the tool number (pot number)
specified by the tool data deletion command (G10L72) cannot be
found.
0: Issue an alarm (SR422) .
1: Do not issue an alarm, ignoring the deletion command of the
block.
#7
#6
#5
#4
#3
7618
[Input type]
[Data type]
#2
DNA
#2
#1
#0
TM2
TM1
TM0
Parameter input
Bit
NOTE
effective.
#0
#1
#2
TM0
TM1
TM2
This parameter specifies data distribution time in msec for binary

statement input operation. In binary statement input operation through
REMOTE BUFFER, set these parameters according to the following
table.
#7
7620
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
MOP
TM2
TM1
TM0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
#6
#5
MOA
#4
Time required for distributing

data at binary statement inputs
1msec
2 msec
4 msec
8 msec
16 msec
#3
#2
#1
#0
MOP
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to output M, S, T, and B codes before a block to be
restarted is found at program restart time, then the tool is moved to
the machining restart position.
0: Do not output M, S, T, and B codes (the overstore mode is
disabled) .
1: Output M, S, T, and B codes (the overstore mode is enabled) .
- 348 -
B-63330EN/03
#6
MOA
Specifies M, S, T, and B codes to be output before the tool is moved

to a machining restart position at program restart time.
0: The last M, S, T, and B codes are output.
1: All M codes and the last S, T, and B codes are output.
This parameter is valid only when parameter MOP = 1.
7629
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
The amount of retraction in tool withdrawal and return
Setting input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set the amount of retraction when G10.6 for the tool withdrawal and
return function is specified singly. The value set in this parameter is
used as an incremental value for retract operation. This data is valid
only when bit 0 (RPS) of parameter No. 7630 is set to 1.
#7
#6
#5
7630
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
RPS
#1
TRC
7631
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
TRC
RPS
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to perform retraction when the tool retract signal
TRESC is set to 1 after G10.6 is singly specified.
0: Do not perform retraction.
1: Perform retraction using the setting of parameter No. 7629 as the
incremental amount of retraction.
When the tool retract & recovery function is executed to restart
automatic operation in a drilling canned cycle:
0: The same machining operation is performed again. (The same
drilling operation is performed.)
1: The next machining operation is performed. (The next drilling
operation is performed.)
Controlled axis number of an index table indexing axis
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
Set the controlled axis number of an index table indexing axis.
When 0 is set, the fourth axis is assumed.
- 349 -
7632
B-63330EN/03
M code used to specify the negative-direction rotation of an index table

indexing axis
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7633
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 127
0: The rotation direction of an index table indexing axis is determined
by the setting of the parameter (7602#4 INC) and command.
1 to 127: The rotation direction of an index table indexing axis is
always positive. The rotation direction is negative only when a move
command is specified together with the M code set.
M code for turning off synchronization in synchronous control and twin table
control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7634
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 999999999
Specify an M code for switching from synchronous operation to
independent operation or normal operation.
The M code set in this parameter is not buffered.
M code for turning on synchronization in synchronous control and twin table
control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7635
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
1 - 999999999
Specify the M code that causes switching from independent or normal
operation to synchronous operation.
The M code specified for this parameter is treated as an M code
without buffering.
Number of axes in a single block that can accept commands (remote buffer)
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
Set the number of axes in a single block that can accept commands
when using binary input operation mode. Do not change this
parameter during operation.
NOTE
The axes that can accept commands from the
remote buffer are the first n axes in the controlled
axis list, where n is the number of axes specified for
this parameter.
For example, when this parameter is 3, the fourth
and any subsequent axes in the controlled axis list
cannot accept commands.
- 350 -
B-63330EN/03
7636
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7637
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7642
Number of a linear axis for which exponential interpolation is performed
Parameter input
Integer
1 - Max axes
Set the ordinal controlled axis number of a linear axis for which
exponential interpolation is performed.
Number of a rotation axis for which exponential interpolation is performed
Parameter input
Integer
1 - Max axes
Set the ordinal controlled axis number of a rotation axis for which
exponential interpolation is performed.
M code that causes switching to independent operation during twin table
control
Specify the M code that causes switching from synchronous or normal

operation to independent operation.
The M code specified for this parameter is handled as an M code
without buffering.
7651
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7672
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Interference allowance when the block is restarted (d)
Setting input
Real
table (A) ) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 +999999.999)
Set an allowable distance between the normal path after cutter
compensation and the block restart position.
If the distance between the normal path and restart position is equal to
or greater than d, a warning about interference is issued to protect
against overcutting.
Maximum travel of a block executed with smooth interpolation
Setting input
Real
table (A) )
- 351 -
B-63330EN/03
Set the length specified in each block that is to be checked as a

condition for performing smooth interpolation. When the length
specified in a block is longer than this setting, the block is executed
without smooth interpolation.
7673
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7675
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7676
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Angle for which smooth interpolation is not performed
Setting input
Real
degree
0 - 90
Set the angle to be checked as a condition for performing smooth
interpolation. Smooth interpolation is not performed for a point at
which the difference in the angle is greater than this setting.
Minimum travel of a block executed with smooth interpolation
Setting input
Real
table (A) )
Set the length specified in each block that is to be checked for a
condition for performing smooth interpolation. When the length
specified in a block is shorter than this setting, the block is executed
without smooth interpolation.
Maximum tolerance of a block executed with smooth interpolation
Setting input
Real
table (A) )
Set the tolerance to be checked as a condition for performing smooth
interpolation. When the tolerance specified in a block is larger than
this setting, the block is executed without smooth interpolation.
When a value of 0 is set for this parameter, the tolerance is not
checked.
- 352 -
B-63330EN/03
The tolerance means a distance between a curve-C and a line-L.

Curve-C
Line-L
Command
point
Tolerance
7677
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7681
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Minimum tolerance of a block executed with smooth interpolation
Setting input
Real
table (A) )
Set the tolerance to be checked as a condition for performing smooth
interpolation. When the tolerance specified in a block is smaller than
this setting, the block is executed without smooth interpolation.
Normally, set a value near one-tenth of the maximum tolerance
(parameter No. 7676) . When a value of 0.0 is set, the minimum
tolerance is assumed to be one-tenth of the maximum tolerance
(parameter No. 7676) . When a negative value is set, the minimum
tolerance is assumed to be 0.0.
Sequence number for stoppage upon matching
Setting input
Integer
1 - 99999999
When the sequence number set in this parameter appears during
program execution, single block stop state is set after the block is
executed. In this case or in the case of a reset, this parameter is
cleared to 0.
NOTE
1 When 0 is set, stoppage upon matching is disabled.
This means that even when there is a block of N0,
single block stop state does not occur with the block.
2 If a match is found with the sequence number of a
block processed internally within the CNC only (such
as a macro statement, M98, or M99), stoppage upon
matching is not performed.
3 If a match is found with the sequence number of a
block that specifies the number of repeats (such as L
specification in a canned cycle), operation stops
after the specified number of repeats are performed.
- 353 -
B-63330EN/03
NOTE
4 If the sequence number set in this parameter
appears more than once in the program, operation
stops after the first matching block in the execution
flow is executed.
7682
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Minimum positioning angle for an index table indexing axis
Parameter input
Real
degree
table (A) )
Set a minimum positioning angle (angular displacement) for an index
table indexing axis. An angular displacement for positioning
specification must always be an integral multiple of the setting of this
parameter. When 0 is specified, no angular displacement check is
made.
Not only commands but also coordinate system settings and
workpiece origin offsets are checked for a minimum positioning
angle.
7685
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Interval in exponential interpolation for a linear axis (span value)
Setting input
Real
0 - 999999999
When bit 7 (CBK) of parameter No. 7610 is set to 0, set an interval in
exponential interpolation for a linear axis.
#7
7697
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
BEX
#6
#5
TTD
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
WNM
ZG2
BEX
Setting input
Bit
If a tapping mode command (G63) or canned cycle command (except
the rigid tapping cycle command (G84.2) and the rigid reverse tapping
cycle
command
(G84.3))
is
issued,
the
mode
of
acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation is:
0: Turned off.
1: Not turned off.
- 354 -
B-63330EN/03
#1
ZG2
In the function of deceleration with the cutting load of fine

HPCC (deceleration with the Z-axis decent angle), the override
value is in the shape of:
0: A staircase.
1: A slope.
This parameter bit is effective only if ZAG, bit 4 of parameter No.
7565, is 1.
If setting this parameter bit to 1, specify parameters Nos. 7698, 7591,
7592, and 7593.
#2
WNM
#7
TTD
7698
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7702
In tool length/workpiece origin measurement, an automatic

reference position return after a manual numeric command and
measurement is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
On the tool head coordinate display screen and on the manual
interrupt pulse/travel distance display screen, if a rotation axis is
a parameter axis, that rotation axis is:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
Override for area 1 during deceleration with the cutting load of fine HPCC
Parameter input
Integer
%
1 - 100
Set the override value for area 1 with the function of deceleration
with the cutting load of fine HPCC.
This parameter bit is effective only if ZG2, bit 1 of parameter No.
7697, is 1.
Master axis number in synchronous control or twin table control
NOTE
effective.
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
0 - Max axes
Select an axis that is to be synchronized in synchronous control or
twin table control.
Example: Assume the following controlled axis configuration:
First axis : X-axis / Second axis : Y-axis / Third axis : Z-axis /
Fourth axis : U-axis
To synchronize the U-axis with X-axis, set the parameters as follows:
X :0/Y:0/Z:0/U:1
- 355 -
B-63330EN/03
7703
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Drawing axis selection
Setting input
Integeraxis
0-3
Specify which axes are used as drawing axes in tool path drawing and
background drawing.
First drawing axis: 1
Second drawing axis: 2
Third drawing axis: 3
Set 0 for an axis not used for drawing.
When 0 is set for all axes, the three basic axes are used as drawing
axes.
#7
7710
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
MGO
#6
#5
TPM
#4
#3
CTM
MGC
#2
#1
#0
MGO
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies how to output M codes with the program restart M, S, T,
and B output function.
0: Output the last M code only.
1: Output the last M code of each M code group.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when the optional M
code grouping function is selected and bit 3 (MOPR)
of parameter No. 7620 is set to 1.
#3
MGC
Specifies whether to check the M code group when multiple M codes

are specified in a single block.
0: Do not check.
1: Check.
- 356 -
B-63330EN/03
#4
CTM
Specifies the count condition for cumulative cutting time parameters

(Nos. 103 and 104) during automatic operation, as follows:
0: Condition a
1: Condition b
Condition a (CTM = 0)
Condition b (CTM = 1)
G01/G02/G03 command block being

executed
Dry run not specified
(Signal DRN<G004#1> = "0")
Machine lock not specified
(Signal MLK<G004#7> = "0")
Interlock state not specified (Signals
*IT<G000#0>, *AIT<G001#0>, *IT1<G64#4>,
*IT2<G68#4>, ..., *BSL<G001#1>, and
*CSL<G000#1> are all "1", where *IT1,
*IT2, ... represent the axes of interest.)
#7
TPM
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
DDT
#2
FWR
CCT<G045#6>=1
Unconditional
Dry run not specified

(Signal DRN<G004#1> = "0")
Machine lock not specified
(Signal MLK<G004#7> = "0")
Interlock state not specified (Signals
*IT<G000#0>, *AIT<G001#0>, *IT1<G64#4>,
*IT2<G68#4>, ..., *BSL<G001#1>, and
*CSL<G000#1> are all "1", where *IT1, *IT2, ...
represent the axes of interest.)
A feedrate override value is not 0%.
(Signals *FV0 to *FV<G012>)
The second feedrate override value is not 0%.
(Signals *AFV0 to *AFV7<G013>/*AFV0B to
*AFV15B<G146 to G147>)
One of the spindle stop confirmation signals
(SPSTPA to SPSTPD<G026#0, G272#0,
G273#0, and G274#0>) for all spindles is "0".
If CTM = 1 (condition b), setting the cumulative cutting time count

request signal CCT<G045#6> to "1" nullifies the count conditions for
the cumulative cutting time parameters (Nos. 103 and 104).
Specifies whether to use the function for displaying the currently
executed program with the open CNC.
0: Do not use.
1: Use.
#7
7711
CCT<G045#6>=0
G01/G02/G03 command block being executed
#6
#5
EHF
#4
#3
#2
FWR
#1
#0
DDT
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether G41 I_J_K_ or G42 I_J_K_ is used for threedimensional tool compensation or specified-direction tool length
compensation.
0: Used for three-dimensional tool compensation.
1: Used for specified-direction tool length compensation.
Specifies whether to include or exclude rotation axes for the feedrate
in the specified-direction tool length compensation mode.
0: Exclude rotation axes for the feedrate.
1: Include rotation axes for the feedrate.
- 357 -
#6
EHF
B-63330EN/03
Specifies whether feed-forward control on the axial feed axis in

helical compensation is valid during cutting only or in the
synchronization mode based on G81.
0: Valid only during cutting.
1: Valid at all times in the synchronization mode based on G81.
Usually, set 0.
Feed-forward control is usually valid during cutting feed only. When
this parameter is set to 1, however, feed-forward control on the axial
feed axis in helical compensation is valid at all times during
synchronization based on the G81 command for a hobbing machine.
When bit 3 (RFW) of parameter No. 1800 is set to 1, feed-forward
control is valid, regardless of this parameter.
#7
#6
7712
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
PHS
#1
PHD
#4
AMM
#5
FNR
#5
#4
FNR
AMM
HBF
#1
#0
PHD
PHS
Specifies whether to perform acceleration/deceleration when EGB

synchronization is started or canceled if there is no R command in a
G81/G80 block.
0: Do not perform acceleration/deceleration when EGB
synchronization is started or canceled.
1: Perform acceleration/deceleration when EGB synchronization
when EGB synchronization is started or canceled, and
automatically perform phase alignment after acceleration when
synchronization starts.
Specifies the direction of movement for automatic phase alignment.
0: Positive (+) direction
1: Negative (-) direction
If M99 is issued from the main program:
0: The tape is rewound to execute the program again from the
beginning.
1: Alarm PS0018 is issued.
In the fixture offset coordinate system rotation function,

coordinate system rotation is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
#6
#5
7713
#2
#2
Parameter input
Bit
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
#4
#3
#2
G5H
HBF
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to use the memory card interface on the CNC side
or PC side with the CNC screen display function of the open CNC.
0: Use the memory card interface on the CNC side.
1: Use the memory card interface on the PC side.
- 358 -
B-63330EN/03
#3
G5H
7714
In binary input operation mode, acceleration/deceleration before lookahead interpolation or fine HPCC is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Only when the unit time is 1 msec (2 msec for a system with 11 or
more controlled axes), acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead
interpolation or fine HPCC can be disabled in binary input operation
mode by using this parameter.
Note that to do this, acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead
interpolation or fine HPCC must be enabled.
In operation with the unit time shorter than 8 msec,
acceleration/deceleration before look-ahead interpolation or fine
HPCC must be enabled.
Direction of the tool axis of head 2 in parallel axis control and twin table
control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0-3
Enter the direction of the tool axis when the two rotation axes are at
0-degree position.
Data
1
2
3
- 359 -
Tool axis direction

X-axis
Y-axis
Z-axis
7715
B-63330EN/03
Master axis number of the rotation axis of head 2 in parallel axis control and
twin table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
7716
Parameter input
Integer
0 - Max axes
With a machine configured to have no axis rotated in the tool axis
direction, set the axis number of a rotation axis that functions as the
master axis. Set 0 in this parameter for a machine configuration that
involves no master axis. For information about the master axis, see
the description of parameter No. 7515.
Angular displacement of the rotation axis of head 2 in parallel axis control
and twin table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7717
Parameter input
Realaxis
degree
table (A) )
When the three-dimensional handle feed function or the tool axis
direction tool length compensation function is used, set the coordinate
of a rotation axis, among the rotation axes used for tool axis direction
determination, which is not controlled by the CNC. This parameter is
enabled or disabled, depending on the setting of bit 1 (RAP) of
parameter No. 1014.
Offset value for the angular displacement of the rotation axis of head 2 in
parallel axis control and twin table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Realaxis
degree
table (A) )
An offset can be applied to the angular displacement of the threedimensional handle feed function or the tool axis direction tool length
compensation function to shift the direction of movement.
- 360 -
B-63330EN/03
7718
Origin offset value of the rotation axis of head 2 in parallel axis control and
twin table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7719
Parameter input
Realaxis
degree
table (A) )
Set the amount of rotation shifted from the origin of the rotation when
the three-dimensional handle feed function or the tool axis direction
tool length compensation function is used.
Rotation center compensation vector for head 2 in parallel axis control and
twin-table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7723
Parameter input
Real number axis
table (A).)
(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
the vector from the first rotation axis center to second rotation axis
center.
Maximum error in synchronous error checking based on machine
coordinates
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Realaxis
This parameter sets the maximum allowable difference between the
master axis and the slave axis machine coordinate value when the
synchronous error check based on machine coordinates is used. If the
difference of machine coordinates exceeds the value specified in this
parameter, an alarm (OT513) is issued.
Set this parameter to the slave axis.
- 361 -
7724
B-63330EN/03
Maximum compensation value in synchronization alignment based on

machine coordinates
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7729
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7738
Parameter input
Realaxis
This parameter sets the maximum compensation value for
synchronization alignment. If a compensation value exceeds the value
specified with this parameter, an alarm (OT513) is issued, and the
compensation alignment is not performed.
Set this parameter to the slave axis.
Acceleration for workpiece axis acceleration/deceleration
Parameter input
Realaxis
degree/sec/sec
Set an acceleration value for workpiece axis acceleration/
deceleration.
Spindle center compensation vector for head 2 in parallel axis control and
twin-table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real number axis
table (A).)
(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
the spindle center compensation vector.
- 362 -
B-63330EN/03
7745
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7746
Shift vector in tool length compensation along tool axis
Parameter input
Real number axis
table (A).)
(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
the control point shift vector. This parameter is valid when bit 5
(SVC) of parameter No. 7540 is 1 and bit 4 (SBP) of parameter No.
7540 is 1.
Shift vector of tool length compensation along tool axis for head 2 in parallel
axis control and twin-table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7753
Parameter input
Real number axis
table (A).)
(For IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
the control point shift vector. This parameter is valid when bit 5
(SVC) of parameter No. 7540 is 1 and bit 4 (SBP) of parameter No.
7540 is 1.
Value to be set for the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the first
manual handle pulse generator in the first axis direction for tool axis normal
direction handle feed/interrupt of head 2 in parallel axis control and twin
table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 24
When a movement is made by the handle in the first axis direction
(first axis when counting X (U) , Y (V) , and Z (W) in this order) in
the plane that is perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis, among
the three basic axes, which is set in parameter No. 7714, set the state
of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to HS1E) for
the first manual handle pulse generator.
(See the table of
NOTE
When 0 is set, tool axis normal direction handle feed
is disabled.
However, set 0 in this parameter when parallel axis
control and twin table control are not used.
- 363 -
7754
B-63330EN/03
Value to be set for the handle feed axis selection signals for the first manual
handle pulse generator in the second axis direction for tool axis normal
direction handle feed/interrupt of head 2 in parallel axis control and twin
table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 24
When a movement is made by the handle in the second axis direction
(second axis when counting X (U) , Y (V) , and Z (W) in this order)
in the plane that is perpendicular to the direction of the tool axis,
among the three basic axes, which is set in parameter No. 7714, set
the state of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to
HS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator. (See the table of
NOTE
When 0 is set, tool axis normal direction handle feed
is disabled.
7755
handle pulse generator for tool axis direction handle feed/interrupt of head 2
in parallel axis control and twin table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 24
to HS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator when tool axis
direction handle feed is performed. When the manual handle feed axis
selection signals for the first manual handle pulse generator is set to
the state set in this parameter in the three-dimensional handle feed
mode, turning the first manual handle pulse generator performs tool
axis direction handle feed operation.
(See the table of
NOTE
When 0 is set, tool axis direction handle feed is
disabled.
- 364 -
B-63330EN/03
7756
handle pulse generator for tool axis direction rotation of the tool tip center of
head 2 in parallel axis control and twin table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 24
to HS1E) for the first manual handle pulse generator when one of the
two rotation axes of head 2 rotates in the tool axis direction. (See
the table of correspondence with the manual handle feed axis
selection signals of parameter No. 7551.)
NOTE
When 0 is set, tool tip center rotation handle feed is
disabled.
7757
handle pulse generator for rotation in a direction other than the tool axis
direction of the tool tip center of head 2 in parallel axis control and twin table
control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 24
When rotation is performed about one of the two rotation axes of head
2 that is not in the tool axis direction, this parameter sets the status of
the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to HS1E) .
(See the table showing the correspondence between the parameter
setting and the manual handle feed axis selection signals in the
description of parameter No. 7551.)
The following table lists the axes subject to axis movement in
parameter Nos. 7756 and 7757 in different machine configurations.
Tool axis direction
Rotation axis configuration
7756
7757
Z
Z
X
A,C
B,C
A,B
C
C
A
A
B
B
NOTE
When 0 is set, tool tip center rotation handle feed is
disabled.
- 365 -
7758
B-63330EN/03
Value to be set for the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the first
manual handle pulse generator for modification to the tool axis direction tool
length compensation value of head 2 in parallel axis control and twin table
control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integer
0 - 24
In the tool axis direction tool length compensation mode (G43.1) , set
the signal corresponding to the setting of this parameter as the manual
handle feed axis selection signals for the first manual handle pulse
generator, then turn the first manual handle pulse generator. The tool
axis direction tool length compensation value is then modified. The
modified compensation value is canceled by a reset. (See the table
of correspondence with the manual handle feed axis selection signals
of parameter No. 7551.)
NOTE
When 0 is set, tool axis direction tool length
compensation value modification is disabled.
7759
Distance from the tool rotation center of head 2 to the tool tip in parallel axis
control and twin table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7760
Setting input
Real
table (A) )
Set the distance from the tool rotation center to the tool tip for tool tip
center rotation handle feed/interrupt and tool tip position display.
Tool holder offset value for tool axis direction tool length compensation of
head 2 in parallel axis control and twin table control
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
table (A) )
Set an offset value (tool holder offset value) for the machine-specific
portion from the rotation center of the rotation axis to the tool
mounting position when the tool axis direction tool length
compensation function is used.
- 366 -
B-63330EN/03
7765
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7767
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Interval at which time is recorded in the operation history
Parameter input
Integer
min
0 - 1440
If history data is recorded not at specified intervals, time information
is recorded in the history data at specified intervals.
When 0 is set, time information is recorded at intervals of 10 minutes.
Allowable cumulative movement value for torque control
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 32767
Set an allowable cumulative movement value in the torque control
mode.
If the cumulative movement value exceeds the value set in this
parameter, a servo alarm (SV0126) is issued.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (TQF) of parameter
No. 1409 is set to 0.
7768
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Torque control cancellation limit
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
1 - 32767
Set a cancellation limit value used to cancel the torque control mode.
When the torque control mode is canceled, position control is
resumed if the positional deviation becomes equal to or less than the
setting of this parameter.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (TQF) of parameter
No. 1409 is set to 0.
- 367 -
7793
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7794
B-63330EN/03
Limit for normal-direction control axis rotation
Parameter input
Real
degree
1 - 999999999
A specified limit functions as a limit for ignoring the angular
displacement of the normal-direction control axis. The parameter
means as follows:
When the angular displacement calculated in normal-direction control
is less than the limit specified in this parameter, the block that
specifies the calculated angular displacement is not inserted in the
program. The ignored angular displacement is added to the angular
displacement to be calculated next, which in turn is compared with
the parameter value.
Note)
When an angle of 360 degrees or larger is specified in this
parameter, the block that specifies the angular displacement is
not inserted in the program.
When an angle of 180 degrees or larger is specified in this
parameter, the block that specifies the angular displacement is
not inserted in the program unless circular interpolation is
performed with an angle of 180 degrees or larger.
Limit of the travel distance moved using the normal-direction angle in the
previous block
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Real
1 - 999999999
Set a limit on the travel distance moved using the normal-direction
angle of the previous block without modification.
7795
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Retract feedrate
Parameter input
Real
Set a feedrate for retraction along each axis.
- 368 -
B-63330EN/03
7796
Retract amount
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
7799
Parameter input
Realaxis
table (A) )
Set a retract amount for each axis.
Limit value for synchronization error check based on position deviation
[Input type]
[Data type]
[Unit of data]
[Valid data range]
Parameter input
Integeraxis
detection unit
0 - 999999999
Alarm OT513 is issued if the absolute positional deviation difference
between the master axis and slave axis during synchronization control
exceeds the value specified in this parameter.
Set a desired value for the slave axis.
When 0 is set in this parameter, no check is made.
#7
#6
#5
8412
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
EST
#1
HIK
#5
FDI
FDI
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
HIK
EST
Parameter input
Bit
The simple start command for NURBS interpolation is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
The high-precision knot command for NURBS interpolation is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Parametric feedrate control for NURBS interpolation is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- 369 -
4.31
B-63330EN/03
SERVICE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 8000 AND LATER)

#7
#6
#5
#4
8000
[Input type]
[Data type]
#0
PWE
#1
NAP
#2
PRA
#3
NLP
SBU
#6
#5
NCS
NLP
PRA
NAP
PWE
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether to save file SRAM in a batch from the memory card
input/output screen.
0: Do not save.
1: Save.
#6
#5
8010
#0
#0
SBU
#7
[Input type]
[Data type]
#1
Specifies whether to enable those parameters that cannot be set by

setting input to be set from an external device or the MDI unit.
0: Not enable.
1: Enable.
Specifies whether to switch the screen display to the alarm message
screen automatically when an alarm is issued.
0: Switch.
1: Do not switch.
Specifies whether to issue an alarm when the PWE parameter is set to
1 (to enable parameter setting) .
0: Issue an alarm.
From P-CODE, the parameters for the macro executor are:
0: Loaded.
1: Not loaded.
Usually, the parameters for the macro executor are initialized to the
values set in P-CODE when the power is turned on. If this bit is set
to 1, none of these parameters will be initialized, except parameters
Nos. 8500, 8501, 8549, and 8550.
#7
#6
#2
Setting input
Bit
8001
[Input type]
[Data type]
#3
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0
NCS
Parameter input
Bit
Specifies whether the setting of parameter No. 8000 is cleared to 0 or
preserved when the power to the NC is turned off.
0: Cleared to 0.
1: Preserved.
- 370 -
B-63330EN/03
4.32
MACRO EXECUTOR PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 8500 AND

LATER)
A detailed description of parameters between 8500 and 8599 is
omitted.
See FANUC Series 15i/150i-MODEL A Programming Manual
(Macro Compiler/Macro Executor (B-63323EN-2) for details.
- 371 -
APPENDIX
A.CHARACTER CODE LIST
B-63330EN/03
CHARACTER CODE LIST
Character
Code
Character
Code
065
Comment
054
066
055
067
056
068
069
070
Comment
057
032
Space
033
Exclamation mark
071
034
Quotation marks
072
035
Sharp
073
036
Dollar mark
074
037
Percent
075
&
038
Ampersand
076
039
Apostrophe
077
040
Left parenthesis
078
041
Right parenthesis
079
042
Asterisk
080
043
Positive sign
081
044
Comma
082
045
Negative sign
083
046
Period
084
047
Slash
085
058
Colon
086
059
Semicolon
087
<
060
Left angle bracket
088
061
Equal sign
089
>
062
Right angle bracket
090
063
Question mark
048
064
Commercial at mark
049
091
Left square bracket
050
051
092
Yen mark
052
093
Right square bracket
053
095
Underline
094
- 375 -
B.LIST OF COMPATIBLE PARAMETERS FOR Series 15-MB
B-63330EN/03
LIST OF COMPATIBLE PARAMETERS

FOR Series 15-MB
Following parameters are compatible completely with the parameter
of Series 15-MB
Parameters (Data No.0000 to 0999)

0
22
47
109
10
23
100
11
31
101
12
32
102
13
40
103
14
42
104
15
43
105
16
44
106
20
45
107
21
46
108
1004
1023
1200
1417
1542
1624
1702
1715
1725
1735
1758
1768
1778
1788
1798
1820
1841
1857
1867
1878
1910
1955
1967
1977
1987
1997
1005
1030
1400
1450
1549
1626
1703
1716
1726
1736
1759
1769
1779
1789
1799
1821
1842
1858
1868
1879
1912
1957
1968
1978
1988
1998
1006
1031
1401
1496
1560
1628
1704
1717
1727
1737
1760
1770
1780
1790
1800
1822
1849
1859
1869
1881
1913
1958
1969
1979
1989
1999
1007
1032
1402
1517
1562
1635
1705
1718
1728
1738
1761
1771
1781
1791
1802
1825
1850
1860
1870
1883
1914
1959
1970
1980
1990
1008
1033
1403
1518
1569
1636
1706
1719
1729
1752
1762
1772
1782
1792
1803
1827
1851
1861
1871
1891
1915
1961
1971
1981
1991
1009
1049
1404
1519
1600
1644
1710
1720
1730
1753
1763
1773
1783
1793
1804
1828
1852
1862
1873
1892
1917
1962
1972
1982
1992
1010
1056
1409
1520
1601
1645
1711
1721
1731
1754
1764
1774
1784
1794
1810
1829
1853
1863
1874
1893
1918
1963
1973
1983
1993

1000
1020
1070
1412
1522
1604
1656
1712
1722
1732
1755
1765
1775
1785
1795
1815
1830
1854
1864
1875
1894
1951
1964
1974
1984
1994
1001
1021
1191
1413
1529
1620
1700
1713
1723
1733
1756
1766
1776
1786
1796
1816
1832
1855
1865
1876
1895
1952
1965
1975
1985
1995
1002
1022
1196
1414
1540
1622
1701
1714
1724
1734
1757
1767
1777
1787
1797
1817
1837
1856
1866
1877
1896
1953
1966
1976
1986
1996
- 376 -
B-63330EN/03

2000
2015
2200
2210
2276
2318
2332
2344
2356
2368
2382
2403
2417
2001
2016
2201
2211
2277
2321
2333
2345
2357
2371
2383
2404
2418
2002
2020
2202
2214
2278
2322
2334
2346
2358
2372
2384
2405
2426
2003
2021
2203
2217
2311
2323
2335
2347
2361
2373
2385
2407
2428
2004
2030
2204
2231
2312
2324
2336
2348
2362
2374
2386
2411
2429
2005
2031
2205
2232
2313
2325
2337
2351
2363
2375
2387
2412
2431
2010
2032
2206
2233
2314
2326
2338
2352
2364
2376
2388
2413
2011
2033
2207
2234
2315
2327
2341
2353
2365
2377
2400
2414
2012
2034
2208
2274
2316
2328
2342
2354
2366
2378
2401
2415
2014
2049
2209
2275
2317
2331
2343
2355
2367
2381
2402
2416
3022
3032
3042
3052
3062
3072
3082
3092
3102
3112
3122
3132
3142
3152
3162
3172
3202
3212
3222
3232
3242
3252
3262
3272
3282
3292
3302
3312
3023
3033
3043
3053
3063
3073
3083
3093
3103
3113
3123
3133
3143
3153
3163
3173
3203
3213
3223
3233
3243
3253
3263
3273
3283
3293
3303
3313
3024
3034
3044
3054
3064
3074
3084
3094
3104
3114
3124
3134
3144
3154
3164
3174
3204
3214
3224
3234
3244
3254
3264
3274
3284
3294
3304
3314
3025
3035
3045
3055
3065
3075
3085
3095
3105
3115
3125
3135
3145
3155
3165
3175
3205
3215
3225
3235
3245
3255
3265
3275
3285
3295
3305
3315
3026
3036
3046
3056
3066
3076
3086
3096
3106
3116
3126
3136
3146
3156
3166
3196
3206
3216
3226
3236
3246
3256
3266
3276
3286
3296
3306
3316
3027
3037
3047
3057
3067
3077
3087
3097
3107
3117
3127
3137
3147
3157
3167
3197
3207
3217
3227
3237
3247
3257
3267
3277
3287
3297
3307
3317

3000
3028
3038
3048
3058
3068
3078
3088
3098
3108
3118
3128
3138
3148
3158
3168
3198
3208
3218
3228
3238
3248
3258
3268
3278
3288
3298
3308
3015
3029
3039
3049
3059
3069
3079
3089
3099
3109
3119
3129
3139
3149
3159
3169
3199
3209
3219
3229
3239
3249
3259
3269
3279
3289
3299
3309
3020
3030
3040
3050
3060
3070
3080
3090
3100
3110
3120
3130
3140
3150
3160
3170
3200
3210
3220
3230
3240
3250
3260
3270
3280
3290
3300
3310
3021
3031
3041
3051
3061
3071
3081
3091
3101
3111
3121
3131
3141
3151
3161
3171
3201
3211
3221
3231
3241
3251
3261
3271
3281
3291
3301
3311
- 377 -

3318
3328
3338
3348
3360
3370
3382
3392
3319
3329
3339
3349
3361
3371
3383
3393
3320
3330
3340
3350
3362
3372
3384
3321
3331
3341
3351
3363
3375
3385
B-63330EN/03
3322
3332
3342
3354
3364
3376
3386
3323
3333
3343
3355
3365
3377
3387
3324
3334
3344
3356
3366
3378
3388
3325
3335
3345
3357
3367
3379
3389
3326
3336
3346
3358
3368
3380
3390
3327
3337
3347
3359
3369
3381
3391
4611
4821
4612
4822
4615
4824
4616
4831
4619
4832
4620
4833
5013
5037
5110
5141
5226
5278
5431
5448
5473
5494
5521
5563
5584
5606
5623
5721
5995
5028
5070
5111
5142
5227
5279
5433
5449
5474
5495
5522
5564
5585
5607
5624
5722
5996
5029
5071
5112
5150
5270
5420
5440
5450
5481
5501
5523
5571
5591
5608
5625
5751
5997
5030
5072
5120
5151
5271
5421
5441
5451
5482
5502
5524
5572
5592
5609
5626
5757
5031
5073
5121
5152
5272
5422
5442
5461
5483
5503
5551
5573
5593
5611
5627
5804
5032
5074
5122
5160
5273
5423
5443
5462
5484
5504
5552
5574
5594
5612
5628
5810
6004
6064
6074
6088
6201
6005
6065
6075
6109
6240
6007
6066
6076
6110
6400
6020
6067
6080
6111
6410
6021
6068
6081
6122
6411
6059
6069
6082
6124
6421

4606
4621
4834
4607
4622
4835
4608
4623
4610
4624

5000
5033
5081
5130
5161
5274
5426
5444
5463
5485
5511
5553
5580
5595
5613
5680
5811
5001
5034
5082
5131
5162
5275
5427
5445
5464
5491
5512
5554
5581
5602
5614
5681
5820
5002
5035
5083
5132
5200
5276
5428
5446
5471
5492
5513
5561
5582
5603
5621
5701
5821
5003
5036
5084
5140
5210
5277
5430
5447
5472
5493
5514
5562
5583
5605
5622
5702
5994

6000
6060
6070
6083
6126
6610
6001
6061
6071
6085
6128
6612
6002
6062
6072
6086
6129
6630
6003
6063
6073
6087
6200
- 378 -
B-63330EN/03

7000
7017
7056
7066
7077
7087
7401
7556
7611
7634
7765
7002
7033
7057
7067
7078
7088
7442
7558
7612
7635
7767
7004
7034
7058
7068
7079
7089
7540
7565
7613
7636
7768
7010
7045
7059
7069
7080
7110
7543
7591
7614
7637
7011
7050
7060
7071
7081
7130
7550
7592
7616
7681
7012
7051
7061
7072
7082
7200
7551
7593
7617
7702
7013
7052
7062
7073
7083
7203
7552
7602
7618
7703
7014
7053
7063
7074
7084
7220
7553
7605
7620
7710
7015
7054
7064
7075
7085
7300
7554
7609
7631
7711
7016
7055
7065
7076
7086
7400
7555
7610
7632
7712
8502
8514
8524
8538
8551
8600
8503
8515
8525
8539
8552
8601
8504
8516
8526
8540
8555
8602
8507
8517
8527
8544
8556
8603
8508
8518
8528
8545
8557
8509
8519
8529
8546
8558

8000
8510
8520
8530
8547
8570
8010
8511
8521
8531
8548
8571
8403
8512
8522
8532
8549
8572
8500
8513
8523
8533
8550
8573
- 379 -
INDEX
B-63330EN/03
INDEX
INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS ON
<A>
THE FLOPPY DIRECTORY SCREEN............................. 16
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL
PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1600 AND LATER)............ 99
AXIS CONTROL PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1000
AND LATER) .................................................................... 43
<C>

THE MEMORY CARD SCREEN ..................................... 18
THE PARAMETER SCREEN ........................................... 13
INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
USING EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES ........... 12
CANNED CYCLE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 6200

AND LATER) .................................................................... 293
CHARACTER CODE LIST ............................................... 375
CHOPPING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1181 AND
LATER) .............................................................................. 66
<L>
LIST OF COMPATIBLE PARAMETERS FOR SERIES
15-MB ................................................................................ 376
<M>
COORDINATE SYSTEM PARAMETERS (DATA NO.

1200 AND LATER) ........................................................... 69
MACRO EXECUTOR PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 8500
CUSTOM MACRO PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7000
AND LATER)..................................................................... 371
AND LATER) .................................................................... 303
<D>
<O>
OTHER PARAMETERS.................................................... 341
DATA I/O PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5000 AND

LATER) .............................................................................. 195
DATA TYPES .................................................................... 27
DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS ................................. 27
DI/DO PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2000 AND LATER) 137
DISPLAY/MDI AND EDIT PARAMETERS (DATA NO.
2200 AND LATER) ........................................................... 151
DISPLAYING PARAMETERS ......................................... 2
<P>
PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION PARAMETERS
(DATA NO. 5420 AND LATER)....................................... 211
PROGRAM PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 2400 AND
LATER) .............................................................................. 169
PROGRAM RESTART, BLOCK RESTART, AND TOOL
RETRACTION AND RETURN PARAMETERS (DATA
NO. 7110 AND LATER).................................................... 317
DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR
<R>
COMPENSATION DATA ................................................. 1

DISPLAYING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION
REPRESENTATION OF PARAMETERS ........................ 28
DATA ................................................................................. 5
SCALING AND COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION
DRAWING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 4820 AND
PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 6400 AND LATER)............ 298
LATER) .............................................................................. 192
<F>
<S>
SERVICE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 8000 AND
FEEDRATE PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 1400 AND
LATER) .............................................................................. 370
LATER) .............................................................................. 74
SERVO PARAMETER (DATA NO. 1700 TO 1999 AND
FIVE-AXIS CONTROL FUNCTION PARAMETERS
2600 AND LATER)............................................................ 111
(DATA NO. 7514 AND LATER)....................................... 332
SETTING PARAMETERS................................................. 8
SETTING PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 0000 AND
<A>
Input/Output Format for Pitch Error Compensation Data .. 26
INPUT/OUTPUT FORMATS ............................................ 20
Input/Output Formats for Parameters ................................. 20
i-1
LATER) .............................................................................. 31
SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR
COMPENSATION DATA ................................................. 7
SETTING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA ..... 10
INDEX
B-63330EN/03
SKIP FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 7200

AND LATER) .................................................................... 318
SPINDLE CONTROL PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5602
AND LATER) .................................................................... 226
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT AND CS CONTOUR
CONTROL FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO.
3000 AND LATER) ........................................................... 180
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT AND CS CONTOUR
CONTROL FUNCTION PARAMETERS (DATA NO.
3000 AND LATER) ........................................................... 181
STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES............. 29
STROKE LIMIT PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 5200 AND
LATER) .............................................................................. 203
<A>
TIMER PARAMETERS (DATA NO. 0100 AND
LATER) .............................................................................. 40
TOOL COMPENSATION PARAMETERS (DATA NO.
6000 AND LATER) ........................................................... 267
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PARAMETERS (DATA
NO. 7400 AND LATER).................................................... 327
i-2
Oct., 2000
Jan., 2000
Feb., 1999
Date
03
02
01
Edition
Contents
Power Mate CNC manager, 3-dimensional circular

interpolation, Spindle speed fluctuation detection, Sub
screen, Help function, Screen hard copy, DNC Operation
from Memory card interface, and Tool length
compensation in tool axis direction with Twin Table control
Parameters for following functions (STEP 2 and 3) were added.
Punch of CR,LF for EOB, Feedrate Specification on a Virtual Circle for

a Rotary Axis, Cutting/Rapid Traverse In-position Check, Changing
Active Offset Value with Manual Move, Smooth Backlash
Compensation, Fine Torque Sensing, Nano Interpolation Type Error
Compensation, Rigid tapping additional function, Oiling Signal (Canned
Cycle), Additional system variable, Additional function for
Synchronization error check, NURBS Interpolation Additional Function,
Automatic feedrate control by area, Override for deceleration functions,
Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation of linear type rapid,
Deceleration stop at power failure, Turning mode and compensation
clamp dual position feedback, Do signal output by softkey, MDI
operation, Enhancement of waveform diagnosis function,
Enhancement of distance coded linear scale, Specification of diameter
entry for tool compensation value, Three-dimensional tool
compensation, Grinding wheel wear compensation, Control point
compensation of tool length compensation along tool axis, Loading of
Multiple SERVO Programs, Setup of FSSBs If using High Speed HRV
Control, High Speed HRV Mode, 2-LCD-UNIT Connection Function,
Thermal Growth Compensation along Tool Vector, Three-dimensional
Cutter Compensation at Tool Center Point, Cutter Compensation for
Rotary Table
Parameters for following functions (STEP 4 to 6) were added.
Edition
Date
FANUC Series 15i/150i-MODEL A PARAMETER MANUAL (B-63330EN)
Revision Record
Contents
No part of this manual may be

reproduced in any form.
All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

63330en PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

63330en PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 15i / 150iModel A

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes

Copyright 2000 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

- Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR

SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR

INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS USING

INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS ON THE

Input/Output Formats for Parameters .................................................................... 20

Input/Output Format for Pitch Error Compensation Data ..................................... 26

DATA TYPES ..............................................................................................27

ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL PARAMETERS

CHARACTER CODE LIST .................................................................375

LIST OF COMPATIBLE PARAMETERS FOR SERIES 15-MB..........376

1.DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH

1.DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

Displaying the Parameter screen

Fig. 1.1 (a) Parameter Screen

1.DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

Displaying specified parameters

Select Group screen

Displaying the Select Group screen

Fig. 1.1 (b) Select Group Screen

1.DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

Ending group selection

1.DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

DISPLAYING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

Pitch Error Compensation screen

Displaying the Pitch Error Compensation screen

Fig. 1.2 (a) Pitch Error Compensation Screen

1.DISPLAYING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

Displaying specified pitch error compensation data

2.SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH

2.SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

Procedure for setting parameters

- Setting parameter PWE

- Moving the cursor

- Entering a setting (absolute input)

2.SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

- Entering a setting (incremental input)

- Ending the setting

2.SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

SETTING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

Procedure for setting pitch error compensation data

- Setting parameter PWE

- Moving the cursor

- Entering a setting (absolute input)

2.SETTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA

- Entering a setting (incremental input)

3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS USING EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES

3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS USING EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES

INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS ON THE

Displaying the Parameter screen

3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS USING EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES

3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS USING EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES

3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS USING EXTERNAL INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES